Skip to main content

Full text of "The sounds of English; an introduction to phonetics"

See other formats


SOUNDS  OF  ENGLISH 


:00 


m~          BY  HENRY  SWEET 


THE 

SOUNDS  OF  ENGLISH 

AN  INTRODUCTION  TO 
PHONETICS 


BY 


HENRY  SWEET,  M.A. 

UNIVERSITY   READER    IN    PHONETICS,   OXFORD 


^  ,  ,a 

OXFORD 
AT  THE   CLARENDON   PRESS 


HENRY  FROWDE,   M.A. 

PUBLISHER  TO   THE   UNIVERSITY  OF   OXFORD 

LONDON,    EDINBURGH 
NEW    YORK    AND    TORONTO 


1135 


-,-•;. 


PREFACE 

THE  object  of  this  work  is  sufficiently  shown  in  its 
title. 

It  differs  from  my  Primer  of  Phonetics  (§  367) — to 
which  it  will  serve  as  an  introduction — not  only  in  being 
more  elementary,  more  systematically  graduated,  and 
more  definitely  based  on  the  English  sound-system,  but 
in  being  better  adapted  for  self-instruction  in  other 
respects  as  well.  I  hope  it  will  be  found  specially  useful 
to  those  who  have  to  teach  phonetics  in  connexion  with 
elocution  and  modern  languages. 

In  order  to  make  the  book  as  generally  useful  as 
possible,  I  have  also  dealt  briefly  with  the  applications 
of  phonetics  to  historical  and  comparative  philology,  as 
well  as  to  the  more  practical  sides  of  the  study  of 
language ;  and  have  added  a  bibliography  to  serve  as 
a  first  guide  to  the  beginner  in  his  further  progress,  and 
to  guard  him  against  one-sidedness  as  well  as  uncritical 
assimilation  of  the  latest  views  merely  because  they 
are  new. 

This  book  is  the  outcome  of  an  exceptionally  long 
and  varied  experience  as  learner  and  teacher  of  pho- 
netics. In  early  youth  I  enjoyed  the  inestimable  privi- 
lege of  being  a  pupil  of  A.  M.  Bell,  the  author  of  Visible 
Speech,  and  of  personally  discussing  phonetic  questions 

A2 


4  PREFACE 

with  such  authorities  as  A.  J.  Ellis,  Prince  L.  L. 
Bonaparte,  J.  Storm,  and  afterwards  E.  Sievers,  together 
with  many  others — in  fact,  with  nearly  all  the  pioneers 
of  modern  phonetics. 

The  impetus  given  to  the  study  of  phonetics  by  the 
new  regulation  of  the  Board  of  Education  has  brought 
with  it  two  inevitable  drawbacks.  Many  teachers  who 
used  to  profess  not  to  know  what  phonetics  was,  forth- 
with announced  classes  in  it.  And  then  came  a  flood 
of  worthless  publications  on  phonetics — most  of  them 
uncritical  compilations  from  foreign  works  unsuited  for 
English  needs. 

I  have,  therefore,  in  conclusion,  to  express  the  hope 
that  our  educational  authorities  will  be  cautious  in 
introducing  phonetics  and  appointing  teachers  of  it — and 
that  they  will  profit  by  the  experience  of  Scotland. 

H.  S. 
OXFORD,  October,  1907. 


CONTENTS 

PACK 

SPOKEN  ENGLISH 7 

SOUND-NOTATION 9 

ANALYSIS  or  SOUNDS 14 

THE  ORGANS  OP  SPEECH 18 

SPEECH-SOUNDS 22 

Vowels  and  Consonants 22 

Vowels 24 

Consonants 39 

Non-expiratory  Sounds 47 

SYNTHESIS 49 

Glides 53 

PHONETIC  STRUCTURE  OP  ENGLISH 57 

Sound-junction 58 

Gradation .  65 

THE  SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH       ....  70 
STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION:    PHONETICS   AND  P^LOCU- 


TION           

76 

89 

PHONOLOGY  

.      100 

STUDY  OP  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

.      103 

Practical  and  Theoretical  Study 
Acquisition  of  New  Sounds     .... 
Objective  Methods  :  Instrumental  Phonetics  . 
Study  of  the  Literature  
Phonetic  Notation  

.       104 
.       105 
.       107 
.      110 
.      112 

6  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

THE  TEACHING  OF  PHONETICS 118 

Phonetics  in  Language-teaching 118 

Qualifications  of  the  Teacher 120 

Qualifications  of  the  Learner 123 

Ear-training:  Phonetic  Dictation 124 

Helps 127 

Necessity  of  individual  attention 128 

Time 129 

Examining  in  Phonetics .130 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 134 

NOTES  ON  THE  TEXTS .  140 


CONTRACTIONS 


Am.  =  American. 

E.  =  English. 

F.  =  French. 

G.  =  German. 
Ir.  «=  Irish. 
It.  =  Italian. 


N.  =  North(ern). 
occ.  =  occasional. 
S.  =  South(ern). 
Sc.  =  Scotch. 
St.  =  Standard. 
W.  =  West(ern). 


SPOKEN  ENGLISH 

1.  No  language  is  perfectly  uniform  over  the  whole  of  its 
area.     Just  as  languages  differ  from  each  other  in  phonetic 
structure— in  their  sounds  and  pronunciation — so  also  dia- 
lects of  the  same  language  differ  from  each  other  more  or 
less.      Thus  the  sound-system  of  Lowland  Scotch,  which 
was  originally  a  mere  variety  of  Northern  English,  differs 
considerably  from  that  of  Standard  English. 

2.  Standard  English  itself  was  originally  that  mixture 
of  the  Midland  and  Southern  dialects  which  was  spoken  in 
London  during  the  Middle  Ages,  just  as  Standard  French 
is  the  dialect  of  that  district  of  which  Paris  is  the  centre. 

3.  Standard   English,   like  Standard  French,   is   now   a 
class-dialect  more  than  a  local  dialect :  it  is  the  language  of 
the  educated  all  over  Great  Britain.     But  although  it  has, 
to  a  great  extent,  supplanted  the  local  dialects,  it  is  still 
liable  to  be  influenced  by  them  ;  each  speaker  imports  into 
it  something  of  his  own  local  form  of  speech,  whether  it  be 
a  rustic  dialect  or  the  vulgar  cockney  of  London,  Liverpool, 
or  any  other  large  town.     The  best  speakers  of  Standard 
English  are  those  whose  pronunciation,  and  language  gene- 
rally, least  betray  their  locality. 

4.  English,  like  all  living  languages,  changes  from  gene- 
ration to  generation  :  slight  and  imperceptible  as  the  differ- 
ences in  the  pronunciation  of  father  and  son  may  appear  to 
be,  there   is  always  some   change  under  ordinary  normal 
conditions.     Hence  pronunciations  which  are  vulgar  in  one 
century  may  become  fashionable  in  the  next,  sounds  which 
are  distinct  in  one  generation  may  be  confounded  in  another, 
and  new  distinctions  may  be  made,  new  sounds  may 


8  SPOKEN  ENGLISH 

5.  A  spoken  language  is,  therefore,  a  vague  and  floating 
entity.     As  regards  English,  the  very  fixity  of  its  written 
form  gives  all  the  freer  play  to  the  manifold  influences 
which  cause  change. 

6.  A  standard  spoken  language  is,  strictly  speaking,  an 
abstraction.     No   two  speakers  of  Standard  English   pro- 
nounce exactly  alike.     And  yet  they  all  have  something 
in  common  in  almost  every  sound  they  utter.     There  are 
some  peculiarities  of  pronunciation  which  pass  unnoticed, 
while  others,  less  considerable  perhaps  in  themselves,  are 
at   once  felt  as  archaisms,  vulgarisms,  provincialisms,   or 
affectations,  as  the  case  may  be,  by  the  majority  of  educated 
speakers 


SOUND-NOTATION 

7.  The  traditional  or  '  nomic '  orthography  of  English, 
as  of  most  languages,  is  only  imperfectly  phonetic.     The 
divergence  between  sound  and  symbol  which  makes  Eng- 
lish spelling  unphonetic  is  in  most  cases  the  result  of  the 
retention  of  phonetic  spellings  after  they  had  become  un- 
phonetic through  changes  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  words 
which  they  represent.     Thus  such  spellings  as  Might  and 
tvright  were  still  phonetic  in  the  time  of  Chaucer  ;  for  in 
the  Late  Middle  English   of  the  fourteenth  century  the 
initial  consonants  of  these  words  were  still  pronounced,  and 
the  yli  still  had  the  sound  of  ch  in  German  ich.     So  also  we 
write  see  and  sea  differently,  not  for  the  sake  of  making  an 
arbitrary  distinction,   but   because   they  were   pronounced 
differently  till  within  the  last  few  centuries,  as  they  still 
are  in  the  English  spoken  in  Ireland. 

8.  In   dealing  with  the  sounds   of  English   it  becomes 
necessary  therefore  to  adopt  a  phonetic  notation.     It  is  now 
generally  agreed  that  the  best  way  of  constructing  such  a 
notation  is  to  give  the  letters  of  the  Roman  alphabet  the 
sounds  they  had  in  the  later  Latin  pronunciation,  with,  of 
course,  such  modifications  as  seem  to  be  improvements  or 
otherwise  desirable,  supplementing  the  defects  of  the  Roman 
alphabet  by  adding  new  letters  when  required.     This  is  the 
'  Romic  '  or  international  basis. 

9.  This  basis  may  be  used  to  construct  either  a  '  broad  ' 
or  a  '  narrow '  system  of  notation.     A  broad  notation  is  one 
which  makes  only  the  practically  necessary  distinctions  of 
sound  in  each  language,  and  makes  them  in  the  simplest 
manner  possible,  omitting  all  that  is  superfluous.    Letters  and 


10  SOUND-NOTATION 

words  in  Broad  Romic  are  enclosed  in  ( ),  when  necessary  to 
prevent  confusion  with  the  nomic  spelling.  Thus  in  English 
Broad  Komic  we  distinguish  the  present  pronunciation  of 
knight  and  that  which  it  had  in  the  time  of  Chaucer  as  nait 
and  knigt.  But  these  spellings,  though  accurate,  are  not 
minutely  accurate.  Thus  ai  is  the  symbol  of  any  diph- 
thong beginning  with  a  vowel  resembling  the  '  Italian  a '  in 
father,  and  ending  in  an  approximation  to  the  i  of  it.  Of 
course,  if  the  a  is  definitely  broadened  into  o  or  thinned  into 
the  se  of  man,  then  we  write  it  oi  or  sei,  as  the  case  may 
be.  But  minuter  shades  of  vowel-pronunciation  can  be  dis- 
regarded for  ordinary  purposes,  just  as  in  writing  nait  we 
do  not  generally  consider  it  necessary  to  show  that  the  two 
consonants  are  formed  on  the  gums,  and  not  on  the  teeth,  as 
in  French. 

10.  But  in  comparing  the  sounds  of  a  variety  of  lan- 
guages, or  dialects  of  a  language,  and  still  more  in  dealing 
with  sounds  in  general,  we  require  a  '  narrow ',  that  is, 
a  minutely  accurate  notation  covering  the  whole  field  of 
possible  sounds.  Such  a  Narrow  Komic  notation,  in  which 
each  symbol  has  a  fixed,  definite  value,  serves  as  a  key 
to  the  exact  pronunciation  of  the  vaguer  symbols  of  the 
Broad  Romic  notations  of  each  language.  Narrow  Eomic 
are  distinguished  from  Broad  Romic  symbols  by  being 
enclosed  in  [  ].  Thus  i  (i)  =  [i]  means  that  the  vowel  in 
finny  is  '  wide  ',  not  '  narrow '  as  in  the  French  [i]  in  fin  i. 
In  the  Broad  Romic  notations  of  both  languages  flni  is 
written  for  finny  and  fini  alike.  So  also  the  English  and 
French  n's  are  in  Narrow  Romic  distinguished  as  [m]  and 
[m]  respectively.  Such  distinctions  may,  of  course,  be 
introduced  into  the  Broad  Romic  notation  of  any  language 
when  there  is  any  practical  advantage  to  be  gained  thereby. 

The  'International  Alphabet '  of  Le  Maitre  Phone'tlqite,  the  organ 
of  the  International  Phonetic  Association  of  Paris,  is  based  on  the 
English  roinic  systems.  It  is  a  compromise  between  a  broad  and 


SOUND-NOTATION  11 

a  narrow  notation,  being  an  attempt  to  make  a  special  adaptation 
of  the  romic  principle  to  the  needs  of  French  into  a  general  nota- 
tion for  all  languages. 

11.  The  following  is  a  convenient  preliminary  classification 
of  the  vowels  of  Standard  English,  with  key-words  : — 

V  :  up          e  :  sofa        i  :  it          e  :  men        es  :  mail       u  :  pull        o  :  not 
aa :  baa      99  :  sir        ii :  see      ei :  vein  uu :  pool     ou :  soul, 

o  :  nought 

ai  :  aisle,  au  :  Faust  oi  :  oil 

aid  :  fire,  aus  :  our       ie  :  ear          ee  :  air  ue  :  poor    ois  :  joyous, 

oa  :  ore 

Here  the  vowels  are  in  four  rows :  (1)  normally  short  and 
monophthongic,  (2)  long,  or  half-diphthongic,  (3)  fully  diph- 
thongic,  (4)  murmur  diphthongs.  Those  under  (1)  are  often 
lengthened,  but  they  always  remain  absolutely  monoph- 
thongic. The  only  one  in  the  next  row  that  is  always  strictly 
monophthongic  is  ee  ;  all  the  others,  as  we  shall  see  after- 
wards, tend  to  become  more  or  less  diphthongic,  especially 
in  the  pronunciation  of  the  South  of  England,  being  often 
exaggerated  into  full  diphthongs  of  the  ai-  and  au-type 
in  vulgar  speech,  aia,  aue,  oia  are,  strictly  speaking, 
triphthongs,  which  in  slow  speech  are  disyllabic. 

12.  As  regards  the  script  forms  of  the  phonetic  symbols, 
ae  should  always  be  written  thus,  not  in  its  italic  form, 
which  is  liable  to  be  confused  with  ce.     u  is  written  B — 
an  inverted  italic  or  script  a,  in  which  form  it  is  easily 
joined  to  other  letters. 

13.  The  following  are  the  consonants  of  Standard  Eng- 
lish :— 

»j         r ;  >,  «          s,  z ;  J.  5  wh,  w ;  f,  v 

1 

k,  g  t,  d  p,  b 

rj  n  m 

For  the  aspirate  h  see  §  169. 


12  SOUND-NOTATION 

The  only  consonant-symbols  that  require  explanation  are 
rj,  as  in  ink  ink,  j,  as  in  you,  )>,  as  in  thin,  tJ,  as  in  then, 
/,  as  in  she,  5,  as  in  measure. 

14.  In  naming  the  consonant-sounds,  as  distinguished 
from   the  letters  by  which  they  are  denoted,  it  is  often 
simplest  to  take  the  lengthened  sound  itself  as  the  name, 
as  with  the  vowels.     But  this  is  often  inconvenient,  and 
cannot  be  done  at  all  with  k,  t,  p.     In  such  cases  the  con- 
sonant-name is  formed  by  adding  (a) :   ka,  ba,  wa,  rja  or 
rjn.      In  writing,  J>  is   simply  a  looped-up  p,  tJ  may  be 
written  without  the  cross-stroke  as  a  d  with  a  back-sloping 
loop,  J*  with  two  loops,  g  as  a  z  descending  below  the  line, 
z  itself  being  always  written  small. 

15.  When  sounds  are  symbolized,  not  isolated,  but  joined 
together  in  words  and  sentences,  it  is  often  necessaiy  to  add 
marks  to  show  the  quantity  or  length,  the  stress  (compara- 
tive force  or  loudness),  and  intonation  (comparative  pitch  or 
height)  of  sounds  and  syllables. 

16.  In  English  Broad  Komic  it  is  only  necessary  to  dis- 
tinguish long  from  short  vowels  by  doubling  the  former. 
o  is  not  doubled  because  it  does  not  occur  short.     Repeated 
vowels  can  be  distinguished  from  long  ones  by  inserting 
a  hyphen,  as  in  hsepi-ist  happiest.     For  minuter  distinctions 
of  quantity  see  §  145. 

17.  In  English  it  is  necessaiy  to  distinguish  four  degrees 
of  stress :  weak  (•),  medium  or  half-strong  (:),  strong  ('),  extra 
strong  or  emphatic  (;).     The  last  is  only  occasionally  re- 
quired.     These  marks  are  put  before  the  symbol  of  the 
sound  on  which  the  stress  begins,  so  that  they  serve  at  the 
same  time  to  indicate  the  syllable-division :  'dount  :kon- 
tra-dikt  -im  do  not  contradict  him.     But  strong  stress  need 
not  be  marked  in  monosyllabic  words,  or  when  it  falls  on  the 
first  syllables  of  longer  words  whose  other  syllables  have 
weak  stress,  as  in  veri  wel  very  well.     If  a  monosyllabic 
word  has  weak  stress,  it  must  be  marked  by  prefixing  (-). 


SOUND-NOTATION  13 

But  if  the  weak-stressed  monosyllable  contains  an  a,  it  is 
not  necessary  to  mark  the  stress,  as  this  vowel  occurs  only 
in  weak  syllables :  a  msen  av  ona  a  man  of  honour.  If 
only  one  strong  or  emphatic  stress  is  marked  in  a  poly- 
syllable, all  the  other  syllables  are  assumed  to  have  weak 
or  medium  stress  ;  in  which  case  the  often  doubtful  distinc- 
tion between  medium  and  weak  stress  need  not  be  marked. 
Hence  the  sentence  first  given  may  be  written  more  simply 
dount  kontra-dikt  -im  or  dount  kontra;dikt  -im  accord- 
ing to  the  degree  of  emphasis. 

18.  It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  distinguish  weak  vowels 
and  syllables  as  '  pre-tonic '  and  '  post-tonic '  according  as 
they  occur   before  or  after  a   strong-  or  medium-stressed 
syllable ;  thus  in  amerika  America  the  first  a  is  pre-tonic, 
the  second  post-tonic. 

19.  As  regards  intonation,  we  distinguish  the  following 
tones:  level  (~),  which  hardly  ever  occurs  in  English  ;  rising 
('),  as  in  whot'  what  ?  fatting  (v),  as  in  nouv  no !  falling- 
rising  or  compound   rise  (v),  as  in   teik  vkea  take  care ! 
rising-falling  or  compound  rise  (A),  as  in  (Aou)  oli !  as  an  ex- 
pression of  sarcasm.     The  tone-marks  may  be  put  either  at 
the  end  of  the  sentence  or  before  the  word  on  which  they 
fall,  as   is  most  convenient.      If  no  tone-mark  is  added, 
a  comma  or  ?  implies  a  rising  tone,  a  full  stop,  colon,   or 
semi-colon  a  falling-tone. 


ANALYSIS  OF  SOUNDS 

20.  The  analytic,  as  opposed  to  the  synthetic  study  of 
speech-sounds  involves  first  of  all  the  discrimination  of  the 
individual  sounds  of  each  language,   as  we   have   already 
done  for  Standard  English.     We  have  thus  laid  the  founda- 
tions of  a  scientific  phonetic  study  first  of  English  sounds, 
and  then  of  sounds  in  general. 

21.  Phonetics    is    the    science    of    speech-sounds.     But 
sounds  may  be  considered  from  two  opposite  points  of  view, 
the  organic  and  the  acoustic.     From  the  organic  point  of 
view  a  sound  is  the  result  of  certain  positions  and  actions 
of  the  organs  of  speech,  as  when  we  define  f  as  a  lip-teeth 
consonant.      This  is  the  point  of  view  of  the  speaker  of 
a  language ;  to  whom,  for  instance,  if  English  is  his  native 
language,  the  numerical  symbol  5  suggests  a  movement  of 
the  lower  lip  towards  the  edges  of  the  upper  teeth,  by  which 
he  forms  the  initial  consonant  of  the  word  faiv.     To  the 
hearer,   on  the  other  hand,  f  is  not  primarily  a  lip-teeth 
consonant,  but  a  hiss  consonant  similar  to  that  denoted  by 
)>,  although  this  latter  is  formed  by  quite  a  different  articu- 
lation ;  this  is  the  acoustic  point  of  view. 

22.  It  is  indispensable  for  the  student  of  phonetics  to 
cultivate  both  the  organic  and  the  acoustic  sense :  to  learn 
to  recognize  each  sound  by  ear,  and  to  know  the  correspond- 
ing organic  positions  and  actions  by  the  muscular  sensations 
which  accompany  them. 

23.  These  processes  we   are  continually  carrying  on  in 
ordinary  conversation  ;  but,  of  course,  only  unconsciously 
and   instinctively.     All  therefore   that  we   have  to  do  in 


ANALYSIS   OF   SOUNDS  15 

dealing  with  native  sounds  is  to  develop  this  unconscious 
organic  and  acoustic  sense  into  a  conscious  and  analytic 
sense. 

24.  The  only  sure  basis  of  a  knowledge  of  sounds  in 
general  is  a  thorough  practical  and  theoretical  command  of 
a  limited  number  of  sounds — that  is,  of  course,  those  which 
are  already  familiar  to  the  learner  in  his  natural  pronun- 
ciation of  his  own  language  or  dialect.     It  is  evident  that 
the    more  familiar  a  sound   is,   the  easier  it  is  to  gain 
insight    into    its    mechanism,    and   to    recognize   it  when 
heard. 

25.  The  first  step  is  to  learn  to  isolate  each  sound :  to 
learn  to  pronounce  it — whether  it  be  a  vowel  or  a  consonant 
— apart  from  its  context.     Thus,  let  the  student  cut  up  the 
word  Jive  into  ff,  vv,  and  ai,  and   this   last  into  its  two 
constituent   vowels,    emphasizing   and    lengthening    them 
without  altering  the  position  of  the  tongue.     Then  let  him 
analyse  au  in  Jtow  in  the  same  manner,  and  compare  the 
first  elements  of  the  two  diphthongs  both  acoustically  and 
organically.     Then  he  may  go  on  to  transpose  the  sounds 
in  such  a  sentence  as  sing  a  song!  into  rjis  a  rjos,  or  rest 
into  tser,  brings  into  zrjirb,  carefully  preserving  the  con- 
sonantal r — not  making  tser  into  tsaa,  for  instance.     Such 
exercises  may  be  multiplied  ad  infinitum. 

20.  The  next  step  is  to  analyse  the  formation  of  these 
familiar  sounds.  Let  the  beginner  isolate  and  lengthen  the 
breath  consonant  f  and  the  corresponding  voice  or  voiced 
consonant  v  till  he  not  only  hears  the  voice-murmur  in  the 
second  one,  but  also  feels  the  vibration  in  the  throat  by 
which  that  murmur  is  produced.  He  will  then  find  that 
while  f  is  articulated  only  in  one  place,  v  is  articulated 
in  two :  between  lip  and  teeth,  and  in  the  throat.  If  he 
presses  his  first  two  fingers  on  the  larynx  or  '  Adam's 
apple ',  he  will  feel  the  voice-vibration  externally  as  well  as 
internally. 


16  ANALYSIS   OF   SOUNDS 

27.  He  can  then  go  on  to  perform  a  few  simple  experi- 
ments.    If  he  removes  the  lip  from  the  teeth  in  pronounc- 
ing these  two  consonants,  he  will  hear  the  unmodified  voice- 
murmur  of  v,  and  the  unmodified  breath-friction  of  f,  the 
latter  in  the  form  of  a  faint  sigh,  or  aspiration.     These 
processes  can  then  be  reversed :  if  the  learner  first  breathes 
in  the  ordinary  way,  and  brings  lip  and  teeth  together  while 
the  breath  is  passing  out,  he  will  produce  a  f ;  if  he  does 
the  same  while  making  a  voice-murmur,  he  will  produce 
a  v.     The  same  experiments  should  be  repeated  with  the 
other  pairs  of  breath  and  voice  consonants  s,  z  ;  J",  5  ;  )>,  tS 
till  the  distinction  is  clearly  felt  and  under  perfect  control, 
so  that  the  learner  can  pass  from  the  breath  to  the  voice 
consonant   of    each  pair  and  vice  versa — sszz,  zzss   and 
so  on — and  feel  distinctly  the  change  of  articulation  in  the 
throat. 

28.  He  can  then  test  his  command  of  the  distinction  by 
deducing  the   unfamiliar  breath   consonants  Ih,  nh   from 
the  corresponding  voice  consonants  1.   n.     In  trying  to 
pass  from  1  to  In  in  the  same  way  as  he  has  learnt  to 
pass  from  v  to  f,  he  must  be  careful  to  keep  the  point  of 
the  tongue  firmly  pressed  against  the  gums  all  the  while ; 
and  not  be  misled  by  the  acoustic  effect  of  the  new  conso- 
nant into  imitating  its  hiss  by  making  it  into  s  or  J).     So 
also  in  passing  from  n  to  nh  the  tongue  must  keep  its 
position  throughout,  the  only  change  of  articulation  being  in 
the  throat. 

29.  The  movements  and  positions  of  the  tongue  and 
lips  are  most  easily  perceived  by  passing  from  one  con- 
sonant to  another :  by  comparing  t  with  k  and  p,  d  with  1 
and  ?S,  S  with  r  and  z,  b  with  w  and  v,  and  so  on. 

30.  Then  the   vowel-positions   should   be   compared   by 
passing,  for  instance,  from  i  to  te,  and  then  to  aa,  from 
aa  to  o  and  uu.     And  then,  if  he  combines  the  tongue- 
position  of  i  with  the  lip-position  of  u,  the  learner  will 


ANALYSIS  OF  SOUNDS  17 

without  difficulty  obtain  the  French  y  in  pure — or  at  least 
a  close  approximation  to  it. 

31.  If  he  has   any  difficulty  in  co-ordinating   the   two 
movements,  he  can  'round'  the   ii  and  yy  mechanically 
by  pinching  the  lips  together  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  both  hands,  so  as  to  leave  only  a  narrow  passage 
in  the  middle.      He  should  then  reverse  the  process  by 
unrounding  the   yy  into    ii,  which,    again,    can  be   done 
mechanically  by  separating  the  lips  with  finger  and  thumb. 
Let  him  then  try  to  unround  u,  o,  o  and  any  other  round 
vowels  that  may  be  familiar  to  him.     The  acoustic  effect 
of  rounding  and  unrounding  may  be  still  more  easily  pro- 
duced— or  rather,  simulated — by  covering  the  sides  of  the 
mouth  with  the  two  hands,  and  then  removing  them. 

32.  The  share  of  the  nose  in  forming  nasal  or  nasalized 
sounds  is  soon  felt  by  comparing  the  pairs  b,  m ;  d,  n  ;  g,  rj. 
Then,  if  the  learner  tries  to  form  an  m  with  his  mouth 
a  little  open,  he  will  obtain  a  nasalized  lip-consonant,  which 
by  further  opening  of  the  mouth  will  become  a  nasal  a, 
which,  again,   by  raising  the  front -of  the  tongue,  he  can 
easily  make  into  a  nasal  i  ;  if,  on  the  other  hand,  he  lowers 
his  tongue,  and  draws  it  back,  he  will  obtain  an  approxima- 
tion to  the  French  an,  en. 

33.  When  the  student  has  gained  a  thorough  knowledge 
and  a  thorough  command  of  the  articulations  of  his  own 
native  sounds,  he  may  go  on  to  modify  them  in  various 
ways,  especially  by  altering  the  degree   of  closure  of  the 
configurative  passages.     This  may  often  be  done  mechani- 
cally and  almost  involuntarily  by  '  gabbling ' — uttering  over 
and  over  again  with  extreme  rapidity— the  syllable  contain- 
ing the  sound  which  is  being  experimented  upon.     Thus  if 
jaja  is  gabbled  in  this  way,  the  tongue  will  involuntarily 
close  the  passage  between  the  middle  of  the  tongue  and 
the  palate,  so  that  the  '  open '  will  be  converted  into  the 
corresponding  'stop'  consonant.      If  baba  and  mama  are 

SWEET    8K  n 


18  ANALYSIS  OF  SOUNDS 

treated  in  the  same  way,  two  new  open  consonants  will  be 
produced,  the  second  of  which  we  have  already  met  with  as 
a  stepping-stone  to  nasal  a.  If  we  compare  these  two  new 
consonants,  we  shall  see  that  the  latter  is  the  nasalized  form 
of  the  other  one. 

34.  The  time  and  trouble  spent   on  these  preliminary 
exercises  is  not  wasted.     They  are  the  best  possible  pre- 
paration for  the  systematic  study  of  sounds  in  general, 
which  should  not  be  attempted  till  the  student  has  acquired 
the  power  of  isolating,  lengthening,  shortening,  rounding, 
nasalizing  his  natural   sounds  without  otherwise   altering 
them. 

35.  It  is  the  height  of  folly  to  enter  on  a  detailed  study 
of  the  anatomy  of  the  organs  of  speech,  to  begin  acoustics 
and  physics,  or  manipulate  the   apparatus   of  the  instru- 
mental   (experimental)   phoneticians   before   this    practical 
mastery  of  the  sounds  of  the  native  language  has  been 
attained. 


THE   ORGANS  OF  SPEECH 

36.  Most  speech-sounds  are  ultimately  formed  by  the  air 
expelled  from  the   lungs  (voice-bellows).     This  air  passes 
through  the  two  contractible  bronchi,  or  bronchial  tubes, 
into  the  also  contractible  trachea  or  wind-pipe,  on  the  top  of 
which  is  fixed  the  cartilaginous  larynx  (voice-box).     Across 
the  interior  of  the  larynx  are  stretched  two  elastic  ligaments, 
the  '  vocal  chords ',  which  are  inserted  in  the  front  of  the 
larynx  at  one  end,  while  at  the  other  end  they  are  attached 
to  two  movable  cartilages,  so  that  the  passage  between — the 
'glottis' — can  be  closed,  or  narrowed  in  various  degrees. 
The  glottis  is,  therefore,  twofold,  consisting  of  the  chord 
glottis  and  the  cartilage  glottis.     The  two  can  be  narrowed 
or  closed  independently.    The  chords  can  also  be  lengthened 
or  shortened,  tightened  or  relaxed  in  various  degrees  and 
in  different  directions — lengthways  or  crossways. 

37.  When  the  whole  glottis  is  wide  open,  no  sound  is 
produced  by  the  outgoing  breath  except  that  caused  by  the 
friction  of  the  air.     This   is   the   foundation  of  '  breath  ' 
sounds,  such  as  f .     In  '  voiced '  (voice)  sounds,  such  as  v, 
the  cartilage  glottis  is  more  or  less  completely  closed,  and 
the  chords  are  brought  close  enough  together  to  be  set  in 
vibration  by  the  air  passing  through  them.     Breath  (voice- 
lessness)  is  indicated  when  necessary  by  adding  the  breath- 
modifier  [/«]  in  Narrow  Komic,  which  in  Broad  Komic  is 
written  simply  h :  [1/j]  =  In  =  voiceless  (1). 

38.  If  the  glottis  is  narrowed  without  vibration,  'whis- 
per '  is  produced.    In  the  '  weak  whisper '  there  is  narrowing 
of  the  whole  glottis  ;  in  the  '  strong  whisper ',  which  is  the 
usual  form,  the  chord  glottis  is  entirely  closed,  so  that  the 

B  2 


20  THE   ORGANS   OF  SPEECH 

breath  passes  only  through  the  cartilage  glottis.  In  what 
is  popularly  called  whisper — that  is.  speaking  without  voice- 
vibration  —the  breath  sounds  remain  unchanged,  while  the 
voice  sounds  substitute  whisper  in  the  phonetic  sense  for 
voice.  Thus  if  the  initial  f  of  feel  is  pronounced  by 
itself,  the  hearer  cannot  tell  whether  the  word  is  spoken 
aloud  or  whispered  ;  but  if  it  is  immediately  followed  by 
ill  formed  with  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords,  he  knows 
that  it  is  spoken  ;  if  by  ill  formed  with  only  narrowing  of 
the  glottis,  he  knows  that  it  is  spoken  in  a  whisper. 

39.  Whispered   sounds  may  form   integral   elements  of 
ordinary  loud  speech.     Thus  in  English  the  final  consonants 
of  such  words  as  leaves,  oblige  are  whispered  except  when 
a  voice  sound  follows  without  any  pause,  as  in  obliging.     In 
such  a  word  as  obliged  ablaidgd  before  a  pause  or  a  breath 
sound  the  two  last  sounds  are  both  formed  with  whisper. 
It  will  be  observed  that  whisper  in  consonants  has  acous- 
tically the  effect  of  weak  breath. 

40.  The  contractible  cavity  between  the  larynx  and  the 
mouth  is  called  the  '  pharynx  '. 

41.  We  now  come  to  the  mouth.     Its  roof  consists  of  the 
'  hard  palate '  in  front,  and  the  '  soft  palate '  behind.     The 
inner  boundary  of  the  former  may  easily  be  found  by  press- 
ing a  finger  against  it  and  pushing  the  finger  back  till  the 
palate  suddenly  yields  to  the  pressure. 

42.  The  lower  pendulous  extremity  of  the  soft  palate  is 
the  '  uvula '  (throat-tongue,  as  it  was  appropriately  called  in 
Old  English).    In  its  passive  state,  as  in  ordinary  breathing, 
it  leaves  the  passage  into  the  nose  open ;  and  this  makes 
any  accompanying  mouth-sound    into   the   corresponding 
'  nasal '  or  '  nasalized '  sound.     Nasality  is  indicated  when 
necessary  by  adding  the  nasal  modifier  \n\.     In  the  forma- 
tion of  non-nasal  (oral)  sounds,  such  as  b,  the  uvula   is 
pressed  backwards  and  upwards,  so  as  to  close  the  passage 
from  the  pharynx  into  the  nose.     If  b  is  pronounced  with 


THE   ORGANS   OF  SPEECH  21 

this  passage  opened  by  lowering  the  uvula,  it  becomes  the 
corresponding  nasal  consonant  m  =  [bw]. 

43.  The  other  extremity  of  the  palate  is  bounded  by  the 
teeth,  behind  which  are   the   gums,    extending  from   the 
'  teeth-rim '  to  the  '  arch-rim  ',  formed  by  the  projection  of 
the  teeth-roots  or  '  alveolars ',  behind  which  is  the  hollow 
called  '  the  arch '. 

44.  The  tongue  can  articulate  with  various  parts  of  its 
surface  against  various  parts  of  the  palate,  the  teeth,  and 
the  lips. 

45.  The  lips  can  articulate  against  each  other,  and  against 
the  teeth.     The  passage  between  the  lips  can  be  closed  or 
narrowed    in    various    degrees.     Sounds   modified   by   lip- 
narrowing  are  called  '  lip-modified '  (labialized)  or  '  round ' 
(rounded),  the  last  term  being  specially  applied  to  vowels. 


SPEECH-SOUNDS 

46.  The  most  general  test  of  a  single  sound  as  opposed  to 
a  group  of  sounds  (sound-combination,  sound-group)  is  that 
it  can  be  lengthened  without  change,  as  we  see  in  lengthen- 
ing a  simple  monophthongic  as  opposed  to  a  diphthongic 
vowel. 

47.  As  regards  the  place  of  articulation,  no  sound  is  really 
simple :  every  sound  is  the  result  of  the  shape  of  the  whole 
configurative  passage  from  the  lungs  to  the  lips  ;  and  the 
ultimate  sound-elements,  such  as  breath  and  voice,  are  never 
heard  isolated.     The  most  indistinct  voice-murmur  is   as 
much  the  result  of  the  shape  of  the  superglottal  passages  as 
the  most  distinct  of  the  other  vowels,  and  its  organic  forma- 
tion (position)  is  as  definite  and  fixed  as  theirs  is  ;  the  only 
difference  being  that  while  in  what  we  regard  as  unmodified 
voice-murmur  all  the  organs  except  the  vocal  chords  are  in 
their  passive  or  neutral  positions,  the  other  vowels  are  formed 
by  actively  modifying  the  shape  of  certain  definite  portions 
of  the  configurative  passages.     Thus  if  we  pass  from  the 
neutral  vowel-murmur  to  i  we  raise  the  front  of  the  tongue 
close  to  the  palate,  the  lips  remaining  neutral  as  before  ; 
while  in  forming  u  we  narrow  the  lip-passage,  and  at  the 
same  time  raise  the  back  of  the  tongue. 

48.  Vowels  and  Consonants.     The  two  most  important 
elements  of  speech-sounds  are  those  which  depend  on  the 
shape  of  the  glottis  on  the  one  hand,  and  of  the  mouth-  and 
lip-passages  on  the  other. 


VOWELS  AND  CONSONANTS  23 

49.  It  is  on  the  relation  between  these  two  factors  that 
the  familiar  distinction  between  vowel  and  consonant  de- 
pends. In  vowels  the  element  of  voice  is  the  predominant 
one :  a  vowel  is  voice  modified  by  the  different  shapes  of 
the  superglottal  passages,  especially  the  mouth  and  lips. 
In  consonants,  on  the  other  hand,  the  state  of  the  glottis  is 
only  a  secondary  element :  a  distinctively  consonantal  articu- 
lation is  the  result  of  narrowing  some  part  of  the  configura- 
tive  passages  so  as  to  produce  audible  friction,  as  in  f,  v, 
or  of  complete  stoppage,  as  in  p,  b.  Vowels  are  character- 
ized negatively  by  the  absence  of  audible  friction  and  of 
stoppage.  If  such  a  vowel  as  i  is  formed  with  the  tongue 
so  close  to  the  palate  as  to  cause  distinct  buzzing,  it  becomes, 
from  the  articulative  point  of  view,  a  consonant,  although 
we  hardly  feel  it  as  such,  because  it  still  retains  its  syllabic 
function  (§  149).  Such  half  consonantal  vowels  are  called 
'  constricted '. 

60.  There   is    no  more    difficulty  in   combining  vowel- 
position   with    breath    and   whisper    than    there    is    with 
consonants.     Whispered  vowels  occur  as  integral  elements 
of  loud  speech  in  many  languages ;   they  may  be  heard  in 
English  in  rapid  speech  in  the  initial  weak  syllables  of  such 
words  as  together,  September,  and  in  weak  monosyllables  such 
as  but. 

61.  Breath  or  voiceless  vowels  may  be  heard  in  French 
at  the   end   of  words,   as  in   ainsi,  where  the   breath   [i] 
sounds    like    a  weak  voiceless  j.      An    open   vowel  such 
as   a    is   much    less    distinct  when   formed   with   breath : 
it   is  little  more  than  a  sigh.     This  want  of  sonority  is, 
of  course,  the  reason  why   breath   and  whispered  vowels 
are  so  much  rarer  than  the  corresponding  classes  of  con- 
sonants. 

52.  The  division  between  vowel  and  consonant  is  not  an 
absolutely  definite  one.  As  we  see,  the  closer  a  vowel  is, 
the  more  it  approaches  to  a  consonant ;  thus  it  may  seem 


24  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

difficult  to  know  whether  to  regard  the  English  j  as  a  very 
open  or  '  loose '  consonant,  or  as  a  constricted  unsyllabic 
vowel.  But  if  it  is  lengthened,  its  consonantal  buzz  comes 
out  clearly  enough,  showing  that  the  former  view  is  the 
correct  one. 

53.  But  there  are  some  consonants  which  in  their  voiced 
forms  have  no  more  buzz  than  a  vowel,  even  when  length- 
ened, such  as  1  and  the  nasals  rj,  n,  m,  which  are  accord- 
ingly called  liquid,  vowellike,  or '  soft '  consonants,  as  opposed 
to  the  '  hard  '  consonants,  which  include  the  stops  and  the 
hisses  f,  s,  &c.,  which  when  voiced,  v,  z,  &c.,  are  called 
'  buzzes '.  m,  indeed,  is  so  much  a  vowel  that  it  can  be 
sung  on  :  '  humming  a  tune '  means  singing  it  with  the  nose 
passage  open  and  the  mouth  shut — that  is,  on  a  lengthened 
m.  If  we  hum  in  this  way,  and  then  close  the  passage 
into  the  nose  by  retracting  the  uvula,  the  voice-murmur 
still  has  a  purely  vowellike  effect,  although,  of  course,  it 
cannot  be  held  except  for  a  short  time,  b  itself,  although 
formed  with  complete  stoppage  of  the  breath,  is  therefore 
acoustically  a  pure  vowel — at  least  in  the  middle  of  its  pro- 
longation. It  is  only  the  audible  percussion  which  accom- 
panies its  beginning,  and  still  more  its  end,  which  proclaims 
it  to  be,  after  all,  a  consonant.  The  same  percussive  or 
flapping  effect  is  heard,  though  in  a  less  degree,  at  the  end 
of  m,  1  and  the  other  soft  consonants. 


Vowels. 

54.  Tongue-Positions.  As  each  new  position  of  the 
tongue  produces  a  new  vowel,  and  as  the  number  of  possible 
positions  is  infinite,  it  follows  that  the  number  of  possible 
vowel-sounds  is  also  infinite.  It  is  necessary  therefore  to 
select  certain  definite  fixed  points  to  serve  as  marks,  as  it 
were,  of  latitude  and  longitude,  whence  the  intermediate 


VOWELS  25 

positions  can  be  measured  and  defined  with  more  or  less 
minuteness. 

55.  The  horizontal  movements  of  the  tongue  produce  two 
well-marked  classes  of  vowels  :    '  back ',  such  as  aa,  o,  u, 
and  '  front ',  such  as  ii,  e,  ee.     In  the  former  the  tongue  is 
retracted  into  the  back  of  the  mouth,  and  its  fore  part  is 
pressed  down,  so  that  the  tongue  slopes  down  from  the  back 
to  the  front  of  the  mouth.     In  the  latter  the  front  of  the 
tongue  is  raised  towards  the  front  of  the  palate,  as  in  the 
front-open  consonant  j,  so  that  the   tongue   slopes   down 
from  the  front  backwards.     The  retraction  of  the  tongue  in 
back  vowels  may  be  easily  tested  by  putting  the  little  finger 
inside  the  lower  teeth  while  forming  first  the  front  vowel 
ss  and  then  the  back  vowel  o.     While  the  se-position  is 
being  maintained  the  tip  of  the  tongue  presses  on  the  finger. 
When  the  change  is  made  to  the  o-position,  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  is  drawn  back  quite  clear  of  the  finger.     There  is 
a  third  class  of  '  mixed  '  vowels,  in  which  the  tongue  does 
not   slope  either  way,    and   is   neither   retracted    nor   ad- 
vanced, but  lies  flat  in  a  neutral  position  ;  aa  is  a  mixed 
vowel. 

56.  The  vertical   movements    of  the  tongue,   which  are 
accompanied    by,  and   partly  depend  on,  the   raising  and 
lowering  of  the  lower  jaw,  produce  various  degrees  of  height 
or  distance  of  the  tongue  from  the  palate.     In  a  '  high ' 
vowel,  such  as  ii,  the  tongue — in  this  case,  the  front  of 
the  tongue — is  raised  as  high  and  as  close  to  the  palate  as  is 
possible  without  causing   audible   friction ;   while    if  it  is 
lowered  as  much  as  possible  from   this  position  without 
otherwise  altering  the  relative  position  of  tongue  and  palate, 
we  obtain  the  corresponding  '  low '  vowel.      Thus  SB  is  a 
low-front,  o  a  low-back,  and  aa  a  low-mixed  vowel.      If 
the  tongue  stops  exactly  half-way,   we  obtain  the  normal 
'  mid '   position,  as   in   the   first   elements   of  ei   and  ou, 
which  are  mid-front  and  mid-back  respectively. 


26 


SPEECH-SOUNDS 


In  this  way  the  whole  mouth  may  be  mapped  out  schemati- 
cally into  nine  squares  : — 


high-  back 

high-mixed 

high-front 

mid-back 

mid-mixed 

mid-front 

low-back 

low-mixed 

low-front 

67.  It  follows  from  what  has  been  said  that  each  of  these 
squares  admits  of  further  subdivisions.     English  i  and  ii 
are  both  high  front  vowels  ;  but  if  we  isolate  the  beginning 
of  the  vowel  in  eat  and  compare  it  with  the  vowel  in  it,  we 
shall  find  that  the  tongue  is  raised  higher  in  the  long  than 
in  the  short  vowel,  and  that  the  tongue  can  be  raised  even 
higher  than  it  is  in  the  long  vowel  without  developing  con- 
sonantal friction  and  becoming  constricted. 

68.  It  may  here  be  remarked  that  vowels  as  they  actually 
occur  in  speech  are  seldom  raised  or  lowered  to  their  extreme 
positions  ;  which,  therefore,  can  hardly  be  regarded  as  the 
normal  ones.     Nevertheless,  in  studying  the  vowel-system 
as  a  whole  apart  from  any  one  language,  it  is  important  that 
the  learner  should  get  into  the  habit  of  always  forming  the 
high  and  low  vowels  in  the  extreme  rather  than  in  the  less 
definite  normal  position — or  rather,  positions — so  that  the 
points  from  which  he  obtains  the  normal  mid  position  of 
each  vowel  may  be  as  definite  as  possible. 

69.  If  then  we  regard  English  ii  as  beginning  with  the 
normal  high-front  vowel,  we  can  define  any  approximation 
to  the  extreme  high  position  as  '  raised  '  i^-,  while  any  posi- 
tion lower  than  normal  can  be  distinguished  as  '  lowered ' 
1^.     In  Scotch  pronunciation   i  is  lowered  still  more  ;    so 


VOWELS 


•27 


much  so  indeed  that  it  must  be  regarded  rather  as  a  raised 
mid  vowel — e-^. 

60.  If  now  we  compare  the  English  &  with  the  ideal 
low-front  vowel,  we  shall  find  that  in  addition  to  not  being 
fully  lowered,  it  is  not  fully  front :  in  our  ss  the  tongue  is 
slightly  retracted.     We  define  it  therefore  as  '  inner  ',  which 
we  mark  by  adding  the  'inner  modifier',  sen,  just  as  we 
defined  the  height  of  i  by  adding  the   '  raiser '  *  and  the 
'  lowerer  '  T.     When  a  back  vowel  is  advanced  towards  the 
front  of  the  mouth,  it  is  said  to  be  in  the  '  outer '  position  ; 
for  which,  again,   an  appropriate  '  outer  modifier '  is  pro- 
vided.    Thus  u>  is  the  English  sound  in  put,  in  the  German 
sound  in  mutter. 

61.  It  is,  of  course,  possible  to  combine  the  vertical  and 
horizontal   modifiers,   as   in   sen-1-  =  the   English   vowel   in 
man.     Such  combinations  as  -IK,  ^  may  be  used  to  show 
expressly  the  normal  positions  implied   generally  by  the 
absence  of  such  modifiers. 

62.  In  this  way  each  of  the  nine  squares  may  be  again 
subdivided  into  nine  smaller  ones ;  thus  with  the  front- vowel 
square : — 


IT 


K 


Further  subdivisions  would  go  beyond  the  limits  of  appre- 
ciation of  even  the  most  sensitive  and  highly  trained  ear. 

63.  Narrow   and   Wide.      This    important    distinction 
applies  to  all  vowels  :   every  vowel,   whatever  its  position 


28  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

in  the  scale,  must  be  either  narrow  (tense)  or  wide  (lax).  In 
the  Narrow  Komic  notation  wide  vowels  are  distinguished 
by  being  put  in  italics.  French  i  in  fini  and  English  i  in 
finny  are  both  high-front  vowels,  but  the  former  is  narrow 
[i],  the  latter  wide  [i].  In  passing  from  [i]  to  [i]  the 
passage  between  the  front  of  the  tongue  and  the  palate  is 
further  narrowed,  not  by  raising  the  whole  body  of  the 
tongue,  but  by  altering  its  shape :  in  a  narrow  vowel  the 
tongue  is  bunched  or  made  convex  lengthways,  and  there  is 
a  feeling  of  tension  or  clenching  ;  in  wide  vowels  the  tongue 
is  relaxed  and  comparatively  flattened.  The  change  from 
wide  to  narrow  may  be  illustrated  by  laying  the  hand 
loosely  on  the  table,  and  then  tightening  its  muscles  so  as 
to  draw  the  finger-tips  back  a  little,  and  raise  the  knuckles, 
so  that  the  upper  surface  of  the  hand  becomes  more  convex. 

64.  If  we  lower  the  tongue,    starting  from   [i]  and  [?'] 
respectively,  we  obtain  the  two  parallel  series : — 

high-front-narrow  [i] :  F.  si          high-front-wide  [i] :  it 
mid-front-narrow  [e]  :  F.  ete        mid-front-wide  [e] :  ate 
low-front-narrow  [«] :  air  low-front-wide  [te] :  at 

The  E.  vowel  in  see  varies  between  the  two  extremes,  [ii] 
in  Sc.,  Ir.,  and  N.E.,  and  [«•••]  in  S.E.  The  latter  is  a  semi- 
consonantal  diphthong,  which  may  be  expressed  by  ij  in 
Broad  Romic.  It  varies  greatly,  being  sometimes  almost 
monophthongic,  and  only  half  wide— intermediate  between 
narrow  and  wide — while  in  vulgar  pronunciation  it  is 
broadened  more  or  less  in  the  direction  of  ei  and  ai. 
The  vowel  in  say,  name,  vein  varies  similarly  between  the 
Sc.  [ee],  the  N.E.  [ez-r],  and  the  S.E.  [ci-r],  which  in  vulgar 
speech  is  broadened  in  the  direction  of  ai. 

65.  Before   going   a    step   further    the    student   should 
familiarize   himself  thoroughly  with  these  six  vowels   in 
their  ideal  extreme  and  exact  mid  positions  (§  58),  most  of 


VOWELS  29 

which  are  sure  to  be  strange  to  his  dialect,  whatever  it 
may  be. 

66.  Most  English  speakers  have   the  greatest  difficulty 
with  [e],  while  [i]  is  easily  acquired  by  imitation,  even  by 
those  to  whom  it  is  not  natural.    When  it  has  been  acquired, 
the   student  should    cautiously    ' broaden'  it  by  slightly 
lowering   the   tongue,    but   without   thinking   of  the  mid 
position,  lest  he  should  lapse  into  ei.      When  [i-ri-r]  has 
been  successfully  lowered  to  the  [e*e*]  of  Edinburgh  Sc. 
say,  there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  fixing  the  normal  mid 
sound.     If  [ee]  is  familiar,  the  process  may  be  reversed  by 
raising  it  gradually  to  the  mid  position. 

67.  [e]  may  be  evoked  mechanically  by  pressing  down 
the  learner's  tongue   with  a  thin  paper-knife  while  he  is 
trying  to  form  [i].      But  such  methods  should   only  be 
employed  as  a  last  resource. 

68.  As  regards  the  wide  vowels,  it  is  to  be  observed  that 
[i]   is   now  generally  lowered  towards  -[«T]    in  S.E.     But 
those  who  have  this  pronunciation  can  generally  get  a  close 
approximation   to  the  high   vowel   by  isolating  the  first 
element  of  their  ij. 

60.  The  narrow  and  the  wide  vowels  should  be  practised 
separately.  It  is  confusing  both  to  tongue  and  ear  to  pass 
from  narrow  to  wide  and  vice  versa. 

70.  The  development  of  the  acoustic  perception  of  the 
sounds  ought  to  run  parallel  with  that  of  the  control  of 
the  tongue-positions  by  the  muscular  sense.     The  student 
must  learn  to  hear  as  well  as  feel  the  distinction  between 
narrow  and  wide. 

71.  The  first  thing  that  he  should  cultivate  is  the  habit  of 
listening  attentively  to  an  unfamiliar  sound  till  his  ears  are 
steeped  in  it,  as  it  were.     Not  till  then  should  he  attempt 
to  imitate  it.     If  he  fails  to  imitate  it  correctly  after  two  or 
three  trials,  he  should  desist,  and  listen  again,  instead  of 
fixing  the  wrong  articulation  by  blind  repetition,  as  most 


30  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

beginners  are  inclined  to  do.  And  then,  perhaps,  the 
correct  articulation  will  come  to  him  suddenly  when  he 
least  expects  it. 

72.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  three  narrow  vowels  are 
quite  distinct  from  one  another  in  sound,  and  so  also  the 
three  wide  ones,  but  that  certain  narrow  vowels  are  very 
similar  to  certain  wide  vowels.     Thus  [se]  and  [e]  are  so 
alike  in  sound,  especially  when  short,  that  they  may  from 
the  'broad'  point  of  view  be  regarded  as  interchangeable 
representatives  of  the  '  open '  vowel  corresponding  to  the 
'  close '  [e].      It   is  only  by  careful  and  repeated  hearing 
that  we  can  observe  that  the  low  vowel  is  a  little  broader 
and  opener  in  sound  than  the  mid  one.    This  broader  sound 
of  the  e  is  frequent  in  English,  especially  in  the  North 
English  and  Scotch  dialects. 

73.  To   understand   these   relations    it  is    necessary  to 
realize  that  a  vowel  is,  acoustically  speaking,  voice  modified 
by  a  resonance-chamber  or  resonator,  namely  the  mouth. 
Every  time  we  move  the  tongue  and  lips  we  create  a  new 
resonance-chamber  which  moulds  the  voice  into  a  new  vowel. 

74.  The  pitch  of  every  spoken  or  sung  vowel  can   be 
raised  by  tightening,  and   lowered  by  relaxing  the  vocal 
chords,  as  when  a  scale  is  sung  on  one  vowel.     But  each 
vowel   has,  besides,  an  inherent  pitch  of  its  own,   which 
is  the  result  of  the  size  and  shape  of  its  resonance-chamber. 
Thus  if  i,  a,  and  u  are  all   sung  on   the  same  note,  it 
is  easy  to  hear  that  the  first  is  the  highest,  the  third  the 
lowest  in  pitch,  that  u   is  deeper  than  a,  while  a  itself 
is  deeper  than  i.     The  best  way  of  hearing  the  inherent 
pitches  of  the  vowels  is  to  whisper  them,  for  this  gives 
the  pitch  of  the  resonance-chamber,  which  is  invariable :  a 
whispered  vowel  cannot  be  sung. 

75.  If,  then,  we  whisper  the  three  narrow  front  vowels  in 
the  order  high,  mid,  low,  we  shall  find  that  [e]  is  a  tone 
lower  than  [ij>  and  that  [ae]  is  a  tone  lower  than  [e].     If 


VOWELS  31 

we  whisper  the  corresponding  wide  vowels  in  the  same 
order,  we  shall  observe  the  same  relation  between  their 
pitches,  each  wide  being  a  semitone  lower  than  the  corre- 
sponding narrow  vowel,  so  that  if  we  whisper  all  six  in 
the  order  [i,  i,  e,  e,  SB,  ce],  the  series  will  form  a  descending 
semitonic  or  chromatic  scale. 

76.  The  connexion  between  the  size  and  shape  of  the 
resonance-chamber   and  the   pitch  is  clear  enough  in  the 
case  of  these  vowels,     [i]  owes  it  high  pitch  to  its  being 
formed  by  a  very  narrow,  short  passage  in  the  front  of  the 
mouth.     In  [i]  the  flattening  of  the  tongue  lengthens  and 
widens   the   passage,   and    consequently   dulls   the   sound. 
It  is  still  more  dulled  in  [e],  in  whose  formation  the  whole 
body   of  the   tongue   is  lowered.      In   fact,    in  the   series 
[i,  i,  e,  e,  89,  CB]  there  is  progressive  widening  of  the  con- 
figurative  passage.     This  may  easily  be  tested  experiment- 
ally by  pressing  the  little  finger  against  the  palate,  and 
trying  to  articulate  the  series  against  it ;  it  will  be  observed 
that  the  strong  pressure  of  the  tongue  against  the  finger  in 
forming  the  first  vowel  is  distinctly  relaxed  in  the  second, 
and  still  more  in  the  third,  and  so  on  till  the  extreme  \ci\  is 
reached,  in  whose  formation  the  tongue  does  not  touch  the 
finger  at  all. 

77.  Rounding.     Bounding  can,  of  course,  be  added  to  all 
the  tongue-positions. 

78.  The  degrees  of  rounding  are  infinite.    As  fixed  points 
we  distinguish  three,  corresponding  to  the  three  heights  of 
the   tongue,    the   general  rule    being  that   the  higher   the 
tongue-position  of  the  round  vowel,  the  narrower  the  lip- 
passage,    as   may   be  seen   by  comparing   the  back  round 
vowels :  — 

high-back-narrow-round  [u]:  F.  sou       h.-b.-wide-r.  [u]:  good 
mid-back-narrow-round  [oJ:F.  beau     m.-b.-w.-r.     [o]:oil 
low-back-narrow-round    [o]:all  l.-b.-w.-r.        [3]:  not 


32  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

79.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  English  o  is  generally 
slightly  diphthongic,  which  is  the  result  of  the  tongue  being 
allowed  to  slip  into  the  mid-mixed-wide-round  position  at 
the  end  of  the  vowel,  so  that  it  may  also  be  written  [oo]. 
Compare  aa,  §  91. 

80.  In  going  down  either  of  these  series  it  will  be  seen  as 
well  as  felt  that  as  the  tongue  is  lowered  from  the  high-back 
position,  the  lip-passage  is  progressively  expanded.    In  '  high 
rounding '    the  lip-passage   is    made   as    small   as    possible 
without  causing  friction,  in  '  mid  rounding '  there  is  a  wider 
opening  of  the  lips,  and  in  'low  rounding'  they  are  only 
drawn  together  a  little  at  their  corners. 

81.  But  abnormal  rounding  also   occurs.      There  is  no 
difficulty,  for  instance,  in  combining  mid  position  of  the 
tongue  with  high  rounding,  as  in  the  second  element  of 
ou  in  no,  which  differs  from  the  first  only  in  being  formed 
with  high   instead   of  mid   rounding,  the  position  of  the 
tongue  remaining  unchanged  throughout  the  whole  diph- 
thong.    This  kind  of  abnormal  rounding  is  called  '  over- 
rounding  ',  and  is  expressed  by  adding  the  '  rounder '  to  the 
symbol  of  the  corresponding  normally  rounded  vowel.    Thus 
the  Narrow  Komic  notation  of  English  ou  is  [oo)J. 

82.  It  is  also  possible  to  under-round.    The  vowel  in  good 
is  '  under-rounded '   in  the    dialects  of  the  North-west   of 
England :  the  high  position  of  the  back  of  the  tongue  is 
retained,  while  the  lips  are  relaxed  almost  to  low  rounding. 
Under-rounding  is  expressed  by  adding  the  rounder  to  the 
symbol  of  the   corresponding   un-round  vowel ;    thus   the 
vowel  in  question  is  written    [A)].     This  vowel  has  to  a 
Southern   ear  a  sound   intermediate   between   that  of  put 
and  putty. 

83.  In  comparing  narrow  and  wide  u  it  will  be  observed 
that  there  is  a  tendency  to  pout  the  lips  more  in  the  former. 
The  same  difference  is  observable,  though  in  a  less  degree, 
in  o  and  o.     This  pouting  is  only  a  secondary  phenomenon, 


VOWELS  33 

which  is  the  result  of  the  strong  general  contraction  in  the 
back  of  the  mouth  with  which  back  vowels  are  made 
narrow.  Lip-pouting  does  not  sensibly  modify  the  acoustic 
effect  of  a  vowel :  it  only  makes  the  rounding  a  little  more 
marked. 

84.  The  differences  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  English 
back-round  vowels  are  parallel  to  those  in  the  front  series. 
The  vowel  in  too  varies  between  the  two  extremes  of  the 
Sc.  and  N.E.  [uu]  and  the  S.E.  [MM)]  or  uw,  in  which  the 
first   element  is  sometimes   narrow   or  half  wide,  besides 
undergoing  various  changes  in  position  (§  98  foil.),  which 
are  mainly  the  result  of  the  tendency  to  the  outer  position 
in  the  English  back-round  vowels,  as  may  be  seen  by  com- 
paring them  with  the  fully  retracted  German  [uu,  M,  oo,  o] 
in  gut,  mutter,  so,  oft.     The  English  ou,    like  the  ei,  has 
its  first  element  narrow  in  the  North,  wide  in  the  South, 
where  it  is,  however,  sometimes  only  half  wide.     In  vulgar 
pronunciation  the  o  of  ou  is  broadened  and  unrounded  in 
various  degrees,  so  that  it  often  becomes  a  broad  au.     The 
first  element  of  oi  is  sometimes  lowered  towards  [_o]. 

85.  It  is,  of  course,  just  as  easy  to  round  front  as  back 
vowels,  although  front-round  are  not  so  frequent  in  languages 
as  back-round  vowels.     They  do  not  occur  in  St.  E.     But 
the  student  should  now  learn  to  round  at  least  the  narrow 
front  vowels,  by  which  he  will  obtain  the  following  well- 
marked  series  of  vowels,  all  of  which  occur  in  French  :— 

high-front-narrow-round  [y]  :  F.  pur 
mid-front-narrow-round  [a]  :  F.  pen 
low-front-narrow-round  [09]  :  F.  peur 

86.  What  has  been  said  of  the  relations  between  tongue 
height   and    rounding   in   the   back-round   applies    equally 
to  the  front-round  vowels.     Here  also  we  find  occasional 
abnormal    rounding.      Thus   if  [a]   is    over-rounded   into 


34  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

[a)]  by  exaggerating  its  mid  into  high  rounding,  we  obtain 
the  North  German  long  vowel  in  uber,  which  has  a  duller 
sound  than  that  of  the  Trench  u, 

87.  When  the  student  has  learnt  to  round  [i,  e,  se]  into 
[y,  a,  ce]  respectively,  he  should  test  the  accuracy  of  the 
process  by  unrounding  the  latter.    If  he  is  able  to  make  the 
distinction  between  French  u  and  German  u,  he  will  find 
that  while  the   French   vowel   unrounds   into  an   [i],   the 
German  vowel  unrounds  into  [e]  or  [eA]. 

88.  Here,  as  with  the  front  vowels,  the  student   must 
learn    in   time  to  dispense  with  the  help   of  key-words — 
which   at   best  are  never  absolutely  reliable  guides — and 
form  his  round  vowels,  both  front  and  back,  in  their  most 
ideally  distinct  forms,  so  that,  for  instance,  his  [i]  and  [y] 
have  exactly  the  same  tongue-position,  which  even  in  French 
is  not  always  the  case. 

When  facility  has  been  attained  in  unrounding  the  front- 
round  vowels,  the  student  should  proceed  to  the  more 
difficult  task  of  unrounding  the  back -round  vowels. 

89.  The  greater  difficulty  of  unrounding  these  is  mainly 
the  result  of  the  difference  between  the  l  inner  rounding ' 
with  which  they  are  formed  and  the  '  outer  rounding '  of 
the  front-round  vowels.     In  the  latter  the  lips  are  brought 
together  vertically,  so  that  such  a  vowel  as  y  can  easily  be 
unrounded  mechanically  by  separating  the  lips  upwards  and 
downwards  with  the  finger  and  thumb  of  both  hands.     In 
inner  rounding,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  lateral  compres- 
sion of  the  sides  of  the  mouth  and  the  cheeks.    To  unround 
a  back-round  vowel  mechanically  it  is  necessary  to  intro- 
duce a  finger  and  thumb  some  way  into  the  corners  of  the 
mouth,  and  expand  sideways.     Inner  rounding,  when  it  is 
necessary  to  distinguish  it  from  outer  rounding,  is  denoted 
by  adding  the  '  inner  rounder '  [&],  which  symbol,  like  that 
of  rounding,    is  taken   from   the    Organic   Alphabet.       If 
a  back  vowel,  such  as  a,   is  modified  by  outer   rounding 


VOWELS  35 

only,  it  does  not  become  the  corresponding  round  vowel, 
but  is  merely  muffled  in  sound. 

Front  position  can,  of  course,  be  combined  with  inner  rounding. 
Inner-round  [y]  has  a  deeper  pitch  than  the  normal  outer-round  [y]. 
These  vowels  i-esemble  the  corresponding  round  mixed  ones  (§  97), 
which,  when  formed  with  the  tongue  in  the  outer  position,  are 
almost  identical  with  them. 

90.  Back  (un-round)  vowels.     These  are   obtained  by 
unrounding  the  back-round  vowels  already  described  : — 

high-back-narrow  [A]  high-back-wide  [a] 

mid -back-narrow  [a] :  up         mid -back-wide  [a] :  father 

low-back-narrow   [fc]  :  occ.      low-back-wide  [»]  :  F.  pas 
F.  pas 

91.  The  student  should  begin  with  unrounding  [o],  which 
will  give  the  mid-back-wide  vowel,  the  '  Italian  a  '  in  father, 
calm.      The  English  aa  is  less  clear  in   sound   than  the 
Italian  because  it  is  more  or  less  muffled  by  the  neutral 
position  of  the  lips,  which  in  Italian,  as  in  many  other  lan- 
guages, are  habitually  spread  out  at  the  corners — except,  of 
course,   in   round  vowels — which  raises  the  pitch   of  the 
vowels  by  widening  the  mouth  of  their  resonance-cavity. 
Our  aa  also  differs  from  that  of  most  other  languages  in 
being  slightly  diphthongic :  it  generally  ends  in  the  mid- 
mixed-wide  vowel,  so  that  it  might  be  written  aa. 

92.  By  unrounding  [3]  we   obtain   the  deeper-sounding 
low-back-wide,  which  is  frequent  in  French  and  in  many 
English  and  Scotch  dialects. 

93.  Turning  now  to  the  narrow  vowels,  if  we  unround 
[OK],  we  get  the  English  vowel  in  come  up. 

94.  The  high-back  vowels  are  the  most  difficult  to  un- 
round,    [a]  may  be  heard  as  the  first  element  of  ai  in  some 
English  dialects,  and  in  Ir.E.  in  the  word  Irish  itself. 

95.  Mixed  vowels.     These  are  denoted  in  Broad  Eomic 

c2 


36  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

by  two  dots  over  the  symbol  of  the  front  or  back  vowel  of 
the  same  height,  whichever  is  most  convenient.  The  un- 
round mixed  vowels  are  : — 

high-mixed  narrow  [i] :  high-mixed-wide  [2] 

N.Welsh  un 

mid-mixed-narrow  [e] :  mid-mixed-wide  [e]  : 

Sc.  better  better  [eV] 

low-mixed-narrow   [a] :  low-mixed-wide  [a]  :  how 

sir 

The  student  should  begin  the  narrow  series  with  the  low, 
the  wide  with  the  mid  position,  unless,  of  course,  other 
positions  are  more  familiar  to  him.  The  high  mixed  vowels 
are  the  most  difficult  to  acquire. 

96.  From  the  acoustic  point  of  view  it  is  important  to 
note  that  the  mixed  vowels  have  the  same  pitch  as  the  cor- 
responding front-round   vowels.      Thus   [i]  has   the  same 
pitch  as  [y],  and  [a]  has  the  same  as  [oe],  which  explains 
why   French   peur  sounds  like   purr  to   an    English   ear. 
Speaking  acoustically,  we  may  say  that  [a]  is  the  [se]  of 
care,  obscured,  not  by  rounding,  as  French  [OB]  is,  but  by 
flattening  the  tongue. 

97.  The   round  mixed  vowels  are  not  frequent  in  lan- 
guage, being  mostly  vague  and  indistinct  in  their  acoustic 
character  ;    their  rounding  is  inner ;    outer  rounding  only 
muffles  them  : — 

h.-m.-n.-r.  [ii]  :  W.E.  two       h.-m.-w.-r.   [«] 
m.-m.-n.-r.  [6]  m.-m.-w.-r.  [o] :  Dutch  beter 

l.-m.-n.-r.  [o]  l.-m.-w-.r.   [3]  :    N.Ir.,   Swed. 

full. 

98.  Shifted   vowels.     We   have   already  seen  that  all 
back  vowels  do  not  have  exactly  the  same  degree  of  tongue- 
retraction  :  we  distinguish  between  inner  and  outer  back. 
If  we  start  with  the  fully  retracted  [WH]  of  German  mutter, 


VOWELS  37 

und,  and  shift  the  tongue  progressively  forward  in  the 
mouth,  without  otherwise  altering  its  position  relative  to 
the  palate,  we  at  last  move  it  right  out  into  the  middle  of 
the  mouth,  into  the  position  of  a  mixed  vowel.  This  is 
called  the  '  out '  position,  and  is  denoted  by  the  addition  of 
the  '  out-shifter ':  [uo].  This  is  the  vowel  in  the  second — 
unstressed— syllable  of  veelju  value,  although  many  have 
only  [M-]  for  weak  u.  Narrow  long  [ua]  is  the  N.Ir. 
vowel  in  you. 

99.  An  out-back  vowel  is,  therefore,  one  which,  while 
retaining  the  slope  of  a  back  vowel,  has  the  place  of  a  mixed 
vowel.      The  round  out-back  vowels  have  nothing  of  the 
acoustic  quality  of  the  mixed  vowels  ;  and  yet  are  quite 
distinct   from   the  fully  retracted   back  vowels  :    they  are 
intermediate  in  sound  between  them  and  the  corresponding 
front-round  vowel ;  thus  [us]  has  a  sound  between  that  of 
[u]  and  [y]. 

100.  [o]  and  [o]  are  also  shifted  to  the  out-position  in 
unstressed  syllables  in  English,  as  in  the  last  syllable  of 
solo  [o303>],  and  the  first  of  October  [33]. 

101.  By  unrounding  the  former  of  these  we  obtain  the 
mid-out-back-wide  [GP],  which  is  the  first  element  of  E.  ai, 
and  is  a  frequent  substitute  for  [a]  in  come  up.     This  vowel 
hus  something  of  the  acoustic  effect  of  a  mixed  vowel. 

102.  By  unrounding   [33]   we   obtain  the   low-out-back- 
wide,  which  is  the  thin  French  a  in  la  patte,  and  a  frequent 
substitute  for  se  in   many  E.   dialects.      It   has  a  clearer 
sound  than  [as],  just  as  [a]  is  clearer  than  [e]  ;  acoustically 
it  is  between  [a]  and  [ee]. 

103.  Just  as  a  back  vowel  may  be  shifted  forward  into 
the  out-position,  so  also  a  front  vowel  may  be  shifted  back 
into   the    '  in '   position,    denoted    by   the    '  in-shifter '   [c], 
although  the  difference  between  in  and  inner  front  is  not 
generally  so  marked  as  that  between  out  and  outer  back. 
High-in-  (or  inner-)  front- wide  [it]  is  frequent  in  such  words 


38 


SPEECH-SOUNDS 


as  pretty  and  prince.  Mid-in-front-narrow  is  one  of  the 
many  pronunciations  of  the  vowel  written  ui  in  Sc.  in  such 
words  as  guid  '  good  '. 

104.  Mixed  vowels  also  have  an  in-position,  obtained  by 
retracting  them  into  the  full  back  position  while  keeping 
the  tongue  flat,  instead  of  sloping  it  from  back  to  front  as 
in  a  genuine  back  vowel.     If  the  [a]  of  sir  is  retracted  in 
this  way,  we  get  the  low-in-mixed-narrow  [ac],  heard  in  the 
Irish  pronunciation  of  come  up,  sir !    [ic]  is  the  most  usual 
pronunciation  of  Scotch  Gaelic  ao,  as  in  gaoth,   'breeze/ 
where  the  fh  is  silent. 

105.  Table  of  Vowels.     The  following  tabulation  of  the 
vowels  will  be  found  convenient  for  reference,  and  practice 
in  passing  from  one  to  the  other : — 


1.  A 

7.i 

13.  i 

19.  a 

25.  > 

31.  i 

2.  a 

8.8 

14.  e 

20.  a 

26.  i; 

32.  e 

3.  B 

9.  a 

15.  88 

21.  n 

27.  a 

33.  (E 

4.  u 

10.  u 

16.  y 

22.  u 

28.  u 

34.  y 

5.  o 

11.6 

17.  a 

23.o 

29.6 

35.a 

6.  o 

12.5 

18.03 

24:.   0 

30.  y 

36.  ce 

VOWELS 


89 


37.  ic 

43.  A3 

49.  ic 

55.  >'c 

61.  as 

67.  ic 

38.  ec 

44.  ao 

50.  ec 

56.  ec 

62.  as 

68.  ec 

39.  ac 

45.  us 

51.  sec 

57.  ac 

63.  03 

69.  «?c 

40.  tic 

46.  U3 

52.  yc 

58.  uc 

64.  wo 

70.  yc 

41.  6c 

47.  oo 

53.  ac 

59.  oc 

65.  oo 

71.  9c 

42.  5c 

48.  oo 

54.  oec 

60.  3c 

66.  oo 

72.  a?c 

Consonants. 

106.  Consonants  admit  of  a  twofold  division,  (1)  by  form, 
(2)  by  place. 

Thus  p,  b  are  by  place  lip-consonants,  by  form  stopped 
consonants  or  stops. 

107.  Nasal  consonants  are  formed  by  closing  the  mouth 
passage  in  different  places,  while  the  nose-passage  is  left 
open  by  lowering  the  uvula.      If  any  stopped  consonant, 
such  as  d,  is  modified  in  this  way,  it  becomes  the  corre- 
sponding nasal,  in  this  case  n. 

108.  When  a  non-stopped  (open  or  divided)  consonant  is 
formed  with  the  nose-passage  open,  it  is  said  to  be  '  nasal- 
ized '.      Thus  if  we  try  to  pronounce  m  with  the  lips  a 
little  apart  (§  32),  we  obtain  the  nasalized  lip-open  conso- 
nant  P«. 


40  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

109.  Open  consonants  are  the  result  of  narrowing  instead 
of  completely  closing   the  passage,   as   in   the   back-open- 
breath  [x]  in  Scotch  and  German  loch,  Spanish  hi  jo.     This 
consonant  may  easily  be  deduced  from  the  corresponding 
stop  in  lock  by  emphasizing  and  isolating  the  '  breath-glide ' 
after  it.     The  back- open- voice  [y]  in  Middle  German  sagen 
may  be  obtained  by  gabbling  gaga. 

110.  In  some  open  consonants  there  is  sometimes  slight 
contact  of  the  organs.      Thus  in  J)  and  f  there  is  often 
contact  of  the  tongue  and  teeth,  and  lips  and  teeth  respec- 
tively.     But  this  does  not  sensibly  impede  or  otherwise 
modify    the     flow    of    breath,    except    by    increasing    its 
friction. 

111.  In  divided  (side,  lingual)  consonants  there  is  central 
stoppage  with  opening  at  the  sides  of  the  tongue,  as  in  the 
point-divided-voice  1.     When  this  consonant  is  unvoiced, 
ths  friction  of  the  air  along  the  sides  of  the  tongue  is  both 
felt  and  heard  very  distinctly.     The  divided  consonants  are 
often  formed  with  an  opening  on  one  side  only,  and  are 
then  called  'unilateral'.      The  voiceless  Welsh  II  is  gene- 
rally unilateral,  the  breath  escaping  only  on  the  right  side. 
Unilateral  formation  of  voiced  1  is  also  not  unfrequent  in 
Welsh  and  other  languages.     Unilateral  formation  does  not 
sensibly  modify  the  quality  of  the  sound. 

112.  Trilled  (rolled)  consonants  are  special  varieties  of 
non-stopped  consonants.     They  are  formed  by  the  vibration 
of  flexible  parts  against  each  other,  as  when  the  lips  are 
trilled,  or  against  some  firm  surface,  as  when  the  point  of 
the  tongue  trills  against  the  gums  in  the  Scotch  [rrj,  where 
[r]  is  the  '  trill-modifier  '.     The  '  burred  r '  is  a  uvula-trill : 
the  uvula  is  lifted  up  by  the  back  of  the  tongue,  is  driven 
upwards  by  the  force  of  the  out-going  air,  falls  by  its  own 
weight,  is  driven  up  again,  and  so  on.      In  this  sound — 
which  is  a  frequent  substitute  for  r  both  in  individuals 
and  in  dialects — the  trilling  part  is  passive,  while  in  [IT] 


CONSONANTS  41 

the  trilling  tip  of  the  tongue  is  active.  In  learning  the 
latter,  the  tongue  should  be  lightly  thrown,  as  it  were, 
against  the  gums  ;  if  it  is  held  at  all  stiffly,  trilling  is 
impossible. 

There  are  some  more  general  modifications  of  consonants 
which  fall  under  the  head  of  form. 

113.  Thus   all   consonants  may   be   formed   either  with 
tightness  (constriction)  or  looseness,  according  to  the  de- 
gree of  approximation  of  the  organs.     Thus  the  English  j 
is  much  less  constricted  than   the  buzzed  German  conso- 
nant in  ja — so  loose,  indeed,  that  it  is  almost  a  vowel. 

Tightness  and  looseness  must  not  be  confounded  with  narrowness 
and  wideness. 

114.  This  latter  distinction  applies  to  consonants  as  well 
as  vowels,  although  it  is  generally  hardly  noticeable  in  con- 
sonants, because  of  their  harsher  sound,  but  if  the  English 
j  and  w  are   lengthened,   their  wide   quality   becomes  at 
once  apparent.      English  w  is  a  consonantized   [M],  while 
French  w  in  oui  is  a  consonantized  [u].     This  is  why  in 
French  w   the  lips   are  pouted,   while   in  the  English  w 
they  are  flat  (§  83).      English  j  is  loose  and  wide,  while 
English  w  is  tight  (constricted)  and  wide — that  is,  at  the 
beginning  of  a  stressed   syllable.     When  unstressed  it  is 
loose,  as  in  the  second  syllable  of  wayward.     If  way  is  pro- 
nounced  with   the   loose  w   of  -ward,  the  word   becomes 
irrecognizable.     This  loose  w  has  only  the  mid  rounding 
of  [o]  or  [<5],  which  latter  it  most  nearly  resembles. 

115.  By  place  the  number  of  consonants,   like  that  of 
the   vowels,  is   infinite.      As  with  the  vowels,  we   select 
certain  definite  points  of  division,  and   distinguish  inter- 
mediate positions  as  inner  and  outer.     The  main  divisions 
are  back,  front,  point,  blade,  fan,  lip,  lip-teeth. 


42  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

116.  Back  (guttural)  consonants  are  formed  between  the 
root  or  back  of  the  tongue  and  the  soft  palate.     In  English, 
as  in  most  other  languages,  the  place  of  articulation  varies 
according  to  the  nature  of  the  accompanying  vowels.     Thus 
in  Mng  kirj  the  front  vowel  draws  the  back  stop  and  back 
nasal  forward  into  the  outer  position,   the  contact  being 
between  the  upper  part  of  the  back  of  the  tongue  and  that 
part  of  the  soft  palate  which  is  just  behind  the  beginning  of 
the  hard  palate.     In  gong  gorj,  on  the  other  hand,  the  low 
back  vowel  draws  them  back  into  the  inner  position,  the 
contact  being  between  the  root  of  the  tongue  and  the  lower 
part  of  the  soft  palate.     If  we  take  two  such  words  as  key 
and   caw,   and   transpose   their   consonants,  k-iii,   kto,  the 
great   difference   between   inner   and  outer  back   becomes 
clearly  apparent. 

117.  Front  (palatal)  consonants,  such  as  the  front-open- 
voice  j,  are  formed  by  the  middle  of  the  tongue   against 
the  hard  palate,  the  point  of  the  tongue  lying  passively 
behind  the  lower  teeth.      It   is  easy  to  make  j  into  the 
front-stop-voice  j  by  closing  the  passage  (§  33).     This  was 
the  sound  of  Old  English  eg  in  lirycg  '  back '  and  of  g  in 
sengan  '  singe ',  where  the  preceding  n  is  the  corresponding 
front-nasal-voice  consonant  fi.     The  inner  form  of  the  same 
consonant  [fi-i]  is  the  French  gn  in  vigne.      If  j  is  formed 
with  side-openings  while  the  central  contact  is  maintained, 
it  becomes  the  front-divided-voice  X,  which  is  the  sound  of 
Old  English  I  before  front  stops,  as  in  swelc  '  such  ',  where  c 
is  the  front-stop-breath  consonant  c,  which,  again,  is  the 
result  of  stopping  the  front- open-breath  c.  in  German  ich 
and  the  North  English  and  Scotch  initial  consonant  in  such 
words  as  Ivm  c,uu,  which  in  Southern  English  is  generally 
pronounced  hjuw  with  h  followed  by  voice  j. 

118.  X  and  n  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the 
consonant-groups   Ij,   nj  in  million,  onion,  although   the  1 
and  n  in  these  words  have  not  exactly  the  same  sound  as 


CONSONANTS  43 

the  ordinary  point  1  and  n  in  mill,  none  ;  they  are  modified 
by  the  following  j  into  a  combination  of  point  (tongue-tip) 
articulation  with  simultaneous  outer  front  contact.  If  the 
syllables  mil  and  ran  in  the  above  words  are  isolated,  the 
front  modification  of  their  final  consonants  will  be  plainly 
heard. 

119.  Point  consonants  may  be  classified  in  two  ways, 
(1)  with  reference  to  the  part  of  the  mouth  they  articulate 
against,  and  (2)  according  to  the  direction  of  the  tongue. 
From   the  first   point   of  view  they  are   distinguished  as 
'  inner  point ',  formed   on  the  arch-rim,    '  medium  (inter- 
mediate) point ',  formed  on  the  gums  just  behind  the  teeth, 
and  outer  point  or  '  point-teeth  '  (dental),  formed  on  the 
teeth.    From  the  second  point  of  view  they  are  distinguished 
as  '  flat-point ',  in  which  the  tongue  lies  horizontal  in  the 
mouth,  and  '  up-point ',  in  which  it  is  directed  upwards. 

120.  When   the  tongue  is  in  the  first  direction,  as  in 
)>,  tJ,   it  naturally  points  to  the   teeth  ;   hence   these   two 
consonants  are  flat-point,  and  at  the  same  time  point-teeth 
consonants.     But  if  the  flat  direction  is  preserved,  it  is  pos- 
sible, although  not  natural,  to  form  inner — or  rather,  inner- 
most— J),  tS  as  far  back  as  the  arch-rim.     If  formed  on  the 
gums  just  behind  the  teeth,  these  consonants  are  practically 
indistinguishable  from  the  normal  point-teeth  varieties. 

121.  When  the  tongue  is  directed  upwards,  as  in  the  r 
in  red,  rearing,  it  as  naturally  points  towards  the  arch-rim  ; 
hence  r  is  normally  both  an  up-point  and  an  inner-point 
consonant.     And  yet,  if  the  tongue-tip  is  curled  upwards, 
an   r   can    be   formed   in    the   medium   point   position   as 
well. 

122.  The  English  r  is  vowellike  in  sound,  being  quite 
free  from  buzz,  which  is  partly  the  result  of  its  being  loose, 
partly  of  diminished  breath-pressure.     Trilling  the  r— -'  roll- 
ing one's  r's ' — is  considered  a  defect  in  English,  although  it 
is  not  unfrequent  in  declamation. 


44  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

128.  In  English  the  other  point  consonants  t,  d,  n,  1  are 
formed  in  the  medium  position.  In  combination  with  J) 
and  8  they  are  formed  in  the  outer  position,  as  in  breadth, 
eighth,  tenth,  wealth.  Outer  t,  d,  &c.,  are  the  normal  sounds 
in  French,  and  some  English  dialects. 

124.  Blade  consonants  are  formed  by  the  '  blade '  of  the 
tongue,  that  is,  its  surface  immediately  behind  the  point. 
If  the  hand  represents  the  tongue,  then  the  upper  blade 
would   be   roughly   represented   by  the   finger-nails.     The 
blade  of  the  tongue  may  also  be  regarded  as  its  flattened 
point.     The  blade-open  consonants  are  in  English  formed 
against  the  gums  just  behind  the  teeth,  in  the  same  place 
as  t,  d,  n,  1.      These   latter  are  in  English  often  formed 
with    the  tongue   somewhat    flattened,    so   that   they  are 
approximations  to  blade-consonants. 

125.  If  s,  z  are  modified  by  turning  the  tongue  upwards 
and  backwards,  so  as  to  bring  the  point  more  into  play,  they 
become  the  point-blade  consonants  J,  5  respectively.     The 
blade-point  stand  to  the  blade  consonants  in  the  same  rela- 
tion as  r  stands  to  ft ;  J,  g  being  the  up-point  consonants 
corresponding  to  the  flat-point  s,  /.     Hence  although  J,  g 
are  naturally  formed  more  inner  than   s,  z,   both   classes 
can  be  retracted  as  well  as  advanced  without  being  con- 
fused. 

126.  The  point-blade  have  a  deeper  pitch  than  the  blade 
consonants :  J  is.    acoustically,    a  dull  s.      In   some   lan- 
guages, such  as  German,   this  dull  quality  of  J"  is  exag- 
gerated by  rounding,  one  result  of  which  is  that  the  tongue- 
articulation  tends  to  be  neglected,  so  that  at  last  nothing 
remains  but  a  slight  raising  of  the  blade  or  outer  front 
of  the   tongue.      Bounding  of  J,  g  occurs  individually  in 
English. 

127.  When   the   blade-point    are   combined    with    point 
consonants,  as  in   church  tfaatj,  judge  dgBdg,  singe  sing, 
Welsh  welf,   they  are  formed  with  less  retraction  of  the 


CONSONANTS  45 

point,   being  thus  intermediate  between   blade  and  blade- 
point  consonants  both  in  formation  and  sound. 

128.  Fan  (spread)  consonants  are  varieties  of  point  and 
blade  consonants  ;  they  are  denoted  by  the  modifier  [I].     In 
them  the  sides  of  the  tongue  are  spread  out,  so  that  the 
hiss  of  such  a  consonant  as  the  blade-fan-open  [si]  is  formed 
not  only  between  blade  and  gum,  but  also  between  the  sides 
of  the  tongue  and  the  back  teeth,  which  gives  a  peculiar 
deep,  dull  '  guttural '  quality  to  the  sound,     tl,  dl  occur  in 
Irish  English  as  substitutes  for  J>,  tJ  respectively  ;  in  them 
the  fan  modification  is  supplemented  by  a  slight  raising  of 
the  back  of  the  tongue.     Fan   1  may  be  heard  in  Scotch 
Gaelic. 

129.  Lip  consonants,  such  as  p,  m,  and  lip-teeth  conso- 
nants, such  as  f,  offer  no  difficulty. 

130.  The    lip-open    consonant    <f>    does    not    occur    in 
English  :  it  is  the  sound  produced  in  blowing  out  a  candle. 
The   lip-open-voice  consonant  3  can  be  obtained   by  gab- 
bling baba.     It  is  a  frequent  substitute  for  v  in  German, 
especially  in  such  words  as  quelle,  where  another  consonant 
precedes,  and  was   the  old-fashioned    substitute   for  w  in 
Dickens's  '  Sam  Veller '. 

131.  If  the  lip-open  consonants  are  modified  by  raising 
the  back  of  the  tongue,  they  become  the  English  lip-back- 
open  consonants  wh,  w  in  what,  we,  which  are,  practically, 
consonantized  [w],  although  the  back  of  the  tongue  need  not 
necessarily  be  raised  to  the  full  high  position.     In  these 
consonants  the  lip-articulation  predominates. 

132.  In  the  back-lip-open  [xw]   of  German   auch  and 
North   Irish   win,  in  wJiat  the  back  x  is  the  predominant 
element.     This   was   one   of  the   sounds   of  gh  in  Middle 
English,  as  in  laugh,  enouyh  lauxw,  enuuxw. 

133.  Compound  Consonants.     This  last  is  one  of  a  large 
number  of  '  lip-modified  '  consonants,  of  which  the  German 


46  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

sell  is,  as  we  have  seen  (§  126),  a  further  example.  Lip- 
modified  r  is  not  uncommon  in  English  as  an  individual 
peculiarity. 

134.  In  a  similar  way  consonants  can  be  '  front-modified '. 
French  and  German  1,  as  compared  with  the  deeper-sounding 
English  1,  may  be  regarded  as  front-modified ;  in  them  the 
tongue  is  more  convex  than  in  English,  its  upper  surface 
being  arched  up  towards  the  front  position  of  j.     In  French, 
[y]  is  often  consonantized   into  the   lip-front-open  (front- 
modified    lip-open)    sound    in    lui    \lftji~].      Front-modified 
forms  of  r,  s,  m,  and  other  consonants  may  be  heard  in 
Eussian. 

135.  Shifted  Consonants.     In  the  consonants  hitherto 
described  it  has  been  taken  for  granted   that  the   tongue 
articulates  against  that  part  of  the  mouth  which  is  opposite 
to  it.     But  this  is  not  always  the  case.     Thus  in  advancing 
the  point  of  articulation  of  a  back  consonant  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  stop  short  at  the  outer  extremity  of  the  soft  palate — 
in  the  kh  or  kn-position  ;   it  is  possible  to  articulate  still 
further  forward,  with  the  outer  back  of  the  tongue  against 
the  hard  palate.     In  this  way  we  get  the  out-back  ka,  which, 
although  it  is  from  one  point  of  view  a  front  consonant, 
is  quite  distinct  from  c  or  even  c-n.      ka,   go  are  the  old- 
fashioned  sounds  in  such  words  as  sky,  garden.     To  an  un- 
accustomed ear  they  sound  like  kj,  gj.      In   Irish  Gaelic 
such  pairs  as  ko  and  c  are  kept  quite  distinct :  the  former 
is  heard  in  cedl  [koool]  '  music ',  the  latter  in  teacht  [canxt] 
'  to  come '. 

136.  The  out-point  consonants  to,  &c.,  are  formed  with 
the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  lip.     They  do  not 
seem  to  occur  in  articulate  speech. 

137.  The  in-point,  in-blade,  and  in-blade-point  consonants, 
generally  included  under  the  term  '  inverted  ',  occur  in  many 
languages  ;  the  in-r  is  heard  in  the  dialects  of  the  West  of 


CONSONANTS  47 

England.  In  their  formation  the  tip  of  the  tongue  or  its 
blade  is  turned  back  into  the  arch,  so  that  its  lower  part 
articulates  against  the  palate.  Articulation  against  the  arch- 
rise  may  be  regarded  either  as  outer  in-point  or  inner  point. 
The  full  in-r  has  a  snarling,  almost  nasal  effect.  It  can 
hardly  be  trilled.  It  is  often  formed  simultaneously  with — 
incorporated  into — the  preceding  vowel,  which  then  becomes 
an  in-point-modified  vowel. 

The  Arabic  q,  which  is  a  k  formed  even  further  back 
than  the  English  kn  in  caw,  may  be  regarded  as  an  in-back 
consonant — kc. 

138.  Non-oral  Consonants.     Some  consonants  are  formed 
below  the  mouth. 

It  is,  for  instance,  possible  to  produce  a  stopped  conso- 
nant in  the  larynx  by  opening  or  closing  the  glottis  on  a 
passage  of  breath  or  voice.  The  opening  is  heard  in  an 
ordinary  cough,  while  the  convulsive  closure  of  the  glottis 
results  in  what  is  known  as  a  hiccup.  This  '  glottal  stop  ' 
[!]  occurs  also  as  an  integral  element  of  ordinary  speech. 
In  German  all  initial  vowels  in  stressed  syllables  begin  with 
a  more  or  less  distinct  glottal  stop  ;  and  this  occurs  also  in 
some  English  dialects,  and  in  individual  pronunciation  in 
Standard  English  as  well.  In  some  North  English  and 
Scotch  dialects  (such  as  that  of  Glasgow)  the  glottal  stop 
occurs  as  a  substitute  for  the  ordinary  mouth-stops,  as  in  the 
Glasgow  pronunciation  of  water  water. 

For  the  aspirate  h,  which  is  to  some  extent  an  open 
glottal  consonant,  see  §  169. 

139.  Non-expiratory  Sounds.     All  the  sounds  hitherto 
described  imply  out-breathing  or  expiration.     But  they  can 
also  be  formed  with  in-breathing  or  inspiration.     Thus  in 
English  it  is  a  not  uncommon  trick  of  speech  to  pronounce 
no  with  in-breathing  to  express  emphatic  or  earnest  denial. 


48  SPEECH-SOUNDS 

Some  consonants  are  produced  without  either  out-  or 
in-breathing,  solely  with  the  air  in  the  mouth  or  throat. 

140.  The  sounds  known  as  '  clicks '  or  suction-stops  are 
examples.  In  their  formation  the  tongue  or  lips  are  put  in 
the  position  for  an  ordinary  stop,  and  then  the  air  is  sucked 
out  from  between  the  organs  in  contact,  so  that  when  the 
stop  is  released  a  sharp  smacking  sound  is  produced.  Thus 
the  lip-click  is  an  exaggeration  of  an  ordinary  kiss,  and  the 
point-click  is  the  interjection  of  impatience  written  tut !  In 
some  savage  languages  clicks  are  an  integral  part  of  ordinary 
articulate  speech. 


SYNTHESIS 

141.  Besides  analysing  each  sound  separately,  phonetics 
has  to  deal  with  the  various  phenomena  which  accompany 
synthesis,  that  is,  the  succession  or  combination  of  sounds  in 
syllables,  words,  and  sentences.     Although  a  sentence  may 
consist  of  a  single  word,  and  that  word  of  a  single  vowel, 
most  sounds  occur  only  in  combination  with  others. 

142.  The  ordinary  division  of  speech  into  sentences,  and 
of  sentences  into  words,  is  logical,  not  phonetic  :  we  cannot 
mark  off  the  sentences  in  continuous  discourse,  and  cut  them 
up  into  words,  till  we  know  the  meaning  of  these  words  and 
sentences,  and  are  able  to  analyse  them  grammatically. 

143.  But  the  logical  and  grammatical  division  into  sen- 
tences corresponds  to  some  extent  with  the  phonetic  division 
into   'breath-groups',  marked  off  through  our  inability  to 
utter  more  than  a  certain  number  of  sounds  in  succession 
without  pausing  to  take  breath. 

144.  Within  these   breath-groups   there  is  no  pause  or 
break  between  the  words  except  where  we  pause  for  em- 
phasis  or   to   make    grammatical   distinctions.      The   only 
necessary  phonetic  distinctions  within  a  breath-group  are 
into  syllables,  sounds,  and  intervening  '  glides '. 

The  three  general  factors  of  synthesis  are  quantity  (length), 
stress  (force),  and  intonation. 

145.  Quantity.     Although  in   the  broad  phonetic  nota- 
tion of  English  it  is  necessary  to  mark  only  two  degrees  of 
vowel-quantity,  it  is  easy  to  distinguish  at  least  five  :  over- 
long  [»#],  long  [#],  half-long  or  medium  [*],  short  [t],  and 
very  short  or  abrupt  [»t].     » is  written  as  a  notched  stroke. 

SWEET    SB 


50  SYNTHESIS 

146.  The  distinction  between  long  and  medium  is  well 
marked  in  English,  although  it  does  not  generally  require 
to  be  indicated  in  writing,  as  it  is  regularly  dependent  on 
the  nature  of  the  following  consonant.     The  rule  is  that 
strong-stressed  vowels  when  final  or  before  a  voice  conso- 
nant are  long,  while  before  a  voiceless  consonant  they  are 
only  half-long,  as  in  see  si»,  seize,  broad  compared  with 
cease  si*s,  eat,  brought.     The  diiference  is  equally  marked 
in  the  diphthongs,  as  in  no,  ride,  oil,  compared  with  right, 
voice.     In  other  languages  full  length  is  preserved  before 
voiceless  as  well  as  voiced  sounds,  as  may  be  heard  in  the 
German  pronunciation  of  all  right ! 

147.  The  distinctions  of  quantity  apply  to  consonants  as 
well  as  vowels.     In  English  there  is  a  tendency  to  lengthen 
final  consonants  after  strong  short  vowels,  as  in  man  com- 
pared with  German  mann,  where  the  final  consonant  is  quite 
short.     There  is  also  a  tendency  in  English  to  lengthen  soft 
consonants  before  voice  consonants,  and  shorten  them  before 
voiceless  consonants,  as  in  buttd  bil*d,  compared  with  built 
bilt. 

?48.  Stress.  This  is,  organically,  the  result  of  the  force 
with  which  the  breath  is  expelled  from  the  lungs  ;  acoustic- 
ally it  produces  the  effect  of  loudness,  which  is  dependent 
on  the  size  of  the  sound- vibrations :  the  bigger  the  waves, 
the  louder  the  sound,  the  greater  the  stress. 

For  the  degrees  of  stress  see  ^fZ^> 

149.  On  stress  depends  syllable-division.  A  syllable 
consists  of  a  'syllabic'  (syllable-former),  either  alone  or 
accompanied  by  non-syllabics.  The  distinction  between  the 
two  depends  on  sonority  :  the  more  sonorous  a  sound  is,  the 
more  easily  it  assumes  the  function  of  a  syllabic.  The  most 
sonorous  sounds  are  the  voiced  ones,  among  which  the  most 
open  are  the  most  sonorous,  the  most  sonorous  of  all  sounds 
being  the  clear,  open  a.  But  the  difference  is  only  a  relative 


SYNTHESIS  51 

one.  When  a  vowel  and  a  consonant  come  together,  the 
syllabicness  of  the  vowel  overpowers  that  of  the  consonant ; 
but  in  such  a  word  as  little  litl  the  second  1  is  so  much 
more  syllabic  than  the  preceding  voiceless  stop  that  it  assumes 
syllabic  function,  and  the  word  is  felt  to  be  disyllabic, 
although  it  only  contains  one  vowel.  The  syllabic  quality 
of  the  final  consonant  in  little,  reason  riizn,  open,  &c.,  does 
not  require  to  be  marked,  because  as  long  as  these  final  con- 
sonants are  voiced  they  are  necessarily  syllabic.  If  it  is 
necessary  to  indicate  syllabicness  of  a  consonant  in  the 
interior  of  a  word,  this  can  be  done  by  putting  -,  or  what- 
ever stress-mark  is  required,  after  it,  as  in  bBtn-irj  button- 
ing, botl-a  bottler  compared  with  butler. 

150.  The  beginning  of  a  syllable  corresponds  to  the  be- 
ginning of  the  stress  with  which  it  is  uttered.     Thus  in 
atone  the  strong  stress  and  the  second  syllable  begin  on  the 
t,  and  in   bookcase  bukikeis   on   the   second   k,   the  first 
k  belonging  to   the  first  syllable,  so  that  the  kk  is  here 
really  double — that  is  to  say,  there  are  two  of  them — not 
merely  long,  as  in  book  buk*  by  itself  (§  147). 

151.  Two  vowels  in  succession  uttered  with  one  impulse  of 
stress,  so  as  to  form  only  one  syllable,  constitute  a  diphthong. 
The   English   diphthongs    ai,    oi,    au  are    'falling'   diph- 
thongs, having  the  stress  on  the  first  element,  «o  that  it  is 
the  second  element  which  is  non-syllabic.     The  u  and  eu  in 
such  words  as  union,  euphony,  was  also  a  falling  diphthong 
iu  in  the  Early  Modern  English  of  the  sixteenth  century. 
In  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century  the  stress  in  this 
diphthong  was  shifted  on  to  the  second  element,  so  that  it 
became   the   '  rising '  diphthong   i*u,  i'uu.     As  the  unsyl- 
labic  vowel  in  such  a  diphthong  is  practically  indistinguish- 
able from  a  loose  j,  it  is  best  to  write  it  accordingly,  ju,  juu, 
keeping  the    notation    iu   for  the    falling    diphthong.     In 
English  the  falling  diphthongs  weaken   their   second  ele- 
ments, so   that  they  are  no  longer  full  i,  u,   as  in   some 

D2 


52  SYNTHESIS 

languages  and  even  in  some  English  dialects  ;  thus  au  in 
Scotch  is  full  [au],  that  is,  B  followed  by  high  narrow  u, 
so  that  it  might  also  be  written  aw. 

152.  It  is  not  always   easy  to    draw  the  line  between 
diphthongic  and  disyllabic  pronunciation,  as  in  the  English 
murmur-diphthongs    such    as    ia,     which    when    uttered 
slowly  have  more  or  less  of  a  disyllabic  effect.     This  is  still 
more  the  case  with  triphthongs  such  as  aia. 

153.  Conversely,  in  very  rapid  and  careless  speech  even 
such  vowel-sequences  as    those  in  poetical,   coerce,   jEolic, 
pou'etikl,  kou'aas,  ii'olik  often  become  shorter  by  a  syl- 
lable, so  that  they  might  be  roughly  symbolized  by  pwetikl, 
kwaas,  jolik. 

154.  Intonation  (§  19).    This  depends  on  the  rapidity  of 
the  sound-vibrations  :  the  quicker  the  vibrations,  the  higher 
the  pitch,  the  sharper  and  shriller  the  tone.     Voiced  sounds 
are  the  only  ones  capable  of  variation  of  pitch,  which  in 
speech  and  song  depends  on  the  tension  of  the  vocal  chords 
and  the  length  of  their  vibrating  portion :  the  tighter  and 
shorter  a  string  or  similar  vibrating  body,  the  higher  the 
pitch. 

155.  In  singing,  the  voice  generally  dwells  on  each  note 
without  change  of  pitch,  and  then  leaps  up  or  down  to  the 
next  note  as  smoothly  and  quickly  as  possible,  so  that  the 
intervening  pitch-glide  is  not  noticed,   except    in  what  is 
called   'portamento'.     In  speech,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
voice   hardly   ever   dwells   on   any  one   note,  but   is   con- 
stantly moving  upwards  and  downwards,  sometimes  by  leaps, 
but  more  generally  by  glides,  in  which  all  the  intermediate 
notes   are   heard   in   more  or  less  rapid  succession,  as  in 
portamento. 

156.  The   different   tones — rising,    falling,    &c. — vary   in 
character  according  to  the  interval  through  which  they  pass. 
The  greater  the  interval,  the  more  emphatic  the  tone.    Thus 


SYNTHESIS  53 

a  high  rise,  which  begins  high,  and  consequently  can  only 
rise  a  little  higher,  expresses  simple  question ;  while  the 
same  word,  if  uttered  with  a  low  rise  extending  over  an 
interval  of  an  octave  or  even  more,  expresses  surprise  or 
indignation,  as  in  iv hat !  compared  with  the  simply  interro- 
gative what  ? 

Glides. 

157.  Consonant-glides.     Such  a  word  as  cat  consists  not 
only  of  the  vowel  and  the  two  consonants  of  which  it  is 
made   up,  but  also  of  glides  or   positions  between   these 
sounds.     The  glide  from  the  initial  consonant  to  the  vowel 
consists  of  all  the  intermediate  positions  through  which  the 
tongue  passes  on  its  way  from  the  k-position  to  that  of  ae. 
The  number  of  these  positions  is  infinite ;  but  they  are  all 
implied  by  the  mere  juxtaposition  of  the  symbols  of  the 
fixed  sounds,  it  being  assumed  that  in  all  transitions  from 
one  position  to  another  the  shortest  way  is  taken. 

158.  Although  the  direction  of  a  glide  is  thus  dependent 
on  the  positions  of  the  two  fixed  points  between  which  it 
lies,  its  character  may  be  varied  both  by  the  shape  of  the 
throat-  and  mouth-passages — especially  the  glottis- -and  by 
stress  and  quantity. 

159.  In  the  word  given  above  the  two  '  off-glides '  from 
the  consonants  are  both  breath -glides,  the  glottis  being  kept 
open  during  the  transition  from  the  k  to  the  SB,  and  also 
during  the  loosening  of  the  stop  of  the  final  consonant — 
that  is  to  say,  during  the  transition  from  the  t  to  silence. 
The  'on-glide'  from  the  vowel  to  the  t  is,   on   the   other 
hand,  a  voice-glide,  the  vibration  of  the  chords  being  main- 
tained till  the  stop  is  made. 

160.  In  French  and  most  of  the  languages  of  the  South  of 
Europe  voiceless  consonants  are  generally  followed  by  voice- 
glides.     Thus  in  French  qul  there  is  110  escape  of  breath  as 


54  SYNTHESIS 

in  the  English  key.     Nearly  the  same  pronunciation  may  be 
heard  in  Scotch. 

161.  Some  of  the  languages  of  the  North  of  Europe  have 
breath  on-glides  before  voiceless  stops,  as  if  t,  k,  &c.,  were 
preceded  by  a  h. 

162.  If  an  independent  strong  stress  is  put  on  the  breath- 
glides  after  the  consonants  in  such  words  as  two,  key,  they 
are   heard   almost  as   full   consonants — as  weak  )>  and  x 
respectively.     Such  consonants  are  said  to  be  '  aspirated  '. 
Initial   voiceless   stops   are  regularly  aspirated    in    Irish- 
English  and  in  Danish.     Sanskrit  and  Old  Greek  kh,  Hi,  pli 
were  no  doubt  pronounced  in  the  same  way — as,  indeed, 
they  still  are  in  India. 

163.  The  voice-glide  after  the  voice-stops  g,  d,  &c.,  may 
be  emphasized  in  the  same  way,  giving  the  'sonant  aspirates' 
gh,  tli.  &c.,  of  Sanskrit. 

164.  Voice  consonants  between  vowels  in  English,  as  in 
other  languages,  have  both  their  on-  and  off-glides  voiced, 
as  in  ago,  where  the  chords  vibrate  continuously  throughout 
the  whole  word.     But  if  a  voice  stop  in  English  is  not  pre- 
ceded by  a  vowel  or  other  voiced  sound,  as  when  go !  is 
uttered  by  itself,  it  is  not  voiced  throughout,  the  chords 
being  only  gradually  brought  together,  so  that  full  voice  is 
not  heard  till  just  before  the  transition  to  the  vowel.     So 
also  with  buzzes  (voiced  hiss  consonants),  as  in  meal.    When 
these  latter  consonants  come  at  the  end  of  a  word  and  are 
not  followed  by  voiced  sounds,  they  have  full  vocality  only 
at  the  beginning,  so  that  they  end  with  something  between 
voice  and  whisper,  as  in  case  compared  with  easy.    In  French 
and  many  other  languages  such  consonants  preserve  their 
full  vocality  in  all  positions. 

165.  Glideless   combinations   remain   to   be   considered. 
The  principle  of  taking  the  shortest  cut  between  sounds  in 
juxtaposition  necessarily  results  in  certain  transitions  being 
effected  without  any  glide  at  all.    This  is  regularly  the  case 


GLIDES  55 

when  the  two  sounds  are  consonants  having  the  same  place, 
and  differing  only  in  form  as  in  and,  halt,  where  the  point 
of  the  tongue  remains  unmoved  throughout  the  two  con- 
sonants, the  transition  from  the  n  to  the  d  being  effected 
simply  by  opening  the  passage  into  the  nose,  and  that  from 
1  to  t  by  opening  the  passages  at  the  sides  of  the  tongue, 
and  opening  the  glottis  at  the  same  time.  In  such  combina- 
tions as  mf  the  slight  glide  between  the  two  consonants  is 
in  most  languages  got  rid  of  by  assimilating  the  place  of  the 
first  consonant  to  that  of  the  second  :  thus  in  English 
nymph  the  m  is  a  lip-teeth  instead  of  a  pure  lip-nasal. 

166.  Even  when  consonants  are  formed  in  quite  different 
places,  it  is  often  possible  to  join  them  without  any  glide. 
In  English,  stop-combinations  are  glideless,  as  in  active,  apt, 
robbed,  headpiece,  the  second  stop  being  formed  before  the 
preceding  one  is  loosened.     In  French  and  most  other  lan- 
guages such  combinations  are  separated  by  a  breath  or  voice 
glide. 

167.  Combinations   of  soft  consonants  with   other  con- 
sonants, whether  hard  or  soft,  are  glideless  in  most  lan- 
guages, as  in  English  try,  quite,  glow,  bulb.     In  English  the 
breath-glide  after  a  stop  in  such  a  word  as  try  unvoices  the 
first  half  of  the  following  soft  consonant,  so  that  try  might 
almost  be  written  trh-rai. 

168.  Vowel- glides.     Vowels   are   begun   and   ended    in 
various  ways. 

In  the  '  gradual  beginning ',  which  is  the  usual  one  in 
French  and  English,  the  glottis  is  gradually  narrowed  while 
breath  is  being  emitted.  Thus  in  pronouncing  aa  with 
gradual  beginning  the  glottis  begins  to  close  at  the  same 
moment  that  the  tongue  begins  to  move  from  the  neutral 
mixed  position  into  the  mid-back  one.  In  the  'clear' 
beginning  the  breath  is  kept  back  till  the  chords  are  in  the 
position  for  voice  and  the  tongue  is  in  the  position  for  he 


56  SYNTHESIS 

vowel,  so  that  the  vowel  begins  at  once  without  any  of 
the  preparatory  '  breathiness '  of  the  gradual  beginning.  In 
German  the  clear  beginning  is  generally  exaggerated  into 
a  glottal  stop. 

169.  In  the  gradual  as  well  as  the  clear  beginning  the 
stress  begins   on  the  vowel  itself.     If  in  the  former  the 
stress  begins  on  the  breath  glide,  this  glide  is  felt  as  an 
independent  element,  just  as  in  the  aspiration  of  consonants 
(§  162),  and  becomes  the  '  aspirate '  h,  which  in  its  ordinary 
English  form  is  a  glide  both  in   the   throat   and   in   the 
mouth. 

170.  Some  languages  have  a  *  strong  aspirate ',  in  which 
the  full  position  for  the  following  vowel  is  assumed  at  the 
moment  when  breath  begins  to  be  emitted,  the  aspirate  in 
this  case  being  simply  a  voiceless  vowel,  so  that,  for  instance, 
bii  with  the  strong  aspirate   sounds   almost  like  Qii  and 
haa  like  xaa.    The  strong  h  may  be  heard  in  American 
English. 

171.  In  most  languages,  when  an  aspirate  comes  between 
voiced  sounds,  it  is  formed  with  '  half -voice '  or  imperfect 
vocality.     Thus  in  English  behold!   compared  with  hold! 
the  chords  vibrate  throughout  the  whole  word,  but  their 
vibration  is  so  feeble  during  the  h  that  the  contrast  of  this 
weak  vocality  with  the  full  vocality  of  the  other  sounds  is 
enough  to  produce  the  effect  of  aspiration.    In  the  emphatic 
aha!,  on  the  contrary,  the  glottis  is  opened  enough  to  let 
out  a  distinct  puff  of  air,   instead  of  merely  relaxing  its 
closure,  as  in  half-voice. 


PHONETIC  STKUCTUKE   OF  ENGLISH 

172.  English,  like  all  other  languages,  uses  only  a  part  of 
the  general  phonetic  material.    It  has  only  a  limited  number 
of  sounds.     If  we  compare  the  English  of  the  present  day 
with  the  English  of  King  Alfred,  we  shall  find  that  many 
of  the  sounds  of  Old  English  have  been  lost  in  the  present 
Standard  English,  some  of  them  being  still  preserved  in  the 
dialects.    On  the  other  hand,  the  later  English  has  developed 
many  sounds  of  its  own,  some  only  within  the  last  few 
centuries,  such  as  the  vowels  B,  aa.     Again,  each  language 
and  each  period  of  a  language  makes,  or  may  make,  a  dif- 
ferent use  of  the  synthetical  distinctions  of  quantity,  stress, 
and  intonation.     Thus  in  the  Middle  English  of  Chaucer, 
consonants  written  double  were  still  pronounced  double,  as 
in  sonne  sunna,  'sun,'  distinct  from  sone  suna,  'son,'  the 
nn  in  the  former  being  pronounced  as  in  our  penknife.     We 
do  not  know  what  the  intonation  of  Alfred  and  Chaucer 
was,  but  it  may  have  been  very  different  from  ours  as  well 
as  from  that  of  each  other. 

173.  Present   English   has   therefore    its   own   national 
sound-system,    differing   in   many  respects   from  that  of 
Middle  English,  and  still  more  from  that  of  Old  English ; 
although,    on  the   other  hand,  it   has  preserved   more   or 
less    faithfully  many   of  the   characteristics   even   of  Old 
English,    such    as   the    old    original    pronunciation   of    w, 
lost  in  the  other  Germanic  languages.     Present  English  has 
also  preserved  the  Old  English  J>,   (S,  which,  again,  are  lost 
in  the  other  cognate  languages,  except  Icelandic. 

174.  Each  national  sound-system  shows  certain  general 
tendencies  which  control  the  formation  of  its  sounds,  con- 


58        PHONETIC  STRUCTURE   OF  ENGLISH 

stituting  its  organic  basis  (basis  of  articulation).  The 
general  tendencies  of  present  English  are  to  flatten  and 
lower  the  tongue,  and  draw  it  back  from  the  teeth,  the  lips 
being  kept  as  much  as  possible  in  a  neutral  position.  The 
flattening  of  the  tongue  makes  our  vowels  wide,  and  favours 
the  development  of  mixed  vowels.  It  also  gives  a  dull 
character  to  our  sounds,  which  is  especially  noticeable  in 
the  1.  The  retraction  of  the  tongue  gets  rid  of  point-teeth 
consonants.  The  neutrality  of  the  lips  has  eliminated  the 
front-round  vowels. 

175.  But  these  tendencies  are  not  carried  out  uniformly. 
Thus  the  desire  of  distinctness  has  preserved  the  point-teeth 
consonants  J>,  tS. 

Sound-junction. 

176.  The  great  rapidity  with  which  sounds  follow  each 
other  in  speech  naturally  leads  to  a  more  or  less  conscious 
attempt  to  make  the  necessary  transitions  as  easy  as  possible. 
We   have   already  seen   that   the   principle  of  taking  the 
shortest   and   most   direct   path  from   one   articulation   to 
another  naturally  leads  to  modifications   of  these   articu- 
lations (§  165).     This  tendency  exists  in  all  languages,  but 
some  carry  it  out  more  fully  than  others.     English  is  one  of 
those  languages  in  which  the  sounds  are,  on  the  whole,  but 
little  liable  to  be  influenced  by  their  phonetic  surroundings. 
The  effects  of  sound-junction  in  English  are  trifling  com- 
pared with  the  changes  effected  in  French  by  its  liaisons, 
and  the  still  more  marked  modifications  due  to  the  con- 
sonant-mutations in  Welsh,  and  the  sandhi  (putting-together) 
of  Sanskrit.     Many  of  the  English  changes  are,  like  the 
French  liaisons,  only  negative,  involving  not  sound-change, 
but  sound-loss :  certain  sounds  are  dropped  in  certain  posi- 
tions and  under  certain  circumstances,  preserved  in  others. 

177.  Sandhi  in  Sanskrit  is   of  two  kinds,  internal  and 
external ;  the  former  deals  with  sound-changes  within  words, 


SOUND-JUNCTION  59 

the  latter  with  the  changes  which  are  the  result  of  the 
junction  of  the  final  sound  of  one  word  with  the  initial 
sound  of  the  next.  The  natural  tendency  of  language  is  to 
carry  out  all  these  changes  without  regard  to  word-division, 
which,  as  we  have  seen  (§  142),  is  not  really  a  phonetic 
phenomenon.  Thus  the  English  change  of  m  before  f 
into  a  lip-teeth  consonant  is  in  natural  speech  carried  out 
uniformly  whenever  the  two  consonants  are  run  together 
without  any  pause,  no  matter  whether  they  belong  to  the 
same  word  or  not.  And  so  we  have  internal  sandhi  in 
comfort,  external  sandhi  in  come  forth,  I  saw  him  fall. 

178.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  all  languages  show  a  reac- 
tion against  this  natural  development — a  reaction  which  is 
the  equally  natural  result  of  the  striving  after  clearness  of 
expression    and    distinctness,    and    the    consequent    desire 
to  preserve  the  individuality  of  each  word  by  giving  it  one 
invariable  form  in  all  its  combinations  with  other  words. 
One  of  the  reasons  why  English  generally  gets  rid  of  sandhi 
long  before  it  produces  marked  changes  and  divergencies 
in  the  forms  of  words  is  that  its  brevity  makes  it  necessary 
for  the  language  to  preserve  the  individuality  of  its  words  as 
much  as  possible. 

179.  The   extent  to  which   any  one   language   develops 
sandhi,  and  the  form  that  development  takes,  depends  on 
the  phonetic  structure  of  the  language.     One,  for  instance, 
in  which  every  consonant  is  separated  from   every  other 
consonant  by  a  vowel,  or  in  which  every  word  begins  with 
a  consonant  and  ends  with  a  vowel,  would  not  have  the 
same   temptation   to   develop   sandhi  —  either   internal   or 
external,  as  the  case  might  be — as  one  in  which  harsh  and 
difficult  consonant-groups  are  frequent,  as  in  English.     And 
yet,  although  in  everyday  speech  we  find  it  difficult  not  to 
yield  to  the  temptation  to  make  fifths  and  sixths  into  fifes 
n  sikss,   with  a  lengthened  s   instead   of  J>s,   we  cannot 
regard  these  pronunciations  as  normal ;  in  all  moderately 


60         PHONETIC  STRUCTURE  OF  ENGLISH 

careful  speech  we  always  at  least  make  an  effort  to  pronounce 
the}). 

180.  But  there  is  a  distinct  tendency  in  English  to  drop 
the  middle  one  of  three  consecutive  consonants  even  when 
there  is  no  special  difficulty  in  their  sequence.     In  fact,  this 
is  often  more  an  acoustic  than  an  organic  change,  the  middle 
consonant  being  dropped  mainly  because  it  does  not  strike  the 
ear  distinctly,  through  being  a  repetition  of  its  neighbour, 
as  in  the  las(t)  time,  an  ol(d)  dog,  or  formed  in  the  same 
place,  as  in  beas(t)ly,  I  don'(t)  know. 

181.  Liability  to   sandhi   is   often   the   result   of  other 
phonetic  changes,  such  as  the  English  tendency  to  shorten, 
obscure,  and  then  drop  weak  vowels,  by  which,  for  instance, 
Old  English  hlafas  and  fiscas  became  in   Middle  English 
looves  and  fisshes  looves  and  fljjes,  and  then  loovez  and 
fijez,  whence  the  present  louvz  an  fijiz  loaves  and  fishes, 
the   weak  vowel  having   been   restored  in  the   last  word 
because   of  the   difficulty   of  pronouncing   fijz.      In   such 
a   case   as  this   the   difficulty   amounts    practically   to   an 
impossibility. 

182.  In  the  Modern  English  forms  of  such  Middle  English 
plurals  as  cattes,  sJiippes  the  difficulty  of  pronouncing  final 
tz,  pz  was  got  rid  of  by  glottal  assimilation.     The  natural 
phonetic  change  would  have  been  to  make  ksetz,  Jipz  into 
ksedz,  Jibz  ;  but  as  this  would  have  obscured  the  identity 
of  the  words,  the  assimilation  was  reversed  by  unvoicing 
the  final  consonants.     So  also  in  blest  compared  with  the 
older  disyllabic  Uessed  and  disyllabic  beloved  compared  with 
the  longer  form  beloved. 

183.  But  the  influence  of  sound-junction  is  not  always  in 
the  way  of  causing  change  :  it  is  often  conservative,  change- 
preventing,  as  in  the  preservation  of  the  full  vocality  of 
consonants  between  vowels  (§  164). 

184.  A  frequent  cause  of  sound-change  in  many  languages 
is  the  tendency  of  nasal  consonants  to  assimilate  the  place 


SOUND-JUNCTION  61 

of  their  formation  to  that  of  the  adjoining  consonants, 
especially  if  the  consonant  is  a  stop.  In  English,  such  pro- 
nunciations as  irjkBm  income,  irjgeidg  engage,  dourj  kea 
don't  care,  where  dount  first  loses  its  final  consonant  and 
then  shifts  the  place  of  the  preceding  nasal,  are  only  occa- 
sional. 

185.  The  change  of  sj    into  J  and   zj   into   g   in   such 
words  as  sure,  nation,  measure  began  already  in  the  second 
half  of  the  seventeenth  century,  the  older  pronunciations 
sjuur,  nsesesjun,  mezjur  being  still  the  usual  ones  at  the 
beginning  of  the  century.     The  parallel  development  of  tj, 
dj  into  tf,  djj,  as  in  nature,  verdure,  began  at  the  same  time. 
Both  are  now  fully  established  in  natural  English  speech, 
although   some    'careful   speakers'   still  try  to   pronounce 
neitjua,    vaadjua.      The    standard    pronunciation    neitfa 
was  itself  originally  an  artificial  revolt  against  the  seven- 
teenth century  neetar,  which  now  survives  only  as  a  vul- 
garism.    In  trying  to  avoid  this,  some  half-educated  speakers 
fall  into  the  error  of  making  laughter  into  laaftfa.      We 
still  fluctuate  between  tj,  dj  and  tf,  ds;  in  such  words  as 
multitude,  education.     Such  pronunciations  as  tjuwta,  indga 
for    tjuwta,    indja,    tutor,   India,   are    Irish   rather    than 
English. 

186.  These  fluctuations  are  aided  by  the  English  tendency 
to  partially  front-modify  t,  d  before  j  in  the  way  already 
described  with  reference  to  nj,  Ij  (§  118).     When  tj,  dj  are 
approximated  in  this  way  to  CKJ,  j>j,  it  is  sometimes  diffi- 
cult to  distinguish  them  from  tf,  dg.     Even  tj  with  pure 
point  t   is   liable   to  be  confounded  with  eg  through   the 
off-glide   of  the   t   unvoicing  the   beginning  of  the  j,   CQ 
being  similar  in  sound  to  tf. 

187.  All  these  changes  may  be  observed  also  in  separate 
words,  as  in  don't  you,  would  you,  eight  years.     When  sj,  Jj 
meet   in   separate  words,  they  tend  to  become  JJ ;    zj,  &j 
being  assimilated  analogously  into  55,   as  in  this  year,  all 


62         PHONETIC  STKUCTURE   OF   ENGLISH 

these  years,  las(t)  year,  push  you,  rouge  you.     j  is  often  lost 
after  tf,  dg,  as  in  catch  you,  oblige  you. 

188.  The  influences  hitherto  considered  are  of  consonant 
on  consonant.     Of  the  influences  of  consonants  on  vowels 
the  most   important  are   those   exercised  by  r:  they  con- 
stitute one  of  the  most  characteristic  features  of  Modern 
English. 

r  in  English  occurs  only  before  a  vowel  following  it 
without  a  pause,  as  in  hearing,  here  it  is  hiarirj,  hiar  it  iz  ; 
before  a  consonant  or  a  pause  it  disappears  :  he  hears,  he  is 
here  Mj  hiaz,  hijz  hia.  In  some  pronunciations  r  is 
always  dropped  at  the  end  of  a  word  whether  a  vowel 
follows  or  not :  Me  it  iz.  This  seems  to  be  an  artificial 
reaction  against  the  insertion  of  final  hiatus-filling  r  after  a 
in  such  groups  as  India  Office,  the  idea  of  it,  which  is  frequent 
even  in  educated  speech.  The  insertion  of  r  after  other 
vowels  as  in  Pa  isn't  in,  I  sato  it  in  the  drawing-room 
drorinrum  is  quite  vulgar. 

189.  The  influence  of  r  on  preceding  vowels  is  twofold  : 
(1)  it  develops  a  voice-glide,   as  in   hiariij  compared  with 
Scotch    hiirirj,    Middle    English     heringe    heerirjga,    fire 
faia  compared  with  Middle  English  fir  fiir  ;    (2)  it  broadens 
and  obscures  the  vowel,  partly  by  direct  influence,  partly 
through  the  influence  of  the  parasitic  a.     The  change  of 
e  into   a,   as  in   star,    dark,    clerk,   from    Middle   English 
sterre,   derk,   clerk,   goes  back  to    the   end  of  the   Middle 
English  period  itself,  the  first  development  of  the  glide-r, 
to  the  beginning  of  the  Modern  English  period  (sixteenth 
century). 

190.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  r  has  no  influence  on  a 
preceding  short  vowel  when  it  is  itself  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
the  same  word :  compare  car,  care,  with  carry,  where  a  has 
the  same  sound  as  in  manner,  quart  with  quarrel,  where  it  has 
the  same  sound  as  in  quality.    So  also  in  spirit,  merry,  furrow, 
sorrow  compared  with  fir,  mirth,  fier,  turn,  sore,  sort. 


SOUND-JUNCTION  63 

191.  In  the  sixteenth  century  such  words  as  her,  bird,  turn 
were  still  pronounced  as  they  were  written,  with  a  distinct 
r,  u  still  preserving  the  sound  it  now  has  in  full. 

102.  In  the  next  century  u  =  [u]  was  unrounded  in  all 
words  into  [a],  which  was  afterwards  broadened  into  the 
present  sound,  turn  being  pronounced  with  the  same  vowel 
as  up.  The  e  of  her,  vertue  was  obscured  into  a  variety  of 
the  mixed  vowel  a.  There  was  now  so  little  distinction 
between  er,  ir,  ur  when  not  followed  by  a  vowel  in  the  same 
word  that  they  were  soon  confounded  under  ar.  But  the 
distinction  between  such  words  as  serf  and  surf  is  still  kept 
up  in  some  Irish  dialects  ;  and  in  the  older  Scotch  pronuncia- 
tion these  words  were  still  distinguished  as  serf,  sttrf. 

193.  In  the  eighteenth  century  r  and  a  broadened  pre- 
ceding [e»]  into  [se*],  as  in  care,  fair  compared  with  name 
[ne*m],  fain;   and   [«?]  into  [a],  as  in  star,  hard,  earlier 
st»r,  hserd.     The  same  broadening  is  seen  in  the  present 
pronunciation   of  such  words  as  bore,  boar,  floor  compared 
with  bone,  boat,  boon. 

194.  In  present  English  they  have  arrested  the  change  of 
ii,  uu  into  ij,  uw,   as  in  here,  poor  hia,  pua   compared 
with  Jieel,  pool,  besides  widening  these  vowels,  and  lowering 
them    towards    e,    o.      In   vulgar    pronunciation  poor   is 
levelled  under  pore,  and  sometimes  both  of  these,  are  further 
levelled  under  paw.     These  pronunciations  are  now  begin- 
ning to  find  their  way  into  educated  speech  as  well.     Weak 
eia  is  often  broadened  into  ea,  as   in   bricklayer  briklea, 
and   regularly   in  Sea   they  arc.      In   careless   speech  this 
change  as  well  as  the   corresponding   broadening  of  cue 
into  oa  is  sometimes  carried  out  in  strong  syllables  as  well, 
as  in  a  lower  layer  a  loa  lea. 

195.  The  pronunciation  of  poor  as  paw  is  an  extreme  case 
of  the  absorption  of  the  a  by  a  preceding  broad  or  mixed 
vowel,     a   necessarily  disappears  after  aa,  as  in  stir  staa, 
staarirj.  staar  it,  and  aa — which,  as  we  have  seen  (§91),  is 


64         PHONETIC  STRUCTURE   OF   ENGLISH 

really  aa— as  in  far,  starry  faa,  staari.  Father  and  farther 
are  both  pronounced  alike  ;  and  the  r  which  many  un- 
phonetic  observers  persist  in  hearing  in  the  latter  word  is, 
of  course,  only  the  a,  which  is  just  as  distinct  in  father,  o 
also  ends  in  a  mixed  vowel ;  but  as  this  vowel  is  rounded, 
there  is  no  difficulty  in  adding  an  a  to  it.  Some  speakers 
seem  to  keep  the  a  everywhere  except  before  the  r  itself, 
as  in  pouring,  pour  away.  Many  drop  it  before  a  consonant 
in  the  same  word,  as  in  poured,  pours.  Others  also  before 
a  consonant  in  another  word,  as  in  pour  down,  and  some 
drop  it  before  a  pause  as  well,  so  that  they  make  no  more 
distinction  between  lore  and  laiv  than  the  majority  of  the 
educated  do  between  lord  and  laud. 

196.  r  sometimes  takes  a  voice-glide  before  it  to  facili- 
tate the  transition  from  a  preceding  consonant,  as  in  um- 
brella, Gibraltar,  where  the  a  after  the  b  in  both  words  is 
too  short  to  constitute  a  syllable.     Such  insertions  are  more 
frequent  in  vulgar  speech. 

197.  Shifting  of  syllabic   function  is  in  English  as  in 
other  languages  an  occasional  result  of  sound-junction.     In 
Southern  English  the  words  milk  and  children  are  hardly 
ever  pronounced  as  they  are  written.     In  both  of  them  the 
1  has  the  syllabic  function  of  a  vowel,   before  which  the 
vowel  of  the  former  word  becomes  unsyllabic,  while  the 
vowel  of  the  latter  word  is  generally  dropped  :  mjlk,  tjldran, 
and  even  mjuk,  tjuldran,  tfulran,  tjuran. 

198.  Syllabic  shifting  is  frequent  in  the  diphthong  ia, 
which  is  then  made  into  jaa,  a  h   generally  disappearing 
before  the  j.     Even  in  the  pulpit  we  may  sometimes  hear 
he  that  hath  ears  to  hear  let  him  hear  pronounced  hij  tSat  hse]> 
jaaz  ta  jaa  let  him  jaa. 

199.  The  influence  of  vowel  on  vowel  is  seen  in  the  two 
pronunciations  of  the  and  to  as  tSa,  ta  before  consonants  and 
(Si,  tu  before  vowels,  the  latter  being  of  course  the  older 
forms  :  <Sa  frend,  tSi  enimi,  ta  gou  tu  iid5ipt. 


SOUND-JUNCTION  65 

200.  The  hiatus-filling  n  in  an  enemy  compared  with 
a  friend  is  also  the  older  form — a  weakened  one — preserved 
before  a  vowel.     We  still  often  write  an  before  juw  in 
union,  &c.,  through  the  tradition  of  the  earlier  pronuncia- 
tion  iu  from   Middle   English  yy.      Some  still  keep  this 
pronunciation  before  weak  juw,  as  in  an  united  Europe,  but 
the  general  tendency  is  to  use  a  here  also. 

Gradation. 

201.  Perhaps  the  most  characteristic  feature  of  English 
phonology  is   the  extreme   sensitiveness  of  its  sounds  to 
variations  in  the  degree  of  stress,  giving  rise  to  the  varied 
phenomena  of  gradation. 

202.  In   fully   weak    syllables   there   is   a  tendency   in 
English  to  modify  all  vowels  in  the  direction  of  shortness, 
lowering  of  high  vowels,  and  mixed  position,  under  which 
is  included  the  out-modification  of  back,  and  the  in-modinca- 
tion  of  front  vowels.     The  extreme  of  weakening  is  reached 
when  the  vowel  is  merged  under  a,  which  is  itself  liable 
to  become  whispered,  and  then  to  be  dropped  altogether. 

203.  Vowels   like   a   which    occur    only  in    unstressed 
syllables  are   called  'weak'.      The   diphthongs  ai  and  au 
change  their  first  elements  into  a  in  unstressed  syllables, 
as  in  ai  so  -it,  aidia,  haueva  compared  with  the  emphatic 
;ai  so  it  and  the  full-stressed  how.     The  more  important 
of  the  other  weak  vowels  may  be  conveniently  denoted  by 
a  superimposed  v,  which  at  the  same  time  dispenses  with 
the  necessity  of  specially  marking  them  as  unstressed.    They 
are  the  lowered  1  in  piti,  ivent  pity,   event,  and  the  out- 
back ii,  du,  6  in  vgelju,  zuwluw,  soultiu,  bktouba  value, 
Zulu,  solo,  October.     But  all  the  strong  vowels  have  weak 
forms  of  their  own.    Thus  the  e  in  insect  is  slightly  higher 
than  that  in  sect,  and  yet  is  distinct  from  i.    So  also  if  the  two 
vowels  in  aebstraekt   abstract  are  isolated  and  lengthened, 


66         PHONETIC   STRUCTURE   OF  ENGLISH 

the  weak  one  will  be  found  to  be  an  approximation  to  a 
both  in  position  and  sound.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  mark 
the  distinction  in  these  rarer  cases,  as  it  is  generally  implied 
by  the  weak  stress. 

It  must  be  clearly  understood  that  'weak  '  as  opposed  to  '  strong ' 
implies  a  definite  change  of  articulation  :  if  a  strong  vowel  under- 
went no  change  when  unstressed,  it  would  be  a  weak-stressed  but 
not  a  weak  vowel. 

204.  The  degree  of  obscuration  of  the  English  vowels 
depends  to  some  extent  on  the  rapidity  with  which  they  are 
uttered.     In  very  rapid  and  careless  speech  I  may  sometimes 
be  lowered  and  retracted  so  much  as  to  make  it  difficult  to 
distinguish  it  from  a,  as  in  the  ending  -able,  -ible  in  such 
words  as  possible.     6  is  liable  to  be  unrounded  and  merged 
in  a.     Thus  or  is  pronounced  oa,  o,  6,  a  according  to  the 
degree  of  emphasis  that  is  given  to  it.     Most  weak  vowels 
are  liable  to  change  into  a,  although  such  pronunciations 
as  ja  for  ju  you  and  J6a,  jd  your,  fela   for  fe!6u  felloio 
border  on  the  vulgar,  even  if  they  often  pass  unnoticed  in 
rapid  and  indistinct  speech. 

The  distinction  between  strong  and  weak  is  therefore  a 
relative  one  ;  thus  6v  is  strong  as  compared  with  av,  which 
again  is  stronger  than  a  (§  207). 

205.  Weak  stress  often  causes  dropping  of  consonants  as 
well  as  vowels.     Weak  initial  h  is  kept  only  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  sentence,  as  in  hlj  so  Im  Tie  saw  Mm.      The  h  is 
of  course  restored  in  the  strong  emphatic  forms,  as  in  hij 
so  haa,  an  Jij  so  him  Tie  saiv  Tier,  and  she  saw  Mm.     Many 
educated — and   many  more   half-educated—speakers   make 
a  point  of  keeping  the  h  everywhere.     Most  of  them  suc- 
ceed only  partially,  forcing  out  the  weak  h  with  a  painful 
effort  when  speaking  slowly,  and  dropping  it  as  soon  as  they 
are  off  their  guard.     The  dropping  of  weak  h  is  as  old  as 
the  time  of  King  Alfred  ;  it  by  the  side  of  Tie  is  simply  the 


GRADATION  67 

Old  English  weak  form  which  supplanted  the  strong  form 
hit,  because  the  neuter  pronoun  seldom  required  to  be 
emphasized,  and  so  the  strong  form  fell  out  of  use.  Weak 
h  is  often  dropped  in  the  second  element  of  compounds, 
as  in  household,  Birmingham,  and  other  names  in  -ham, 
where,  however,  the  h  has  often  corrupted  the  pronun- 
ciation, as  in  Leivisham  luifam,  Eltham  elj>am. 

206.  The  d  of  and  is  generally  dropped  before   conso- 
nants, especially  hard  consonants,  as  in  noiv  and  (an)  then, 
better  and  letter,  the  vowel  being  often  dropped  as  well, 
especially  in  familiar  combination  such  as  bread  and  butter, 
the  nasal  being  often  assimilated  in  place  to  the  preceding 
consonant,  as  in  cup  and  (m)  saucer,  Jcnife  and  fork  with 
lip-teeth  m. 

207.  Other  consonant-droppings  occur  in  careless  speech. 
Thus  av  of  often  becomes  a  before  consonants,  the  word 
being,  indeed,  written  o  in  o'clock,  and  some  other  tradi- 
tional phrases,  showing  that  this,  like  many  other  weak 
forms,  is  not  a  mere  modern  vulgarism.     Weak  must  and 
St.  =  Saint   generally   drop   their   final    consonants   before 
another  consonant,  as  in  ai  mas  gou,  sn  dgonz  wud. 

208.  The   careless,   almost  vulgar  am  for  $em  them  is 
probably  a  weakening  not  of  this  form,  but  of  the  Middle 
English  Jiem  '  them '. 

209.  The  dropping  of  weak  w  in  the  second  element  of 
compounds  and  word-groups,  which  was  carried  out  consis- 
tently in  the  seventeenth  centuiy,  survives  only  in  such 
verb-forms  as  he'd,  he'll,  for  he  had,  he  would,  he  will,  and  in 
isolated  words  such  as  Greenwich   grinidg,    towards  todz, 
which    latter  is    now   being   supplanted   by   the   artificial 
tawodz. 

210.  Those  to  whom  the  pronunciation  of  wh  as  a  breath 
consonant   is   natural    generally  make  it  into  w  wherever 
weak  h  is  liable  to  be  dropped. 

211.  The  substitution   of  J6a,  j6az   your,  yours  for  the 

E2 


68        PHONETIC   STKUCTURE  OF  ENGLISH 

older  emphatic  forms  jua,  juaz  is  partly  the  result  of  the 
tendency  to  broaden  strong  as  well  as  weak  u  before  a 
and  r.  They  are  the  only  words  which  have  weak  vowels 
in  strong-  as  well  as  weak-stressed  syllables.  The  forms  joa, 
jo,  joz  with  the  full  low-back-narrow  vowel  also  occur. 

212.  Strong  forms,  on  the  contrary,  often  occur  unstressed. 
Thus  tSset  may  have  as  weak  stress  as  Sat,  as  in  ai  nou 
•fleet  I  know  that. 

213.  Such  pairs  as  Sset  and  Sat  are  examples  of  '  stress- 
doublets '.     tSar  and  Sea,  as  in  5az  nouwen  5ea  there  is 
no  one  there,  are  a  further  example  of  how  doublets  may 
develop   into   distinct   words  whose   meanings   and  gram- 
matical functions  have  nothing  in  common. 

214.  The  weak  forms  of  verbs  and  prepositions  with  a 
or  a  dropped  vowel  occur  only  when  they  are  followed  with- 
out a  pause  by  the  word  they  modify  or  belong  to  ;  if  they 
come  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  they  assume  the  medium  or 
unstressed  strong  form  ;  before  a  parenthetic  insertion  they 
take  strong  stress  as  well :   hlj  z  hia,  ai  nou  ij  :iz  he  is 
here,  I  know  he  is,  ai  kan  duw  It,  at  lijst  ai  ;J>irjk  ai  :ksen 
I  can  do  it,  at  least  I  think  I  can,  whot  a  ju.  J>irjkirj  6v 
compared  with  ai  }>ot  av  it  I  thought  of  it,  hlj  iz,  :if  ai 
:mei  bi  eland  ta  sei  sdu,  misteikn  he  is,  if  I  may  be  allowed 
to  say  so,  mistaken. 

215.  There  is  also  a  tendency  to  substitute  the  strong  for 
the  weak  form  when  the  latter  is  followed  by  another  weak 
form,  as  when  a  preposition  is  followed  by  an  unemphatic 
pronoun.      Thus  although  we  say  ai  }>ot  av  it  with  two 
consecutive  weak  forms,  we  generally  avoid  such  a  colloca- 
tion as  ai  v  ktjrn  far  it :  we   say  rather  ai  v  kern  f6r  It, 
although  of  course  f6r  is  here  only  a  '  half-strong  '  form  as 
compared  with  for.     In  such  combinations  the  preposition 
often  takes  not  only  the  full  strong  form  but  also  medium 
or  strong  stress,  as  in  it  s  a  maetar  av  indifrans  :tuw  mlj 
it  is  a  matter  of  indifference  to  me. 


GKADATION  69 

216.  Of  course  any  weak  word  can  assume  the  strong 
form  if  it  is  emphasized  or  followed  by  a  pause.  Even  such 
words  as  and  and  the  can  thus  be  made  into  send  and  tSij. 
Many  speakers  habitually  use  stressless,  unemphatic  send 
in  slow  speech  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  who  would 
never  introduce  it  into  such  groups  as  here  and  there. 


THE   SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH 

WE  will  now  enumerate  the  sounds  of  standard,  that  is, 
educated,  undialectal  English,  without,  of  course,  attempt- 
ing to  fix  an  absolutely  rigid  norm. 

217.  The  vowels  are  as  follows : — 

B.  Outer  mid-back-narrow  [ai-],  mid-out-back-wide  [CP], 
both  of  which  are  also  written  more  conveniently  a 
whenever  there  is  no  fear  of  confusion  with  the  short  of 
the  aa  in  father:  up,  tvorry,  unjust,  rough,  flood.  Of  the 
two  pronunciations  of  this  vowel,  the  former  is  the  older 
and  the  more  widely  spread,  so  that  it  has  every  claim  to  be 
regarded  as  the  standard  one ;  but  the  two  are  so  alike  that 
it  is  difficult  even  for  a  trained  ear  always  to  discriminate 
them  with  certainty.  Some  speakers  certainly  use  the 
two  indifferently.  But  they  always  preserve  strictly  the 
narrowness  of  the  one  and  the  wideness  of  the  other.  If 
the  former  is  widened,  it  gives  a  thin  sound,  as  distinct 
from  aa  as  it  is  from  « ;  and  the  narrow  [as]  is 
an  equally  un-English  sound— using  English  in  the  sense 
of  Standard  English.  B  in  medium-stressed  syllables,  as 
in  the  second  of  humbug  and  the  first  of  ulterior,  is  not 
perceptibly  modified ;  when  fully  unstressed,  as  in  pugna- 
cious and  the  second  syllable  of  hubbub,  it  often  becomes 
indistinguishable  from  3. 

aa.  Mid-back-wide  +  mid-mixed-wide  [ae]  :  baa,  fast,  half, 
bar,  barred,  bard,  starry,  clerk,  lieart.  The  after-glide  would, 
of  course,  be  suppressed  in  singing ;  nor  is  it  universal  even 
in  Southern  English.  Weak  aa  is  almost  short  in  such 
words  as  aha,  sarcastic. 


THE   SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH      71 

ai.  Mid-out-back-wide  +  lowered  high-front-wide  [aat-r] : 
eye,  try,  buy,  mile,  sign,  sighed,  height,  aisle.  When  weak  it 
becomes  ai  with  [e]  as  its  first  element:  idea,  graphite. 
In  the  triphthong  aia  the  i  is  often  further  lowered  and 
retracted :  fire,  lyre,  crier,  higher,  wiry,  fiery.  In  the  weak 
aia  the  second  a  becomes  almost  inaudible :  irate,  ironical. 

au.  Low -mixed-wide  +  mid-mixed-wide-round  [ad] :  now, 
house,  howl,  doubt.  Weak  au:  however,  compound,  adj. 
aua  :  hour,  flour,  flower,  flowery,  allowance,  coward. 

a.  Mid-mixed-wide  [e]  a  little  lowered :  upon,  adversity 
suppose,  concern,  sofa,  better,  asylum  asailam,  cupboard 
k/ebad,  harmony,  Saturday  ssetadi.  In  rapid  speech  this 
vowel  often  becomes  a  mere  murmur  or  voice-glide  without 
any  definite  configuration. 

aa.  Low-mixed-narrow  [a»] :  err,  sir,  furry,  burn,  earth, 
hurt,  word.  Shortened  when  weak :  perverted,  fertility, 
adverse,  proverb.  In  rapid  speech  weak  aa  is  liable  to  be 
shortened,  raised,  and  widened  in  various  degrees,  till  at 
last  it  is  merged  into  a. 

i.  High-front-wide  [i],  generally  lowered  more  or  less, 
and  often  slightly  retracted  as  well :  ill,  irritate,  hymn,  sieve, 
busy,  guilt.  There  is  a  tendency  to  retract  i  into  the  inner 
or  in  position  after  r  preceded  by  another  consonant 
(§  103).  Weak  i  is  lowered  and  retracted ;  those  who 
lower  the  strong  i,  lower  i  still  more:  efficient,  deception, 
invent,  embody,  pity,  many,  merit,  women,  village,  miniature 
minltja,  Israel  izrial.  In  rapid  speech  i  is  liable  to  be 
confounded  with  a  in  certain  collocations ;  but  a  constant 
substitution  of  a  for  1  in  such  words  as  it,  village  is 
Irish. 

ii.  High-front-wide  +  the  same  raised  [MX],  which  may 
be  expressed  by  ij :  see,  sea,  mean,  grief,  fatigue,  people. 
Although  the  pure  monophthongic  narrow  [i*]  pronuncia- 
tion of  this  vowel  is  not  the  usual  one  in  the  South  of 
England,  it  does  not  sound  dialectal,  but  rather  refined 


72      THE  SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH 

by  contrast  with  the  broader  vulgar  pronunciation  which 
makes  lady  into  lydy,  and  see  almost  into  say.  Pretonic 
weak  ii  is  somewhat  shortened  in  such  words  as  equality, 
precede,  create,  while  in  other  words  it  generally  becomes  1, 
as  in  eternity,  reality,  siesta.  In  ia  the  first  element  is 
always  wide,  and  generally  lowered — still  more  in  the  weak 
la :  here,  hear,  cheer,  idea,  weary,  real,  theatre,  weird,  museum ; 
hereafter. 

e.  Mid-front-wide  [e],  also  low-front-narrow  [se],  which 
when  slightly  raised  is  very  similar  in  sound :  any,  ate, 
head,  says,  ten,  bury,  berry,  friend.  Weak  e  is  raised 
a  little :  insect,  stipend,  pestiferous.  Pretonic  weak  e  often 
becomes  I,  and  sometimes  disappears  almost  entirely : 
severity,  cessation,  mendacity. 

ei.  Mid-front-wide  +  lowered  high-front-wide  [ei-*] :  eh, 
say,  veil,  name,  break,  straight.  The  first  element  is  narrow 
in  the  North  of  England.  But  this  pronunciation  is  not 
felt  to  be  dialectal :  the  essential  feature  of  the  sound  is 
that  it  is  always  diphthongic,  although  the  rise  of  the  tongue 
is  often  very  slight,  especially  in  weak  ei:  railway,  name- 
sake, chaotic,  eia,  as  in  layer,  gayer,  players,  is  apt  to 
become  ea  in  careless  speech,  especially  when  weak,  as  in 
bricklayer  (§  194). 

ea.  Low-front-narrow  +  mid-mixed-wide  [see] :  air,  fair, 
fare,  bear,  mayor,  scarce,  Baird.  When  weak  the  first 
element  is  slightly  raised  :  therein,  somewhere,  bricklayer. 

Low-front-wide  [ce]  a  little  retracted:  add,  axe,  carry, 
man,  thresh,  plait.  Weak  88  is  a  little  raised:  alpaca, 
abstract,  adj. 

u.  Outer  high-back-wide-round  [MI-]  :  fuU,  put,  hook, 
woman,  could.  Weak  u  is  sometimes  kept  unchanged, 
sometimes  advanced  into  the  out  position  [MO],  Broad  Komic 
u :  hurrah,  influential,  into  (before  a  vowel,  §  199).  ii  is 
liable  to  further  weakening  into  a,  as  in  instrument,  and  to 
be  absorbed  by  an  adjoining  1,  as  in  fulfil,  useful  flfll,  juusfl. 


THE  SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD   ENGLISH      73 

uu.  Outer  high-back-wide-round  +  the  same  vowel  over- 
rounded  [w-wo],  which  is  practically  equivalent  to  uw : 
two,  pool,  truth,  group,  fruit,  juu  is  felt  as  a  simple  vowel: 
yew,  youth,  unit,  Tuesday,  suit,  tube.  What  has  been  said  of 
the  monophthongic  narrow  pronunciation  of  ii  applies  also 
to  this  vowel ;  intermediate  pronunciations  with  the  first 
element  half  narrow  and  almost  imperceptible  over-rounding 
of  the  second  may  be  heard  in  Southern  English.  The  less 
stress  uu  has,  the  more  its  first  element  is  moved  forward  in 
the  mouth,  and  the  less  distinct  the  second  element  becomes, 
as  in  judicious,  unite,  absolute,  till  at  last  nothing  is  left  but 
u,  as  in  value,  virtue,  educate,  or  a,  as  in  regular,  the  a 
being  dropped  before  another  a,  as  in  valuable  veeljabl. 

ua.  Outer  high-back-wide-round  -f  mid-mixed-wide  [we'] : 
poor,  sure,  tourist,  gourd ;  ewer,  pure,  during,  dual.  Weak 
ua  tends  to  became  ua,  and  to  drop  the  a  as  in  gradual, 
duration,  the  ii  being  sometimes  further  weakened  into  a, 
as  in  penury,  ua,  ua  lower  their  first  element  towards  the 
mid  position  in  some  pronunciations. 

o.  Low-back-wide-round  [o] :  honour,  not,  salt,  quarrel, 
laurel,  knowledge.  Weak  6  is  the  corresponding  out  vowel 
[33] :  October,  prosperity. 

o.  Low-back-narrow-round  +  mid-mixed-wide-round  [oo] : 
awe,  saw,  all,  story,  pause,  cough,  broad ;  order,  court,  warm. 
Weak  o  is  somewhat  shortened  and  advanced  towards 
the  out  position :  already,  authentic,  portentous,  importation, 
landau,  oa :  boa,  bore,  oar,  more,  door,  four.  Weak  oa 
undergoes  the  same  changes  as  weak  o,  the  a  often 
becoming  almost  inaudible :  foresee,  therefore. 

ou.  Outer  mid-back-wide-round  +  the  same  with  high 
rounding  [oi-oi-)] :  oh,  no,  oak,  soul,  growth.  The  first 
element  is  narrow  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  North  of 
England — a  pronunciation  which  is  not  felt  to  be  dialectal, 
and,  indeed,  mostly  passes  unheeded.  The  close  monoph- 
thongal  [o*]  is  distinctly  dialectal  or  foreign.  The  weak 


74      THE   SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH 

6u  advances  the  first  element  to  the  out  position,  and 
makes  the  second  almost  or  quite  inaudible:  coincide, 
poetical,  heroine,  heroes,  solo,  follow.  6u  is  often  substituted 
for  strong  on ;  to  those  who  have  not  this  pronuncia- 
tion it  sounds  affected  and  effeminate,  erne:  lower.  6ua: 
follower. 

oi.  Outer  mid-back-wide-round  +  lowered  high-front-wide 
[(MT]  :  ~boy,  oil,  coin,  hoist.  In  some  pronunciations  the  first 
element  is  lowered  almost  to  [o*].  In  weak  6i  the  first 
element  is  advanced  to  the  out  position  :  envoy,  turmoil. 
oia :  employer,  joyous. 

218.  The  following  are  the  consonants  of  Standard 
English  : — 

h.  Aspirate  or  breath-glide  (§  169) :  hard,  he,  who,  upliold, 
aha',  behold,  abhor. 

k.  Back-stop :  call,  cart,  cat,  kill,  quell,  axe,  ache. 

g.  Back-stop-voice :  garden,  gall,  log,  gig,  egg,  anger. 

T).  Back-nasal-voice :  singing,  sink,  tongue,  longer. 

j.  Front-open-voice:  yes,  union,  hallelujah,  vignette.  hj,as 
in  hue,  human,  becomes  q  in  Northern  English. 

t.  Point-stop,  nearly  blade-stop,  which  applies  also  to  the 
three  next :  ten,  tight,  too,  enter,  art,  hit.  t>  in  eighth,  tj  in 
tune. 

d.  Point-stop-voice :  do,  did,  add,  under,  width  d>,  due  dj. 

n.  Point-nasal-voice :  no,  knee,  own,  hand,  ninth  m-,  India 

*j> 

1.  Point-divided-voice:  little,  all,  hill,  field,  wealth  1>, 
value  Ij. 

r.  Inner-point-open-voice :  ray,  row,  rhetoric,  rearing,  very. 
It  is  a  defect  to  trill  r,  although  this  is  sometimes  done  in 
recitation. 

Jj.  Point-teeth :  thin,  thought,  throw,  tJnvart,  ether,  earth. 

6.  Point-teeth-voice :  then,  thither,  with,  soothe. 

s.  Blade-open  :  so,  cease,  scene,  psalm,  hiss,  quartz. 

z.  Blade-open-voice :  zeal,  easy,  scissors,  cleanse,  puzzle. 


THE  SOUNDS  OF  STANDARD  ENGLISH      75 

J.  Blade-point-open  :  she,  shred,  mission,  ocean,  nation,  fish. 
Less  retracted  in  tj,  nf,  If:  church,  fetch,  question,  culture; 
branch,  mention ;  Welsh,  convulsion. 

5.  Blade-point-voice :  measure,  seizure,  rouge.  Less  re- 
tracted in  dg,  lg :  judge,  large,  soldier. 

p.  Lip-stop :  peep,  happy,  stop,  lamp. 

b.  Lip-stop-voice :  bee,  baby,  ebb,  amber. 

m.  Lip-nasal-voice :  may,  lamb,  calm,  timber.  Lip-teeth- 
nasal-voice  :  nymph,  Banff. 

wh.  Lip-back-open  :  why,  when,  which. 

w.  Lip-back-open-voice :  we,  witch,  one,  square.  Weak  w 
has  diminished  rounding  (§  114):  forward,  northward, 
headway. 

f.  Lip-teeth-open  :  few,  fife,  phrase,  rough,  left. 

v.  Lip-teeth-voice  :  view,  vivid,  five,  valve. 


STYLES    OF    PRONUNCIATION: 
PHONETICS  AND  ELOCUTION 

219.  Phonetics  in  a  wider  sense  is  something  more  than 
the  science  of  speech-sounds  and  the  art  of  pronunciation. 
It   includes   also   voice-production  ;    which,   again,    is  the 
foundation  of  elocution  and  singing.     These  two  latter  sub- 
jects  are,    however,    only  partially  comprised   under  the 
science  of  speech-sounds — even  in  its  widest  meaning  :  they 
stand  to  it  much  in  the  same  relation  as  the  practical  study 
of  languages  does.     And  although  voice-production  is  really 
a  part  of  the  science  of  speech-sounds,  it  is  most  convenient 
to  separate  it  from  phonetics,  and  make  a  special  study  of 
it  in  conjunction  with  the  other  two,  of  which  it  is  the 
foundation. 

220.  The  essential  difference  between  phonetics  in  the 
narrower  sense  of  the  word  and  voice-production  is  that  the 
former  aims  only  at  correctness  of  pronunciation,  while  the 
latter  is  concerned  mainly  with  the  quality  of  the  voice. 
Two  natives  may  speak  their  own  language  with  an  equally 
correct  pronunciation,  but  the  voice-production  and  elocution 
of  the  one  may  be  better  than  that  of  the  other ;  and  a 
foreigner  or  provincial  speaker  who  is  unable  to  pronounce 
correctly  may  be  a  still  better  elocutionist :  his  voice  may 
carry  further  and  with  less  effort,  its  tone  may  be  clearer, 
and  more  resonant  and  harmonious. 

221.  These  qualities  of  the  voice — which  are  even  more 
important  in  song  than  in  speech — depend  mainly  on  the 
way  in  which  the  vocal  chords  are  made  to  vibrate.     This 
again  depends  on  the  voice-register  which  is  employed  :  in 


PHONETICS  AND  ELOCUTION  77 

the  lower  of  these,  the  '  thick '  or  chest  register,  there  is 
more  vibration  than  in  the  higher,  the  'thin'  or  head 
register,  which  in  men's  voices  is  called  'falsetto'.  The 
voice-trainer,  whether  in  speech  or  song,  has  further  to  take 
into  account  the  natural  differences  between  the  voices  of 
men  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  higher-pitched  voices  of 
women  and  children  on  the  other,  together  with  the  classi- 
fication of  the  different  voices  according  to  their  natural 
height  and  compass  as  bass  (contralto),  baritone  (mezzo- 
soprano),  tenor  (soprano),  and  the  subdivisions  of  these. 
All  this  does  not  directly  concern  the  phonetician  :  to  him 
a  given  vowel  remains  the  same  whether  it  is  uttered  by 
a  man  or  a  woman,  whether  it  is  produced  with  good  or 
bad  tone. 

222.  In  one  respect,  however,  phonetics  really  works  hand 
in  hand  with  elocution,  and  that  is  in  developing  distinct- 
ness of  articulation.     It  is  not  necessary  that  the  teacher  of 
phonetics  should  insist  specially  on  this  point :  the  know- 
ledge of  the  organic  movements,  and  the  conscious  practice 
of  them  naturally  tends  to  give  them  greater  strength  and 
decision.     No  practical  phonetician,  however  bad  the  quality 
of  his  voice-tones  may  be,  ever  articulates  his  consonants  in 
a  slovenly  and  indistinct  manner.    Distinctness  of  pronuncia- 
tion is  thus  the  common  property  of  phonetics  and  elocution. 

223.  Correctness  of  pronunciation,  on  the  other  hand,  is, 
as  we  have  seen,  a  specially  phonetic,  not  an  elocutionary 
question.     And  yet  there  is  none  on  which  elocutionists  are 
more  ready  to  dogmatize  than  on  this.     Most  of  them  attach 
as  much— or  even  more — importance   to   correcting  what 
they  assume  to  be  defects  of  pronunciation  in  their  pupils  as 
to  improving  their  voice-production. 

224.  They  are  seldom  content  with  attacking  vulgarisms 
and  provincialisms  ;  they  make  war  on  principle  on  all  col- 
loquialisms, although,  of  course,  they  find  it  impossible  to 
get  rid  of  them  in  practice.     They  ignore  gradation  and  the 


78  STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION 

obscuration  of  unstressed  vowels  ;  the  general  result  of 
which  is  that  the  pupil  is  forced  to  acquire  an  artificial  elo- 
cutionary language  distinct  from  that  of  everyday  life.  His 
elocution  suffers  from  this  in  many  ways.  The  constant 
effort  to  avoid  falling  back  into  natural  habits  of  speech 
robs  his  delivery  of  all  freshness  and  freedom,  the  very 
muscles  of  his  throat  partake  of  the  general  rigidity,  and  the 
purity  of  his  tone  is  impaired.  Even  when  the  artificial 
habits  by  long  practice  become  a  second  nature,  the  result 
is  always  unpleasing,  because  it  is  artificial  and  unnatural. 

225.  It  has  often  been  argued  that  by  giving  an  artificial 
distinctness  to  weak  sounds,  as  in  the  orthographic  pronunci- 
ation of  our  dictionaries,  we  make  the  words  more  distinct. 
It  is  of  course  true  that  in  themselves  such  words  as  send, 
tuw,  foa  are  more  sonorous,  and  in  so  far  more  distinct, 
than  n,  ta,  fa,  but  it  does  not  necessarily  follow  that  the 
context  is  made  more  intelligible  by  substituting  an  unex- 
pected strong  form  for  the  natural  weak  one.     In  fact,  the 
contrary  is  so  much  the  case  that  misunderstanding  may 
arise  from  such  substitutions.     Thus  in  the  sentence  I  shall 
be  at  home  from  one  to  three  the  substitution  of  tuw  for  ta 
at  once  suggests  a  confusion  between  the  preposition  and 
the  numeral.      So  also  by  making  stmdi  into  sundei  we 
only  incur  the  risk  of  being  understood  to  say  that  we  will 
come  some  day  instead  of  on  Sunday.     The  truth  is  that  we 
cannot   make   words    more   distinct    by  disguising    them. 
Another  disadvantage  of  this  artificial  pronunciation  is  that 
it  often  gives  a  false  or  exaggerated  emphasis,  as  in  bred 
send  bata,  which  seems  to  imply  '  bring  me  bread,  and 
don't  forget  the  butter  ! ' 

226.  Another  argument  sometimes  adduced  in  favour  of 
artificialities  of  pronunciation  is  that  they  improve  the  lan- 
guage by  making  it  more  sonorous  or  more  harmonious. 
There  is  no  doubt  something  in  this.     Where  the  standard 
dialect  admits  a  variety  of  pronunciations,  it  is  not  only 


PHONETICS   AND   ELOCUTION  79 

allowable  but  desirable  to  select  that  one  which  is  prefer- 
able either  in  itself  or  through  its  associations.  Thus  in 
singing,  no  one  would  hesitate  in  preferring  monophthongic 
ii  and  uu  to  ij  and  uw,  and  reducing  the  diphthongiza- 
tion  of  ei  and  ou  to  a  minimum,  and  in  preferring  the 
narrow  to  the  wide  pronunciation  of  their  first  elements  ; 
and  the  same  applies  also,  though  less  stringently,  in  the 
case  of  elocution.  And  then  we  can  go  a  step  further,  and 
restore  an  extinct,  or  introduce  a  dialectal  pronunciation,  as 
when  the  Germans  insist  on  the  point-trill  r  instead  of  the 
back  sound,  which  is  now  universal  in  educated  German 
speech.  The  German  elocutionists  follow  the  singers  in 
theory,  but  not  always  in  practice  ;  in  fact,  the  point-r  is 
intolerable  in  any  German  declamation  which  is  at  all  collo- 
quial in  subject.  The  difficulty  with  this  is  to  know  where 
to  stop.  If  the  elocutionists  followed  the  singers  in  substi- 
tuting the  Italian  a  for  se,  why  not  go  a  step  further,  and 
get  rid  of  the  still  uglier  vowel  in  come  by  returning  to  the 
older  pronunciation  and  restoring  the  full  u  ?  If  this  kind 
of  thing  were  carried  out  consistently,  the  result  would  be 
a  language  which  in  many  respects  would  be  better  than 
the  existing  English — but  it  would  no  longer  be  English ; 
it  would  hardly  be  intelligible.  And  even  if  the  changes 
stopped  far  short  of  this,  they  would  still  give  the  impression 
of  unreality  and  insincerity  which  always  accompanies  arti- 
ficiality. 

227.  But  we  must  not  go  to  the  other  extreme  of  insisting 
on  the  retention  of  the  colloquial  pronunciation  in  all  elo- 
cution without  regard  to  differences  of  subject  and  style. 
It  is  not  only  in  poetry  that  the  retention  of  the  shortened 
forms  of  colloquial  speech  is  often  impossible  ;  these  forms 
would  often  produce  an  equally  jarring,  incongruous,  or 
even  ludicrous  effect  in  elevated  prose,  free  as  it  is  from  the 
constraint  of  metre.  Foreigners  who  begin  with  going  to 
the  other  extreme  of  saying  it  iz  ei  fain  del  tuwdei  when 


80  STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION 

they  have  once  practically  mastered  the  principles  of  grada- 
tion, and  have  learnt  to  obscure  the  weak  vowels  in  a  more 
or  less  natural  manner,  often  make  their  pronunciation  still 
more  .uncouth  than  before  when  they  stand  up  to  deliver 
a  formal  address — perhaps  even  to  preach  a  sermon  ! — full 
of  ain'ts  and  shan'ts.  Some  of  them  at  least  become  more 
colloquial  than  the  natives,  and  invent  weak  forms  of 
their  own. 

Thus  I  knew  one  who  pronounced  Norwegian  knapsack  as 
nawiidgan  naepsak. 

228.  But  nothing  can  shake  the  fundamental  principle 
that  all  elocution,  however  far  removed  it  may  be  from 
the  language  of  ordinary  life,  must  be  based  ultimately 
on  it. 

220.  It  is  not,  strictly  speaking,  the  business  of  the  elo- 
cutionist to  teach  this  pronunciation,  although  he  must 
insist  on  his  pupils  possessing  the  natural  pronunciation  of 
the  standard  dialect  as  the  indispensable  preliminary  to 
systematic  study.  It  is  not  enough  that  they  should  be 
able  to  speak  it  as  a  foreign  language  side  by  side  with  their 
native  dialect :  it  must  supersede  and  supplant  the  latter 
so  completely  that  the  standard  form  of  colloquial  speech 
becomes  habitual  to  them  in  everyday  conversation,  so  that 
they  speak  it  without  effort  and  without  thought.  The  only 
way  to  attain  this  is  to  study  phonetics  under  a  competent 
teacher  who  himself  speaks  the  standard  dialect,  to  fix  the 
sounds  permanently  and  accurately  in  the  memory  by 
extensive  reading  of  phonetic  texts,  and  then  to  make  it  all 
into  a  second  nature  by  constant  intercourse  with  educated 
undialectal  speakers. 

230.  Of  course,  as  already  remarked,  a  dialectal  speaker 
may  be  as  good  an  elocutionist  as  one  who  speaks  the  stan- 
dard language ;  but  only  in  his  (the  dialectal  speaker's)  own 
dialect :  for  no  one  can  speak  two  dialects  with  equal  ease 


PHONETICS  AND  ELOCUTION  81 

and  naturalness ;  and  the  more  alike  the  two  dialects  are, 
the  more  difficult  it  is  to  keep  them  apart.  He  must  there- 
fore choose  his  dialect  and  stick  to  it.  The  choice  will 
generally  depend  on  the  outward  circumstances  of  his  life. 
Thus  a  Scotchman  or  Irishman  settling  permanently  in 
London  as  a  lecturer  or  preacher  will  naturally  try  to  get 
completely  rid  of  his  native  dialect,  not  because  he  thinks  it 
inferior  in  itself  to  the  standard  dialect,  but  simply  because 
it  is  out  of  place,  and  cannot  be  kept  up  in  its  original 
purity  if  exposed  constantly  to  the  influence  of  another 
dialect. 

231.  Such  a  one  will,  if  he  acquires  a  perfectly  easy  and 
accurate  command  of  the  standard  colloquial  dialect,  be  at 
an  advantage  compared  with  the  native  speakers  of  the  latter 
in  that  he  necessarily  speaks  it  in  a  somewhat  idealized 
form  :  a  little  more  carefully,  and  with  completer  freedom 
from  local  colouring  and  vulgarisms. 

This,  then,  is  the  foundation. 

232.  The  next  principle  is,  not  to  depart  from  this  easy, 
natural  pronunciation,  except  where  there  is  a  special  reason 
for  so  doing. 

233.  If  we  distinguish  generally  between  a  lower  and 
a  higher  style  of  pronunciation,  the    latter   characterized 
mainly  by  a  more  frequent  use  of  full,  strong,  sounds  and 
forms,    the   question  now  is  to   determine  the  conditions 
which  make  the  latter  necessary. 

The  most  definite  requirements  are  those  of  poetic  form. 

234.  In   the   first  place,  we   must  in  every  case  adopt 
a  pronunciation  which  will  preserve  the   syllables  intact : 
even  in  the  most  colloquial  verse  we  must  occasionally  sub- 
stitute it  iz  for  it  s,  even  at  the  risk  of  marring  the  collo- 
quial effect ;  the  responsibility  for  this  falls  on  the  poet,  not 
on  the  reciter. 

235.  Eime  need   not.   and,  indeed,   cannot  be  taken  so 
seriously  as  metre.     No  one  would  think  of  attempting  to 

SWEET    SE  v 


82  STYLES   OF   PKONUNCIATION 

make  such  '  printer's  rimes '  as  lev,  grouv,  pruuv — which 
are,  however,  for  the  most  part  really  traditional  rimes — 
into  real  rimes ;  while  every  one,  on  the  other  hand, 
would  as  unhesitatingly  substitute  any  pronunciation  that 
actually  exists,  however  unfamiliar  it  may  be  to  him,  in 
order  to  make  a  perfect  rime,  or  even  only  a  nearer 
approximation  to  it,  unless,  of  course,  it  calls  forth  ludicrous 
or  otherwise  objectionable  associations  ;  in  which  case  he 
would  not  hesitate  to  leave  the  rime  imperfect.  With 
such  rimes  as  wind — find,  it  is  usual  to  employ  the  obsolete 
pronunciation  waind ;  but  it  would  be  quite  legitimate, 
and  to  many  ears  it  would  have  a  more  natural  and 
better  effect  to  leave  the  rime  imperfect  by  keeping 
the  present  pronunciation.  To  pronounce  waind  every- 
where in  poetry  and  poetical  prose  is  an  unpleasant  affecta- 
tion, which  must  be  condemned  on  the  general  principle 
of  avoiding  all  unnecessary  alterations  of  colloquial  pro- 
nunciation. So  also  with  hover — cover. 

236.  The  question,  how  far  the  metre  ought  to  be  brought 
out  at  the  expense  of  sense  and  expression  is  a  more  diffi- 
cult one. 

The  initial  difficulty  here  is  that  no  one  knows  what 
English  metre  is.  Many  think  they  know ;  but,  unfortu- 
nately, no  one  else  shares  that  belief :  there  is  no  generally 
accepted  theory  of  English  verse.  It  is  not  only  that 
theorists  of  different  schools  disagree.  Even  those  who  are 
agreed,  for  instance,  that  English  verse  is  quantitative  and 
capable  of  being  expressed,  like  music,  in  terms  of  bar  and 
crotchet,  seldom  agree  in  the  details  of  their  analysis.  And 
it  is  not  a  mere  question  of  theory :  there  is  no  agreement 
as  to  the  facts  themselves. 

237.  This  is  the  real  difference  between  the  metres  of 
English   and   those   of    the   classical   languages.      English 
metre  is  as  much  founded  on  stress  (ictus)  and  quantity 
(length  of  vowels  and  syllables)  as  that  of  Greek  and  Latin. 


PHONETICS  AND  ELOCUTION  83 

But  while  in  these  the  language  itself  supplies — with  very 
few  exceptions — a  definite  and  undisputable  succession  of 
longs  and  shorts,  this  is  not  the  case  in  such  a  language  as 
English,  as  any  one  may  soon  find  out  by  trying  to  construct 
verses  in  strict  accordance  with  the  rules  of  classical  prosody. 
Not  that  the  natural  quantities  of  the  language  are  without 
influence  on  the  character  of  English  verse ;  but  the  ignoring 
of  them,  although  it  may  make  the  verse  less  harmonious 
and  pleasant  to  the  ear,  does  not  definitely  destroy  its  struc- 
ture :  there  are  in  English  no  words  the  quantity  of  whose 
syllables  makes  it  impossible  to  use  them  in  certain  metres, 
as  is  the  case  in  the  '  quantitative  '  metres  par  excellence  of 
Greek  and  Latin,  and,  up  to  the  present  day,  of  Arabic  and 
Persian.  An  inevitable  result  of  the  strict  dependence  of 
verse-quantity  on  the  natural  quantities  of  the  language  in 
these  metres  is  that  the  natural  stresses  of  the  language 
have  to  be  sacrificed  to  the  verse-ictus,  the  result  being  what 
appears  to  us  an  intolerable  monotony  and  want  of  expres- 
sion. It  is  this  which  has  no  doubt  led  to  the  substitution 
of  the  stress  basis  in  all  modern  European  metres  :  the 
verse-ictus  follows  the  natural  stress — with  consequent  more 
or  less  complete  ignoring  of  the  natural  quantities — not 
only  in  English,  but  also  in  those  languages  which,  like 
Finnish  and  Hungarian,  would  lend  themselves  to  strictly 
quantitative  metres  as  well,  or  even  better,  than  Greek  and 
Arabic.  Again,  there  are  metrical  systems,  such  as  that  of 
Old  French,  in  which  the  natural  language  supplies  to  the 
metre  only  a  fixed  number  of  syllables  for  each  line,  the 
natural  stresses  as  well  as  the  natural  quantities  being 
completely  ignored  by  the  poet. 

238.  We  must  begin  therefore  with  realizing  that  English 
verse  has  no  definite  laws  of  form  consciously  followed  by 
its  makers.  If  it  has  laws  of  quantity,  they  are  so  vague 
that  no  one  has  yet  been  able  to  formulate  them  ;  even  the 
correspondence  between  ictus  and  stress  is  not  always 

F  2 


84  STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION 

observed ;  the  number  of  syllables,  though  more  restricted 
in  some  of  our  metres  than  in  others,  is  never  absolutely 
fixed  ;  even  our  rimes  are  not  always  perfect,  although  to 
the  child  and  the  rustic  verse  without  rime  is  not  verse 
at  all. 

239.  Hence  the  same  verse  may  often  be  read  in  a  variety 
of  ways — not  only  with  marked  differences  of  quantity,  but 
with  shiftings  of  stress  and  varying  number  of  syllables  ; 
and  each  of  these  readings  may  be  as  good  as  any  of  the 
others — except  from  the  point  of  view  of  some  metrical 
faddist,  who  may  be  directly  contradicted  by  another  of  his 
own  school. 

240.  This  vagueness  of  structure  is  not  a  mere  accident 
or  defect  of  modern  metres :   it  is  required  by  the  hearer 
and  deliberately  aimed  at  by  the  poet.     To  both  of  them 
the  continued  strict  repetition  of  such  a  metrical  scheme  as 
that  of  our  heroic  verse 


would  be  intolerable.  And  the  variations  in  quantity  and 
the  distribution  of  pauses  which  would  have  contented  a 
Greek  ear  would  still  leave  the  verse  too  monotonous  for 
a  modern  hearer.  The  modern  ear  demands  not  only 
variety,  but  irregularity — one  might  almost  say,  licence — 
within  certain  limits  ;  these  limits,  again,  being  as  vague 
and  subjective  as  everything  else  in  modern  metre.  And  yet 
the  ideally  regular  standard  is  always  present  in  the  back- 
ground of  our  consciousness :  the  poet  plays  round  it,  departs 
continually  from  it,  but  does  not  stray  beyond  a  certain 
distance,  and  every  now  and  then  he  emphasizes  his  freedom 
by  momentarily  submitting  to  the  yoke  of  strict  form. 

241.  It  follows  from  this  that  the  more  modern,  the  more 
advanced  the  poet  is,  the  freer  his  verse  will  be ;  and  the 
same  applies  to  its  interpretation  by  the  reader  or  reciter. 

In  the  naive  recitation — the  '  routine  scansion ' — of  chil- 


PHONETICS  AND   ELOCUTION  85 

dren  and  the  uneducated  everything  is  sacrificed  to  metrical 
regularity,  as  it  still  is  in  the  quantitative  verse  of  the  East, 
the  recitation  of  which  is,  as  has  been  already  observed, 
absolutely  devoid  of  expression.  Although  the  metres  of 
our  Chaucer  are  freer  than  this,  they  are  not  so  free  as  those 
of  Shakespeare  and  Modern  English  generally  ;  for  instance, 
Chaucer's  verse  shows  an  unmistakable  repugnance  to  irre- 
gularity in  the  number  of  syllables — in  which  it  no  doubt 
follows  French  verse — and  that  clash  of  strong  stresses 
which  brings  Modern  English  verse  a  step  nearer  to  prose, 
while  adding  greatly  to  its  power  of  expression. 

242.  The  tendencies  of  the  modern  elocutionist  are  in 
harmony  with  this  development.     Not  content  with  avoid- 
ing routine  scansion,  he  often  goes  out  of  his  way  to  make 
the  metrical  structure  irrecognizable — or,  at  least,  to  dis- 
guise it.     This  revolt  against  form  is  carried  to  an  extreme 
in  the  French  recitation  of  the  rimed  verse  of  their  seven- 
teenth-century tragedians,  in  which  the  metre  is  not  merely 
disguised,  but  absolutely  destroyed  by  the  omission  of  the 
'  mute  e ',  even  the  rimes  being  slurred  over  as  much  as 
possible. 

243.  This  is  all  wrong.     If  we  read  a  poet  in  the  original 
form,  and  not  in  a  translation  or  modernization,  we  are 
bound  to  carry  out  his  intentions :  if  he  arranges  his  words 
with  the  evident  object  of  producing  certain  effects  of  metre, 
such  as  rime  and  alliteration,  we  are  bound  to  read  his  verse 
in  such  a  way  that  his  trouble  shall  not  be  wasted. 

244.  The  first  thing,  therefore,  is  to  form  a  clear  idea  of 
the  intentions  of  the  poet.     If  he  writes  with  the  declared 
object  of  producing  something  between  verse  and  prose,  we 
must  either  read  accordingly,   or  let  him  alone.     If,  like 
a  Greek  poet,  he  constructs  his  verse  in  such  a  way  as  to  be 
unmeaning  without  the  interpretation  of  routine  scansion, 
and   a — to  us  intolerable — sacrifice  of  expression,  we  must 
gradually  train  our  dull  ears  to  recognize  the  infinite  variety 


86  STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION 

which  underlies  this  seeming  monotony.  With  our  own 
Chaucer  we  do  not  require  this  training  :  our  ears  recognize 
at  once  the  happy  medium  that  he  attains  between  the 
smooth  formality  of  the  ancients  and  the  licence  of  the 
modern  impressionist  verse-maker. 

245.  With  most  of  our  modern  poets  we  have  then  to 
recognize  that  they  are  at  least  resigned  to  hear  us  sub- 
ordinate form  to  expression,  metrical  to  rhetorical  stress  in 
declaiming  their  verse ;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  we  may 
be  sure  that  they  would  be  as  much  disappointed  if  they 
heard  us  deliberately  destroy  any  formal  effects  they  had 
taken  trouble  to  create,  as  Clementi  or  Mozart  would  be  if 
they  heard  a  modern  virtuoso  omit  any  of  the  trills  and 
other  ornaments  of  which  they  make  what  may  appear  to 
a  modern  ear  too  lavish  a  use. 

246.  The  first  principle  from  this  point  of  view  is  that 
form  should  be  indicated,  but,  as  a  general  rule,  as  unobtru- 
sively as  possible,  except  where  some  unexpected  effect  re- 
quires to  be  prominently  brought  out,  like  a  discord  in  music  ; 
which,  if  feebly  attacked,  becomes  unmeaning.     All  force, 
in  particular,  should  be  preserved  as  much  as  possible  for 
the  expression  of  logical  and  emotional  emphasis.     When 
the  metre  and  general  structure  of  the  poem  have  been 
clearly  brought  out  by  the  reciter  in  the  first  few  verses,  it 
is  often  allowable  to  cariy  the  repression  of  the  form  still 
further — to   approximate  the  verse   still  further  to   prose. 
The  extent  to  which  this  is  carried  depends  partly  on  the 
character  of  the  piece,  partly  on  the  temperament  and  taste 
of  the  reciter. 

247.  The  limits  of  the  concessions  made  to  sense  and 
expression  can  hardly  be  defined  more  definitely  than  by 
stating  the  general  principle :  keep  the  metre  if  you  can, 
and  if  you  know  what  it  is  ;  if  that  is  impossible,  keep  some 
metre.     In  other  woi'ds,  abstain  from  everything  that  jars 
on  the  ear,  unless  it  is  necessary  in  order  to  make  the  verse 


PHONETICS  AND   ELOCUTION  87 

intelligible  as  such.  The  end  of  the  line,  in  particular, 
should  always  be  clearly  indicated,  if  not  by  a  pause,  by 
a  more  or  less  marked  lengthening  of  the  final  syllable. 

248.  The  nature  of  English  verse  makes  hesitation  and 
compromise   inevitable  in  its  recitation.      Even  the  most 
experienced  reader  can  hardly  avoid  an  occasional  stumble 
with  such  artificial  metres  as  those  of  Evangeline  and  Locks- 
ley  Hall :  he  simply  breaks  down  in  the  middle  of  the  line, 
and  has  to  make  a  fresh  start,  perhaps  only  to  break  down 
again. 

We  must  therefore  distinguish  between  cacophony  which 
is  the  fault  of  the  reciter — the  result  of  defective  inter- 
pretation on  his  part — and  that  which  is  the  fault  of  the 
poet,  and  for  which  the  reciter  is  not  responsible.  All 
that  the  latter  can  do  with  the  want  of  metre  in  such  a 
poem  as  TJie  Grammarian's  Funeral  is  to  smooth  it  over  as 
much  as  possible. 

We  now  have  to  consider  the  conditions,  apart  from 
poetical  form,  which  make  it  necessary  to  substitute  a 
higher  for  a  lower  style  of  pronunciation. 

249.  The  most  important  of  these  is  speed.      Even  in 
ordinary  conversation,  slow,  deliberate  speech  necessitates, 
or  at  any  rate  allows  of,  a  much  freer  use  of  strong  forms 
such  as  send  where   they  would  be  quite  out  of  place  in 
quick  speech. 

250.  But  it  is  not  generally  a  mere  question  of  speed. 
We  feel  also  that  weak  and  clipped  forms  are  often  incom- 
patible  with   the   gravity   and    dignity   with   which   slow 
speech  is  naturally  associated.     Even  in  the  most  elevated 
poetry  we  may  constantly  drop  the  weak  h,  in  such  words  as 
Ms  and  Mm,  and  then  we  may  come  to  a  passage  where  there 
is  no  emphasis,  ictus,  or  pause — perhaps  not  even  a  slacken- 
ing of  speed — to  suggest  the  substitution  of  the  strong  form  ; 
and  yet  the  artistic  instinct  may  imperatively  demand  it. 
So  also  even  in  familiar  prose  such  forms  as  it's  and  can't 


88  STYLES  OF  PRONUNCIATION 

may  jar  on  our  ear  so  decidedly  that  we  must  perforce  sub- 
stitute the  full  forms,  even  when  they  sound  stilted  or  even 
positively  unnatural:  we  deliberately  prefer  this  extreme 
to  the  other  extreme  of  triviality  and  vulgarity. 

251.  Pauses,  which  are  naturally  associated  with  slow- 
ness and  solemnity,  also  bring  with  them  full,  strong  forms. 
The  good  elocutionist  is  always  sparing  in  the  use  of  pauses, 
so  as  to  be  able  to  introduce  them  with  all  the  more  effect 
when  really  required. 

252.  It  is  in  emphasis  and  sentence-stress,  as  well  as  in 
intonation,  that  the  importance  of  basing  elocutionary  on 
colloquial  usage  is  most  clearly  evident.      Whenever  the 
student  is  in  doubt  as  to  the  natural  expression  to  be  given 
to  some  high-flown  passage  in  purely  literary  language,  he 
should  paraphrase  it  into  the  nearest  colloquial  form,  no 
matter  how  homely  and  incongruous  it  may  seem,  and  then 
transfer  the  general  effect  to  the  passage  in  question.     In 
this  way  he  will  avoid  exaggeration  and  unreality  on  the 
one  hand,  monotony  and  mechanical  repetition  of  types  of 
expression  on  the  other. 

253.  But   even  here  we   cannot    always   afford   to  be 
perfectly  natural.     There  are  passages  both  in  prose  and 
poetry,  whose  length,  complexity  of  grammatical  structure, 
or  obscure,  archaic  diction — or  all  these  together — make  them 
unintelligible  to  the  ear  unaided  by  the  eye  if  spoken  on 
the  basis  of  normal  colloquial  synthesis.     If,  then,  an  exag- 
gerated, or  even  downright  false  emphasis  or  intonation — 
a  falling  tone  after  a  comma  to  detach,  a  rising  tone  after 
a  full  stop  to  connect — will  make  the  passage  intelligible, 
we  must  not  hesitate  to  employ  it ;  for  the  fault  here  is  not 
with  the  interpretation,  but  with  the  text  itself. 


TEXTS 

254.  The  phonetic  transcriptions  of  Modern  English 
texts  which  follow  are  given  only  as  specimens  of  a  natural 
as  opposed  to  an  artificially  normalized  pronunciation,  and 
are  not  intended  to  serve  as  a  rigorous  standard  of  correct 
speech — a  standard  which  in  our  present  state  of  knowledge 
it  would  be  impossible  to  set  up  ;  they  are  intended  rather 
to  serve  as  examples  of  the  facts  and  principles  already 
stated,  and  as  material  for  practice  in  the  use  of  a  phonetic 
notation. 


90  TEXTS 

Strong  Forms. 

255.  One,  two,  three,  four,  five,  six,  seven,  eight,  nine, 
ten,  eleven,  twelve.    First,  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth,  sixth, 
seventh,    eighth,    ninth,   tenth,    eleventh,    twelfth.      Two- 
thirds,    three-fourths,    four-fifths,    five-sixths,   six -sevenths, 
seven-eighths,  nine-tenths,  eleven-twelfths. 

January,  February,  March,  April,  May,  June,  July, 
August,  September,  October,  November,  December. 

Sunday,  Monday,  Tuesday,  Wednesday,  Thursday,  Friday, 
Saturday. 

Spring,  summer,  autumn,  winter.  North,  south,  east, 
west.  Years,  months,  weeks,  days,  hours,  minutes,  seconds. 

Weak  Forms. 

256.  I  intend  to  go  to  Ireland  at  the  end  of  the  year. 
What  is  that?    Where  does  it  come  from?     It  comes 

from  Germany.  What  is  it  made  of?  Is  it  made  of 
leather?  No,  it  is  made  of  cloth.  No,  it  is  not:  it  is  made 
of  paper !  I  tell  you,  it  is  not  made  of  paper ;  it  is  made 
of  cloth. 

When  I  got  there,  there  was  no  one  there. 

We  had  better  go  at  once  ;  there  is  no  time  to  lose.  Yes, 
I  think  we  had. 

Was  he  at  church  this  morning?  I  suppose  he  was, 
but  I  am  not  sure ;  I  did  not  see  him.  He  was  there  last 
Sunday. 

Where  is  it  ?  It  is  here ;  at  least  I  think  it  is.  Yes, 
here  it  is. 

I  hope  it  will  be  fine  to-morrow.  I  am  afraid  it  will  not : 
I  expect  the  weather  will  not  be  settled  for  some  time  yet. 

Shall  you  be  there  too?  I  hope  I  shall ;  but  I  am  afraid 
I  shall  not  have  time. 

We  have  had  to  have  the  house  painted.     It  has  not  been 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS  91 

stroi]  fomz. 

255.  wan,   tuw,  }>rij,   fo(o),  faiv,    siks,    sevn,   eit,   nain, 
ten,  ilevn,   twelv.     foost,    sekand,    j?9ad,    foj?,    fifj?,    siksjj, 
sevnj),    eitf>,     nain]?,    ten]?,    ilevn]?,    twelfj>.       tuw    }?99dz, 
]?rij   fo]?s,    fo   fif]?s,    faiv    siks]?s,   siks    sevn]?s,    sevn    eitj?s,  5 
nain  ten]?s,  ilevn  twelf]?s. 

dsaenjtiari,  februari,  maatj,  eipral,  mei,  dsuwn,  dsuwlai, 
oggst,  saptenib9,  oktoubg,  nouvembo,  disembe. 

sandi,  mandi,  tjuwzdi,  we(d)nzdi,  f>88zdi,  fraidi, 
ssetgdi.  10 

sprin,  sani9(r),  otem,  winto.  no]?,  sau}?,  ijst,  west, 
jioz,  nianfs,  wijks,  deiz,  auez,  mimts,  sekgndz. 

wijk  fomz. 

256.  9i  intend  t9  :gou  tu  ;aigl9nd  9t  Si  end  9(v)  £o  jig. 
:whot   s  Saet?v     :whe9   dgz    it    kam    from?v     it    :kamz 

frgm  dsogmgni.     :whot  iz  (or  s)  it  meid  6v?v    :iz  it  :meid  9v 
le$9  ?     nou\  it  s  imeid  9V  ;klo}?.     nou\  it  s  not :  it  s  :meid  5 
9V  ;peipg !     91  tel  jii,  it  s  ;not  :meid  9V  peipg ;  it  ;iz  :meid 
9v  klo]?. 

•when  9i  got  -tSe9,  t5g  W9z  nouwan  t5e9. 

wij  d  betg  :gou  9t  ;wans:  tS9z  nou  taim  t9  luwz.  jes\ 
9i  ]?ink  wij  haed.  10 

-woz  (w9z)  ij  9t  t|99tj  Sis  :monir)  ?  91  S9pouz  ij  :woz, 
b9t  91  m  not  jug  ;  9i  :did  nt  sij  im.  hij  W9z  tSeg  ;laast 
sandi. 

iwhegr  iz  lt?v  it  s  hig  ;  9t  :lijst  9i  ;]?ink  it  :iz.  jes\ 
higritiz.  15 

9i  :houp  it  1  bi(j)  fain  t9:moro(u).  91  m  gfreid  it  wount : 
9i  ik:spekt  Sg  wetSgr  9!  not  bi  setld  fa  sam  tnim  jet. 

Jol  juw  bi  Sea  tuw?  91  houp  9i  -JaeF  ;  bat  91  m  gfreid 
9i  Jaant  (or  ai  J9l  not)  -haev  taim. 

wij   v  haed   t9  thaev  So    ;haus  ipeintid.       it  haeznt   bijn  20 


92  TEXTS 

done  for  a  long  time  :  it  has  been  put  off  too  long.     Better 
late  than  never. 

I  went  to  him  and  told  him  of  it.  He  said  he  would 
send  for  it  at  once. 

Advantages  of  Phonetics. 

257.  The  first  and  most  evident  advantage  of  phonetics  is 
the  independence  it  gives  us.  In  the  first  place,  it  makes 
us  independent  of  residence  abroad.  Even  if  the  learner 
intends  to  go  to  the  country  where  the  language  is  spoken, 
it  is  a  great  advantage  to  him  to  start  with  a  thorough 
practical  knowledge  of  the  sounds  in  which  he  is  to  practise 
himself. 

Secondly,  phonetics  makes  us  independent  of  native 
teachers.  It  is  certain  that  a  phonetically  trained  English- 
man who  has  a  clear  knowledge  of  the  relations  between 
French  and  English  sounds  can  teach  French  sounds  to 
English  people  better  than  an  unphonetic  Frenchman — still 
more,  an  unphonetic  Belgian,  Swiss,  or  Pole — who  is  unable 
to  communicate  his  pronunciation  to  his  pupils,  and  perhaps 
speaks  a  vulgar  or  dialectal  form  of  French  himself. 

Again,  phonetics  enables  an  intelligent  adult  to  get  a 
sound  elementary  knowledge  of  the  sounds  of  a  foreign 
language  without  any  help  from  outside — that  is,  if  he  has 
an  adequate  phonetic  analysis  and  transcription  to  work  with. 

But  the  gain  of  a  phonetic  grasp  of  a  language  extends 
far  beyond  such  special  considerations.  A  secure  grasp 
of  the  sounds  of  a  language  is  a  great  strengthening  of  the 
mastery  of  its  forms  and  meanings.  A  minute  discrimina- 
tion of  similar  sounds  in  closely  allied  languages  is  the 
surest  safeguard  against  otherwise  inevitable  confusions. 

Hence  also  the  literary  and  aesthetic  use  of  phonetics. 
Phonetics  alone  can  breathe  life  into  the  dead  mass  of 
letters  which  constitutes  a  written  language  ;  it  alone  can 
bring  the  rustic  dialogues  of  our  novels  before  every  intelli- 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS  93 

:dan  far  9   log   :taim:    it  s   bijn   put   of  tuw  log.     beta 
leit  San  neva. 

ai  :went  tu  im  an  tould  Im  6v  it.  hij  :sed  ij  d  send 
far  It  at  wans. 

advaantidglz  av  fdunetiks 

257.  tSa  faast  an  moust  evident  advaantlds  av  founetiks  iz 
Si  indi;pendans  it  :givs  as.  in  tSa  faast  -pleis,  it  :meiks 
as  independent  av  rezidans  abrod.  ijvn  if  tSa  laanar 
Intendz  ta  gou  ta  tSa  kantri  -whea  Sa  laeqgwids  Iz  spoukn,  5 
it  s  a  greit  advaantids  tu  im  ta  staat  witS  a  ]?ara 
praektikl  nolids  av  t$a  saun(d)z  in  :whitj  ij  (i)z  ta  prsektis 
im-self. 

sekandli,    founetiks    :meiks    98   indi'pendant    av  neitiv 
tijtjaz.      it    s   saatn    (Sat    a    founetikali    treind    ir)gli|man  10 
iiw  -haez  a  klia  nolids  av  tSa  rileijanz  bi:twijn  frenj  and 
irjglij  saundz  kan  tijtj  frenj  saundz   tu   iqglij   :pijpl  beta 
t5an    an    anfounetik    frenjman — stil    moa,   an    anfounetik 
beldsan,  swis,  -oa  poul — huw  z  an'eibl  ta  kamjuwnikeit  iz 
pranansi'eijan  tu  iz  pjuwplz,  an  prseps  spijks  a  valgar  5  15 
daialektal  fom  av  frenj  imself. 

agen\  founetiks  ineiblz  an  Intelidsant  sedalt  ta  :get  a 
saund  eli'ment(a)ri  nolids  av  tSa  saundz  av  a  forin  laerjgwids 
wiSaut  eni  help  fram  'aut'saidv — t5aet  iz,  :if  ij  -(h){ez  an 
aedikwit  founetlk  anaelisis  an  traen'skripjan  ta  waak  wi?5.  20 

bat  tSa  gein  av  a  founetik  graasp  av  a  laerjgwids  iks:tendz 
faa  biijond  -satj  spejal  kansida'reijanz.  a  sikjua  graasp 
av  t5a  saundz  av  a  laerjgwids  iz  a  greit  strei)]:(a)nir)  av  tSa 
maast(a)ri  av  its  fomz  an  mijnir|z.  a  minjuwt  diskrimi-neijan 
av  simila  saundz  In  klousli  alaid  laerjgwidsiz  iz  <?a  juarist  25 
seifgaad  aigenst  atSawaiz  inevitabl  kanfjuwsanz. 

hens  :olsou  tSa  litarari  and  Ijsf>etik  juws  av  founetiks. 
founetiks  aloun  kan  brijtS  laif  Inta  t?a  ded  maes  av 
letaz  whitj  konstltjuwts  a  ritn  Iaer)g\vid5  ;  it  aloun  kan 
:brirj  tSa  rastik  daialogz  av  aua  novlz  bi-for  evri  Inteli-  30 


94  TEXTS 

gent  reader  as  living  realities,  and  make  us  realize  the  living 
power  and  beauty  of  the  ancient  classical  languages  in  prose 
and  verse. 

Phonetics  is  not  merely  an  indirect  strengthener  of 
grammatical  associations,  it  is  an  essential  part  of  grammar 
itself. 

A  knowledge  of  sentence-stress  and  intonation  is  not 
only  an  essential  part  of  elocution  and  correct  pronuncia- 
tion, but  is  also  an  integral  part  of  the  syntax  of  many 
languages. 

In  short,  there  is  no  branch  of  the  study  of  language 
which  can  afford  to  dispense  with  phonetics. 

The  Pine  Arts. 

258.  Because  the  soul  is  progressive,  it  never  quite  repeats 
itself,  but  in  every  act  attempts  the  production  of  a  new 
and  fairer  whole.     Thus,  in  our  Fine  Arts,  not  imitation, 
but  creation  is  the  aim.     In  landscape,  the  painter  should 
give  the  suggestion  of  a  fairer  creation  than  we  know.     The 
details,  the  prose  of  Nature,  he  should  omit,  and  give  us 
only  the  spirit  and  splendour.     Valuing  more  the  expression 
of  Nature  than  Nature  herself,  he  will  exalt  in  his  copy  the 
features  that  please  him.     He  will  give  the  gloom  of  gloom 
and  the  sunshine  of  sunshine. 

Politeness. 

259.  As  to  politeness,  many  have  attempted  its  definition. 
I  believe  it  is  best  to  be  known  by  description,  definition 
not  being  able  to  comprise  it.     I  would,  however,  venture 
to  call  it  benevolence  in  trifles,  or  the  preference  of  others 
to  ourselves  in  little,  daily,  hourly  occurrences  in  the  com- 
merce of  life.     A  better  place,   a  more  commodious  seat, 
priority  in  being  helped  at  table — what  is  it  but  sacrificing 
ourselves  in  such  trifles  to  the  convenience  and  pleasure 
of  others  ?    And  this  constitutes  true  politeness.     Bowing, 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS  95 

rijdor  QZ  livig  ri(j)aelitfz,  on  :meik  as  rialaiz  Sa  livig 
pauar  on  bjuwti  ov  Si  einjont  klaesikl  laerjgwidsiz  in  prouz 
on  voos. 

founetiks   iz    not    :mioli    on    indi'rekt    strer)]?(9)n8r    8V 
gramsetikal   osousi'eijonz,  it  s  on  isenjol  paat  ov  graemor  35 
itself. 

o  nolids  ov  sentonsstres  ond  intou'neijon  (i)z  not 
:ounli  on  isenjol  paat  ov  elo'kjuwjon  on  korekt  pronansi'ei- 
Jon,  hot  iz  :olsou  on  intigrol  paat  ov  So  sintaeks  ov  meni 
Iserjgwidsiz.  40 

in  Jot,  So  z  nou  braanj  ov  Sa  stadi  ov  laerjgwids  whitj 
kon  ofod  to  dispens  wlS  founetiks. 

t5a  fain  aats. 

258.  bikoz  tSo   soul  iz   progresiv,  it  neva  kwait  ripijts 
it-self,  bat  in  evrl  sekt  otempts  tSa  pradakjan   ov  o  njuw 
on    feora    houl.     8as,    in    aua    fain    aats,   not    imi'teijon, 
bot    krijeijon    iz    tSi    eini.      in    laensk(e)ip,   tSa    peinto   Jod  5 
:giv  So  sodsestjon   ov  o  feoro  krieijon  Son  wij  nou.     So 
dijteilz,  So  ;prouz  ov  neitja,  hij  Jad  oumit  (or  omit)\  on  :giv 
os  ounli  So  spirit  on  splendo.     veeljuii)  mo(o)  Si  ik;sprejon 
ov  neitjo  Son  neitja  hao'self,  hij  wil  igzolt  in  iz  kopi  Sa 
fijtjaz  Sat  plijz  im.     hij  wil   :giv  Se  gluwm  av  gluwm  I0 
an  So  sanjain  ov  sanjain. 

palaitnis. 

259.  :aez  to  po;laitnis,  meni  ov  o:temtid  its   defi'nijon. 
oi  bi:lijv  it  s  best  to  bi  noun  boi   di;skripjon,  defi'nijon 
not  -bijirj  eibl  to  kompraiz  it.     oi  wud,  (h)au:eva,  :ventjo 
to  :kol  it  bi;nevolons  in  ;traiflzv,  60  So  pref(o)rons  ov  aSoz  5 
tu    auoselvz    in    litl,    deili,    auoli    okaransiz    in   So   kom- 
oos  ov  laif.     o  beto  pleis,  o  :moa  komoudjos  sijt,  proioriti 
in    -bijir)    helpt    at    teibl — whot    :iz    it    bat    saekrifaizir) 
aua-selvz    in    satj    traiflz    ta    Sa    kanvijnjans    an    plesar 
av  aSaz?v    an    ;Sis  :konstitjuwts  truw  palaitnis.      bauir),  10 


96  TEXTS 

ceremonies,  formal  compliments,  stiff  civilities  will  never  be 
politeness ;  that  must  be  easy,  natural,  unstudied,  manly, 
noble.  And  what  will  give  this  but  a  mind  benevolent 
and  perpetually  attentive  to  exert  that  amiable  disposition 
towards  all  you  converse  and  live  with?  Benevolence  in 
great  matters  takes  a  higher  name,  and  is  the  Queen  of 
Virtue. 

The  Burial  of  Sir  John  Moore. 

260.     Not  a  drum  was  heard,  not  a  funeral  note, 
As  his  corpse  to  the  rampart  we  hurried  ; 
Not  a  soldier  discharged  his  farewell  shot 
O'er  the  grave  where  our  hero  we  buried. 

We  buried  him  darkly  at  dead  of  night, 
The  sods  with  our  bayonets  turning  ; 

By  the  struggling  moonbeam's  misty  light 
And  the  lantern  dimly  burning. 

No  useless  coffin  enclosed  his  breast, 

Not  in  sheet  nor  in  shroud  we  wound  him ; 

But  he  lay  like  a  warrior  taking  his  rest 
With  his  martial  cloak  around  him. 

Few  and  short  were  the  prayers  we  said, 
And  we  spoke  not  a  word  of  sorrow ; 

But  we  steadfastly  gazed  on  the  face  that  was  dead, 
And  we  bitterly  thought  of  the  morrow. 

We  thought,  as  we  hollowed  his  narrow  bed, 
And  smoothed  down  his  lonely  pillow, 

That  the  foe  and  the  stranger  would  tread  o'er  his  head, 
And  we  far  away  on  the  billow  ! 

Lightly  they'll  talk  of  the  spirit  that's  gone, 
And  o'er  his  cold  ashes  upbraid  him ; 

But  little  he'll  reck  if  they  let  him  sleep  on 
In  the  grave  where  a  Briton  has  laid  him. 


PHONETIC   TRANSCRIPTIONS  97 

serimanlz,  foml  komplimants,  stif  slvilltiz  wil  neva  -bij 
palaitnis ;  Saet  mas(t)  bij  ijzi,  naetjaral,  'an'stadid,  maenli, 
noubl.  an  :\vhot  wil  -giv  Sis  bat  a  maind  binevalant 
an  papetjuall  atentiv  tii  igizaat  -Sset  eimjabl  dispa'zijan 
todz  (or  tawodz)  ol  jii(w)  kanvaas  an  liv  wiS?v  blnevalans  15 
in  ;greit  imaetaz  :teiks  a  haia  :neim\  and  iz  Sa  jkwijn  av 
vaatju. 

Sa  berial  av  -saa  dgon  mua. 

260.     :not  a  ;dram  waz  haad,  :not  a  fjuwnaral  nout, 

•aez  iz  kops  ta  ?Sa  raempaat  wij  harid ; 
:not  a  souldsa  distjaadsd  (h)iz  feawel  Jot 
:oa  tSa  greiv  -whear  aua  hiarou  wij  berid.  5 

wij  berid  im  daakll  at  ded  av  nait\ 

tSa  sodz  wiS  aua  beianits  taanlq  ; 
bai  Sa  straglig  muwnbijmz  misti  lait 

en  tfo  Isentan  dimli  baanir). 

:nou  juwslis  kofin  inklouzd  iz  brest,  10 

mot  in  Jijt  nor  in  fraud  wij  waund  im ; 

bat  ij  lei  laik  a  woria  iteikiq  iz  rest 
wi$  iz  maajal  klouk  araund  im. 

fjuw  an  Jot  wa  tSa  preaz  wij  sed, 

an  wij  spouk  :not  a  waad  av  isorou;  15 

bat  wij  stedfastli  geizd  on  ?5a  feis  Sat  waz  ded, 

an  wij  jbitali  f>ot  av  tSa  morou. 

wij  )?ot,  az  wij  holoud  Iz  nserou  bed, 

an  smuwSd  :daun  hiz  lounli  pilou, 
Sat  Sa  fou  an  Sa  streinsa  wud  tred  -or  iz  hed,          2o 

and  ;wij  :faar  awei  on  Sa  bilou! 

laitli  -t5ei  1  tok  av  Sa  spirit  Sat  s  gon, 

and  :or  Iz  kould  aejiz  ap'breid  Im  ; 
bat  litl  hlj  1  rek  :if  -Sei  let  Im  :slijp  on 

In  Sa  greiv  -whear  a  ;britn  az  leid  Im.  35 


98  TEXTS 

But  half  of  our  heavy  task  was  done 

When  the  clock  struck  the  hour  for  retiring ; 

And  we  heard  the  distant  and  random  gun 
That  the  foe  was  sullenly  firing. 

Slowly  and  sadly  we  laid  him  down, 

From  the  field  of  his  fame  fresh  and  gory ; 

We  carved  not  a  line,  and  we  raised  not  a  stone- 
But  we  left  him  alone  with  his  glory. 

She  walks  in  beauty. 
261.         She  walks  in  beauty,  like  the  night 

Of  cloudless  climes  and  starry  skies ; 
And  all  that's  best  of  dark  and  bright 

Meet  in  her  aspect  and  her  eyes: 
Thus  mellowed  to  that  tender  light 
Which  heaven  to  gaudy  day  denies. 

One  shade  the  more,  one  ray  the  less 
Had  half  impaired  the  nameless  grace 

Which  waves  in  every  raven  tress, 
Or  softly  lightens  o'er  her  face ; 

Where  thoughts  serenely  sweet  express 
How  pure,  how  dear  their  dwelling-place. 

And  on  that  cheek,  and  o'er  that  brow, 

So  soft,  so  calm,  yet  eloquent, 
The  smiles  that  win,  the  tints  that  glow, 

But  tell  of  days  in  goodness  spent, 
A  mind  at  peace  with  all  below, 

A  heart  whose  love  is  innocent. 


PHONETIC  TRANSCRIPTIONS  99 

:bat  ;haaf  ev  eue  hevi  taask  wez  dan 
•when  $e  klok  :strak  Si  aue  £9  ritaierir) ; 

ond  wij  heed  $e  distent  en  rsendem  gan 
Set  Se  fou  woz  salinli  faierin. 

slouli  en  saedli  wij  leid  im  daun,  30 

frem  Se  fijld  ev  iz  feim  frej  en  gori ; 

wij  kaavd  mot  e  lain,  end  wij  reizd  :not  e  stoun'  — 
bet  wij  left  im  eloun  wi$  iz  glori. 

JXj  woks  In  bjuwtl 

261.          Jlj  woks  in  bjuwti,  :laik  ?5e  nait 

ev  klaudlis  klaimz  en  staari  skaiz ; 

end  ol  Set  s  best  ev  daak  en  brait 

mijt  :in  (h)eer  aespekt  -send  heer  aiz:  5 

:(Sas  meloud  -tuw  -Sset  tende  lait 
whitj  hevn  te  godi  dei  dinaiz. 

wan  Jeid  tfo  moe,  wan  rei  Se  les 
-hsed  haaf  impeed  tSe  neimlis  greis 

whitj  weivz  in  evri  reivn  tres,  10 

-oe  softli  laitnz  :oe  -hee  feis ; 

-whee  f>ots  sirijnli  swijt  ikspres 

-hau  pjue,  -hau  die  -tSee  dweliqpleis. 

end  :on  -Saet  tjijk,  end  :oe  -tSaet  brau, 

•sou  soft,  -sou  kaam,  -jet  eloukwent,  15 

tJe  smailz  Set  win,  tfo  tints  Set  glou, 
bet  tel  ev  deiz  in  gudnis  spent, 

o  maind  et  pijs  wiS  ol  bilou, 
9  haat  -huwz  lav  iz  inesnt. 


o  2 


PHONOLOGY 

262.  Phonetics  is  the  science  of  speech-sounds  and  the 
art  of  pronunciation.     From  this  point  of  view  it  is  a  purely 
descriptive  science. 

263.  But  the  sounds  of  language — like  language  itself — 
can  also  be  regarded  from  the  historical  point  of  view. 

Thus,  after  describing  and  classifying  the  sounds  of  such 
a  language  as  Modern  English,  we  may  go  on  to  study  their 
history.  In  dealing  with  the  phonetic  structure  of  English 
from  the  descriptive  point  of  view  we  have  already  had 
occasion  to  trace  back  the  history  of  some  of  our  sounds  to 
the  Middle  English  period.  In  §  191  foil,  we  have  in  this 
way  been  able  to  find  the  origin — to  point  out  the  older 
forms — of  the  vowel  aa,  and  also  to  explain  the  phonetic 
changes  which  gave  rise  to  it.  This  is  phonology  :  the 
science  of  sound-changes,  of  the  history  and  development  of 
the  sounds,  first  of  special  languages,  and  then  of  language 
in  general.  The  history  of  the  English  vowels  is  a  special 
department  of  historical  phonology. 

264.  If  after  tracing  the  vowels  of  Modern  English  back 
to  the  Old  English  period,  we  then  go  on  to  compare  the 
Old  English  vowels  themselves  with  those  of  the  cognate 
Germanic  languages  —  Dutch,   German,   Icelandic,   Gothic, 
&c. — so  as  to  determine  the  vowel-sounds  of  the  prehistoric 
Parent   Germanic    language    from   which    all    these   were 
developed,  each  by  special  changes  of  its  own,  historical 
expands  into  comparative  phonology.     So  also  there  is  a 
still  wider  comparative  phonology  of  the  Aryan  languages — 
Germanic,  Greek,  Latin,  Sanskrit.  &c. —  by  which  we  are  able 


PHONOLOGY  101 

to  determine  with  more  or  less  certainty  the  vowel-system 
of  Parent  Aryan. 

266.  Then  at  last  we  arrive  at  the  conception  of  general 
phonology,  which  emancipates  itself  from  the  limits  of  any 
one  language  or  group  of  languages,  and  deals  with  such 
questions  as  :  Why  are  the  sounds  of  every  language  liable 
to  change  from  generation  to  generation  ?  Are  these  changes 
the  result  of  defective  imitation  of  the  speech  of  the  parents 
by  the  children,  or  of  imperceptibly  gradual  shiftings  of  the 
organic  positions  by  which  the  sounds  are  produced  ?  What 
is  the  influence  of  other,  more  external  factors,  such  as 
acoustic  imitation,  or  analogy?  What  is  the  influence  of 
race  or  climate,  if  any?  Are  sound-changes  the  result  of 
economy  of  exertion  and  laziness,  of  striving  after  greater 
distinctness  of  expression  ?  and  so  on. 

266.  Phonology  is,  therefore,  a  speculative  science,  dealing 
largely  with  more  or  less  probable  hypotheses. 

267.  Nevertheless,  we  can  often  determine  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  dead  languages  with  almost  complete  certainty,  at 
least  as  regards  the  general  character  of  the  language — so  as 
to  be  able,  for  instance,  to  give  a  Broad  Komic  transcription 
of  Middle  English  and  Latin  pronunciation — and  often  with 
minute  accuracy  of  detail. 

268.  In  this  we  are  guided  by  a  variety  of  evidence : 
sound-classifications  and  descriptions  of  sounds  by  contem- 
poraries ;   their    comparisons    with    the    sounds    of    other 
languages;   phonetic  transcriptions,   or  transcriptions  in  a 
foreign  orthography,  whose  evidence  is  the  more  valuable 
the    more   phonetic    the    orthography    and    the    less    the 
changes  that   the  sounds    have    undergone,    as   when    we 
find    English   come   transcribed    civm   by   a   Welshman   in 
the  sixteenth  century ;  the  spelling  itself,  especially  when 
it  changes,  as  when  the  Old  English  high-front-round  vowel 
y  is  expressed  in   Early   Middle   English   orthography  by 
the   French    u ;    metre   and   rime,   puns,   &c. ;    comparison 


102  PHONOLOGY 

by  the  investigator  with  the  sounds  of  cognate  languages 
and  dialects  ;  general  laws  of  sound-change.  It  must  also  be 
borne  in  mind  that  individual  sounds  may  be  kept  unchanged 
for  thousands  of  years  :  thus  it  is  certain  that  the  English  w 
had  the  same  sound  in  Old  English  as  it  has  now,  the  contrary 
hypothesis  being,  indeed,  inconceivable  ;  and  also  that  this 
was  the  sound  it  had  not  only  in  Parent  Germanic  but  also 
in  Parent  Aryan.  It  will  easily  be  understood  that  the 
cumulative  force  of  a  number  of  independent  proofs  is  often 
irresistible.  Thus  the  pronunciation  of  Old  English  y  is 
further  confirmed  by  the  facts  (1)  that  it  already  had  the 
same  sound  in  Latin,  which  we  can  prove  by  a  variety  of 
independent  arguments,  and  (2)  that  y  has  the  same  sound  to 
the  present  day  in  Danish  and  Swedish,  whose  orthographies 
borrowed  it  from  Old  English. 


STUDY  OF  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

269.  In   the   preceding   sections   the   student   has   been 
taught  how  to  prepare  himself  for  the  study  of  sounds  in 
general  by  learning  to  discriminate,  symbolize,  isolate,  and 
analyse  those  of  his  own  language. 

Even  in  this  elementary  stage  we  cannot  ignore  general 
phonetics :  we  cannot  understand  the  English  vowels 
without  considering  their  relations  to  the  whole  scheme  of 
possible  vowels. 

But  so  far,  general  phonetics  has  been  only  a  means  to  an 
end  :  its  principles  and  its  details  have  been  adduced  only 
in  as  far  as  they  explain  the  phonetic  structure  of  English. 

270.  And  it  is  possible  to  stop  short  here.     Those  who 
study  phonetics  solely  as  a  preparation  for  English  elocution 
will  naturally  do  so. 

The  singer,  on  the  other  hand,  will  in  most  cases  aim  at 
acquiring  a  practical  command  of  at  least  the  Italian  and 
German  sounds.  But  although  his  range  will  be  a  wider 
one,  it  need  not  extend  to  the  whole  field  of  sounds. 

271.  The  case  of  the  language-teacher  is  again  different. 
Even  if  he  has  to  deal  only  with  one  language — whether  it 
be  his  own  or  a  foreign  language — he  cannot  successfully 
teach  its  pronunciation  on  the  basis  of  a  knowledge  of  the 
sounds  of  that  language  only.     Thus  it  is  evident  that  in 
teaching  English  to  foreigners  he  cannot  correct  their  mis- 
pronunciations without  a  knowledge  of  the  habits  of  speech 
which  give  rise  to  them.     It  is  also  evident  that  he  cannot 
teach  the  foreigners  to  deduce  English  sounds  from  those  of 
their  own  language  without  being  able  himself  to  recognize 


104          STUDY  OF  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

and  analyse  the  formation  of  the  latter.  Even  if  he  teaches 
his  own  countrymen  a  foreign  language,  he  may  still  have 
to  reckon  with  the  individual  peculiarities,  provincialisms, 
and  vulgarisms  of  his  pupils.  Thus  in  imparting  a  correct 
pronunciation  of  German  to  a  class  of  speakers  of  Southern 
English  he  will  have  to  employ  different  methods  from  those 
which  would  suffice  with  a  Scotch  class. 

272.  The  necessity  of  a  knowledge  of  general  phonetics 
for  the  scientific  student  of  language,  the  comparative  philo- 
logist, the  polyglot   linguist,  as  well  as   the   pathological 
elocutionist,  who  has  to  deal  with  defects  of  speech,  and  to 
teach  deaf-mutes  to  speak,  is  self-evident. 

Practical  and  Theoretical  Study. 

273.  The  warning  in  §  35  holds  good  even  in  the  study 
of  general  phonetics  :    this  also  must  at   first  be   mainly 
practical. 

274.  Theoretically,  of  course,  the  organic  study  of  pho- 
netics is  a  branch  of  anatomy  and  physiology  ;  while  from 
the  opposite  point  of  view  it  is  based  on  that  branch  of 
physical   science    known    as   acoustics,    together   with   the 
anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  organs  of  hearing. 

275.  Unfortunately,   this   basis   is   still   so  imperfect  as 
regards  the  acoustic  side  of  phonetics  that  it  is  not  too  much 
to  say  that  from  the  physical  science  point  of  view  there  is 
as  yet   no  science  of  phonetics  at  all.     The  principles   of 
acoustics  are  well  established,  and  much  is  known  about 
the  anatomy  of  the  ear.     But  how  the  ear  transmits  to  the 
brain  the  impressions  of  sound  is  still  as  great  a  mystery 
as  ever.     And  although  practical  phonetics  has  made  the 
mechanism  of  the  vowels  clear  enough,   there  is  still  no 
generally  received  acoustic  theory  of  their  formation. 

276.  But  phonetics  considered  as  a  branch  of  physical 
science  is  a  subject  of  only  secondary  importance.     The  real 
function  of  phonetics  is  philological  and  literary  :  its  true 


PKACTICAL  AND  THEOKETICAL   STUDY    105 

raison  d'etre  is  to  serve  as  a  basis  for  the  study  of  languages. 
And  if  we  regard  phonetics  as  essentially  a  linguistic  science, 
we  shall  find  that  the  want  of  a  rigorous  scientific  basis  is  not 
such  a  serious  defect  after  all. 

277.  And  where  the  basis  exists  it  is  often  superfluous. 
This  is  especially  the  case  with  the  anatomy  and  physiology 
of  the   organs  of  speech.     Thus  even  the  most  advanced 
instrumental  phonetician  finds  that,  although  he  ought  theo- 
retically to  have  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the  anatomy  and 
functions  of  the  muscles  of  the  tongue,  he  can  determine — 
or  fail  to  determine—  its  positions  quite  as  well  without  this 
knowledge. 

Acquisition  of  New  Sounds. 

278.  The  first  step  in  the  study  of  general  phonetics  is 
gradually  to  enlarge  our  stock  of  sounds.     We  have  already 
learnt  how  to  deduce  unfamiliar  foreign  from  familiar  native 
sounds.     But  the  only  sure  way  of  fixing  these  new  sounds 
in  the  memory  is  a  practical  study  of  the  languages  in  which 
they  occur.     When  differences  of  meaning  hinge  on  such 
slight  distinctions  as  those  between  the  vowels  in  men  and 
man,  or  French  e  and  e,  the  learner  is  forced  to  make  and 
hear  them,    and  his  organic  and  acoustic  sense  are  both 
trained  and  developed  to  the  utmost  by  incessant  repetition. 
Nor  need  this  training  be  gained  only  from  living  languages. 
The  restoration  of  the  original  Latin  and  Chaucerian  pro- 
nunciation is  a  valuable  preparation  for  and  help  in  the 
practical  study  of  modern  languages  ;  and  mistakes  in  the 
pronunciation  of  a  dead  language  are  less  serious. 

279.  In   this   linguistic   phonetic    training   the    student 
should  by  no  means  confine  himself  to  French  and  German 
and  such  other  languages  as  he  is  obliged  to  study  in  detail 
as  part  of  his  equipment  for  his  career  in  life,  but  should 
seize  every  opportunity  of  learning  something  of  every  lan- 
guage that  comes  in  his  way.     Even  if  he  has  only  a  month 


106          STUDY  OF  GENERAL   PHONETICS 

or  two  to  give  to  Welsh,  Russian,  Arabic,  as  the  case  may 
be,  it  is  always  worth  his  while  to  acquire  a  general  know- 
ledge of  its  structure,  to  read  through  a  certain  number  of 
texts,  giving,  of  course,  special  attention  to  the  sounds  and 
their  synthesis. 

280.  Even  if  he   does  not  engage  in  systematic  study 
under  a  native,  he  can  at  least  cultivate  the  habit  of  obser- 
vation ;  in  his  own  country  as  well  as  abroad  he  can  always 
keep  his  ears  open  for  varieties  of  pronunciation. 

281.  As  regards  the  choice  of  a  teacher,  the  fh-st  thing  is  to 
make  sure  that  he  speaks  some  one  definite,  unmixed  dialect 
naturally  and  correctly — what  the  dialect  is,  does  not  matter 
much  from  the  point  of  view  of  general  phonetics.     The 
ideal  teacher  for  a  literary  language  is,  of  course,  one  whose 
natural  dialect  is  the  standard  one,  and  who  is  competent  to 
teach  it  phonetically  by  means  of  phonetic  transcriptions. 
If  he  is  not  a  trained  phonetician,  it  will  often  be  worth  the 
learner's  while  to  try  to  interest  him  in  phonetic  methods, 
and  perhaps  even  to  train  him  to  write  texts  in  phonetic 
spelling. 

282.  If  the  teacher  is  unwilling  to  give,  or  incapable  of 
giving  the  natural  pronunciation,  it  is  often  safest  not  to  let 
him  see  the  phrase-book  or  whatever  text  is  used,  but  read 
the  English  translation  to  him,  and  ask  him  how  he  says 
that  in  his  own  language.     If  there  are  no  phonetic  tran- 
scriptions to  be  had,  the  learner  can  begin  by  marking  the 
pronunciation    roughly  by  adding  diacritics   to   the  nomic 
text,  and  then  gradually  form  a  complete  system  of  trans- 
literation. 

283.  The  phonograph  is  in  most  respects  an  imperfect 
substitute  for  a  native  teacher.     Its  reproduction  of  indi- 
vidual sounds  is  always  more  or  less  indistinct,  however 
loud  it  may  be,  and  it  sometimes  distorts  them.     It  suc- 
ceeds  best  with    the  more  sonorous   elements   of  speech, 
especially  the  vowels,  and  in  giving  the  general  effect  of 


ACQUISITION  OF  NEW   SOUNDS  107 

stress  and  intonation.  Here,  indeed,  the  machine  has  a 
decided  advantage  over  the  living  voice  :  the  same  piece  of 
French,  for  instance,  can  be  turned  on  over  and  over  again, 
bit  by  bit,  with  the  certainty  of  always  hearing  the  same 
shade  of  accent  reproduced  with  absolute  correctness  as  well 
as  uniformity. 

Objective  Methods:   Instrumental  Phonetics. 

284.  The  natural  method  of  learning  sounds  is  mainly 
a  subjective  one.     We  listen  patiently  till  we  are  familiar 
with  the  acoustic  effect  of  the  new  sound  ;  and  then — often 
only  by  repeated  trials — we  hit  on  the  exact  position  of  the 
organs  of  speech  by  which  we  can  reproduce  it  to  our  own 
satisfaction  and  that  of  our  teacher. 

285.  This  natural  method  admits  also  of  objective  con- 
trol by  direct  observation  of  the  movements  of  the  lips  and 
jaws,  and,  to  some  extent,  of  the  tongue,  soft  palate,  and 
other  parts  of  the  mouth  and  throat-passage,  self-observation 
being  carried  on  by  means  of  a  hand-mirror.     If  a  mirror 
small  enough  to  go  into  the  mouth  is  fitted  to  a  handle,  we 
have  the  laryngoscope.     More  may  be  seen  with  the  Ko'nt- 
gen  rays,  whose  use,  however,  is  attended  by  some  draw- 
backs— such  as  loss  of  hair,  and  the  necessity  of  having  the 
back  teeth  drawn — the  results  hitherto  obtained  being  too 
vague  to  be  of  much  use. 

286.  There   are  other  methods  besides  those  of  direct 
observation,  by  which  the  positions  may  be  determined  and 
measured.     The  interior  of  the  mouth  may  be  explored  by 
the  fingers.     A  finger  may  be  used  as  an  artificial  palate 
(§  76).     Several  forms  of  apparatus  have  been  devised  for 
a  more  accurate  determination  of  the  positions  of  the  organs 
of  speech,  especially  in  forming  the  vowels,  such  as  the 
cardboard  disks  on  wires  used   by  Grandgent  (see  Biblio- 
graphy, §  382).     These  methods  are  all  laborious,  and  never 
quite  reliable. 


108          STUDY   OF  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

287.  There  are  other  methods  whose  results  are  obtained 
only  indirectly,  such  as  the  palatographic,  by  which  '  palato- 
grams '  are  made,  recording  the  contact  of  the  tongue  with 
an  artificial  palate.     This  method  is  limited  in  its  applica- 
tion, and  its  results  are  often  doubtful  and  ambiguous. 

288.  There   are   more   elaborate    methods — with  which 
the  name   of    '  experimental   phonetics '   is   more  specially 
associated — which  involve  special  training  in  physics  and 
mathematics  and  in  handling  complicated  apparatus.     The 
investigation  of  the  speech-curves  of  phonograph  and  gramo- 
phone records  are  an  example.     Although  these  methods 
have  yielded  results  of  some  value,  the  results  must  always 
be   received  with   caution,  the  sources  of  error  being  so 
numerous. 

289.  Even  when  a  mass   of  reliable  observations  has 
been  collected,  they  are  often  exceedingly  difficult  to  handle. 

Thus  in  Ziind-Burguet's  Recherches  experimentales  sur  le  timbre 
des  voyelles  nasales  franfaises  we  have  twelve  photographs  of  lip- 
positions — which,  we  are  warned,  have  lost  much  of  their  clearness 
in  the  process  of  reproduction — together  with  a  variety  of  palato- 
grauis  and  other  diagrams,  with  the  help  of  which  the  investi- 
gator claims  to  be  able  to  classify  the  vowels  in  question  in  the 
order  of  the  height  of  the  tongue.  But  as  there  is  nothing  to  tell 
us  whether  the  height  of  the  tongue  in  any  one  vowel  as  compared 
with  any  other  is  the  result  of  raising  the  whole  body  of  the 
tongue,  or  only  of  altering  its  shape  (as  in  making  it  narrow),  this 
information  is  of  little  use  by  itself ;  and  a  linguistic  phonetician 
who  took  it  on  trust  might  find  himself  landed  in  serious  errors. 
Again,  if  we  examine  the  photographs,  we  find  that  they  show 
a  different  position  for  each  vowel ;  in  fact,  the  contemplation  of 
these  photographs  might  very  well  lead  an  ordinary  observer  to 
deny  the  reality  of  the  distinction  between  round  and  un-round 
vowels.  And  if  we  had  other  photographs  of  the  lip-positions  of 
other  French  speakers,  fresh  differences  would  probably  appear. 
The  results  of  the  more  elaborate  and  indirect  methods  often 
appear  in  the  form  of  voluminous  tabulations  from  which  none  but 
a  skilled  arithmetician  can  draw  any  certain  and  definite  conclu- 


INSTRUMENTAL   PHONETICS  109 

sions — conclusions  which,  again,  may  be  materially  qualified,  or 
even  directly  contradicted  by  a  fresh  set  of  observations  on 
another,  or  even  the  same  subject,  if  he  is  not  inured  to  speaking 
into  a  funnel  with  his  mouth  full  of  apparatus. 

290.  It  must  be  remembered,  however,  that  instrumental 
phonetics  is  still  in  its  infancy.     Its  methods  are  being  con- 
tinually improved  and  simplified,  and  it  is  impossible  to 
say  as  yet  what  they  may  result  in. 

291.  At  present  there  is  a  natural — and  indeed,  unavoid- 
able— antagonism  between  the  practical  linguistic  phone- 
tician  and   the  physico -mathematical  instrumental   phone- 
tician.    The  qualifications  and  training  required  on  both 
sides  are  so  opposed  to  each  other,  and  each  of  these  branches 
of  research  makes  such  imperious  demands  on  the  time  and 
energy  of  its  votaries,  that  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  any  one 
investigator  can  combine  them. 

292.  Although  the  conservative  phoneticians  of  the  older 
school  may  go  too  far  in  ignoring  the  results  of  instrumental 
phonetics,  it  is  possible  to  go  too  far  the  other  way  also. 
Some  of  the  younger  generation  seem  to  think  that  the 
instrumental  methods  have  superseded  the  natural  ones  so 
completely  that  attending  a  course  of  'phonetique  experi- 
mentale '  at   some   holiday   course    in    France   makes   the 
laborious  training  of  the  linguistic  phonetician  superfluous. 

293.  This   assumption    has    had   disastrous    effects.     It 
cannot  be  too  often  repeated  that  instrumental  phonetics 
is,  strictly  speaking,  not  phonetics  at  all.     It  only  supplies 
materials  which  are  useless  till  they  have  been  tested  and 
accepted  from  the  linguistic  phonetician's  point  of  view. 
The  final  arbiter  in  all  phonetic  questions  is  the  trained 
ear  of  a  practical  phonetician.     Differences  which  cannot  be 
perceived  by  the  ear — and  many  of  the  results  of  instru- 
mental phonetics  are  of  this  character — must  be  ignored ; 
and  what  contradicts  a  trained  ear  cannot  be  accepted. 

294.  And  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the   utility  of 


110          STUDY   OF  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

instrumental  phonetics  as  a  means  of  research  does  not 
necessarily  imply  a  corresponding  utility  as  a  help  in  acquir- 
ing a  practical  mastery  of  sounds — which,  as  we  have  seen, 
is  the  only  sound  foundation  of  the  science.  As  yet,  instru- 
mental phonetics,  so  far  from  being  a  help  in  the  practical 
study  of  sounds,  has  been  rather  a  hindrance,  by  diverting 
the  learner's  attention  from  that  patient  cultivation  of  the 
organic  and  acoustic  sense  which  is  the  indispensable  basis. 

Study  of  the  Literature. 

295.  The  same  may  be  said,  to  some  extent,  of  the  study 
of  the  literature  of  phonetics.     Phonetics  can  no  more  be 
acquired  by  reading  alone  than  music  can.     It  must  also 
be   remembered   that   phonetics   is   a  comparatively  new 
science,  whose  results  are  still  unsettled,  whose  authorities 
differ  widely  in  their  views. 

296.  But  this,  of  course,  makes  it  all  the  more  necessary 
that  the  serious  student  shall   make   himself  acquainted 
with  the  literature  at  first  hand,  so  as  to  be  able  to  form  an 
independent  judgement  of  his  own. 

297.  But  he  must  at  the    same   time   avoid  confusing 
and  stupefying  his  mind  by  attempting  to  assimilate  an 
indigestible  mass  of  conflicting  views  and  statements  before 
he  is  able  to  sift  it  critically.     Whatever  school  or  method 
he  begins  with,  he  should  thoroughly  master  that  before 
proceeding  to  another.    The  student  who  has  worked  through 
this  little  book  will  find  the  necessary  information  to  guide 
his  further  reading  in  the  bibliography  at  the  end  of  it. 

298.  The   student   cannot   confine   himself   to   any   one 
authority  or  even  to  any  one  school ;  if  for  no  other  reason, 
because  each  has  its  own  special  merits  and  the  defects  of 
its    qualities.     However    wide    a    phonetician's    range    of 
knowledge  may  be,  he  must  know  some  sounds  and  some 
sound-systems  better  than  others  :  he  must  know  the  sounds 
of  his  own  language  best ;    a  Romance  philologist  ought 


STUDY   OF  THE   LITERATURE  111 

to  be  a  better  authority  for  the  sounds  of  French  and  Italian 
or  Spanish  than  a  Germanist,  and  so  on  ;  and  the  general 
scheme  and  classification  of  sounds  may  be  affected  both 
favourably  and  unfavourably  by  the  national  speech  and 
linguistic  habits  of  its  author. 

299.  Hence  some  have  gone  so  far  as  to  deny  the  possi- 
bility  of    general    phonetics.     According    to    them,    each 
speech-nationality  must  have  its  own  special  systematization : 
the  English  vowel-system  is  all  very  well  for  the  English- 
speakers,  but  is  no  good  for  Frenchmen  and  Germans. 

300.  But  without  going  to  such  an  extreme  as  this,  we 
cannot  ignore  the  fact  that  phonetics  may  be  approached 
from  two  opposite  points  of  view.    The  generalizing  tendency 
is  shown  in  its  extreme  form  in  the  English  vowel-square, 
which  provides — or  attempts  to  provide — an  a  priori  pigeon- 
hole for  each  vowel-sound.     The  opposite   tendency  is  to 
subordinate  classification  and  general  construction  to  detail, 
so  that  the  vowel -system  tends  to  resolve  itself  into  an 
endless  line  or  series  of  isolated  details. 

301.  The  truth   is  that  we  cannot  dispense  with  either 
of  these.     Bell's  Visible  Speech  vowel-square  was  a  great 
advance  on  the  older  triangular  arrangement,  and  so  far 
it  has  been  a  help  to  the  detailed  study  of  isolated  sounds. 
But    where   it    gave    false    or    misleading   key-words,    set 
up  an  artificial  elocutionary  pronunciation  of  English,  mis- 
represented the  formation  of  sounds  to  make  them  fit  into 
the  system,  or  failed  to  provide  pigeon-holes   for   sounds 
which  the  author  had  not  yet  come  across,  it  was  a  hindrance 
and  a  stumbling-block.     In  the  revised  and  supplemented 
form  given  in  this  book — which  is,  to  a  great  extent,  the 
result   of    detailed   independent   investigations    carried   out 
without  regard  to  preconceived  theories — it  has  again  become 
an  instrument  of  progress. 

302.  The   great   defect   of  the  detail-method   is   that   it 
supplies  no  corrective  to  the  limitations,  one-sidedness,  and 


112          STUDY   OF   GENERAL   PHONETICS 

caprice  of  the  investigator.  A  keen  observer  who  had  not 
been  trained  to  distinguish  narrow  and  wide  vowels  would 
nevertheless  hardly  fail  to  make  the  distinction  in  some 
vowels,  but  he  might  easily  ignore  it  in  others.  Thus  Ellis 
distinguished  [i]  and  [i]  long  before  the  appearance  of  Visible 
Speech,  but  ignored  the  distinction  in  the  case  of  y,  where 
it  is  disguised  by  the  rounding. 

303.  The  young  student  must  bear  in  mind  that  what  is 
new  is  not  always  the  best,  or  even  the  most  advanced  : 
there  is  retrogression  as  well  as  advance  in  the  history  of 
phonetics  as  in  other  branches  of  knowledge. 

304.  As  a  subject  becomes  more  and  more  complicated, 
the  want  of  a  popular  as  well  as  a  severely  scientific  treat- 
ment of  it  becomes  more  and  more  felt.    There  is,  of  course, 
no  more  harm  in  popular  phonetics  than  there  is  in  popular 
astronomy — the  demand  for  both  is  a  natural,  healthy,  and 
legitimate  one — but  it  is  necessaiy  that  the  two  should  be 
kept  strictly  apart:  that  the  dilettante  phonetician  should 
not  pose  as  a  scientific  investigator  merely  on  the  strength 
of  a  notation  in  which  half  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  are 
turned  upside  down. 

Phonetic  Notation. 

305.  One   of  the   greatest   difficulties  in   the   study  of 
general  phonetics  is  the  diversity  of  notations  employed 
not  only  by  different  writers,  but  often  also  by  one  and 
the  same.     This  diversity  is  not  solely  the  result  of  caprice 
and  the  striving  after  cheap  originality,   but  is   to   some 
extent  the  inevitable  result  of  certain  fundamental  diver- 
gencies in  the  objects  and  uses  of  sound-notations,  of  which 
there  are  three  kinds : — 

(1)  Arbitrary  alphabetic,  in  which  there  is  no  consistent 
association  between  sound  and  symbol :  the  Roman  alphabet 
is  a  familiar  example. 


PHONETIC  NOTATION  113 

(2)  Symbolic    alphabetic,    in   which    there    are    definite 
relations  between  sound  and  symbol,  which  relations  may 
be  either  organic  or  acoustic,  or  a  mixture  of  both  of  these, 
it  being  now  generally  admitted  that  a  scientific  symbolic 
alphabet  must  be  organic,   while  a  popular  one  must  be 
partly  acoustic:  the  best  example  of  a  scientific  symbolic 
alphabet  is  Visible  Speech,  of  which  the  Organic  Alphabet 
is  the  revised  and  supplemented  form. 

(3)  Analphabetic,  in  which  each  sound  is  represented  by 
a  group  of  symbols  resembling  a  chemical  formula,  these 
symbols  being  generally  either  numbers  or  Roman  letters, 
or  a  combination  of  both  with,  perhaps,  other  characters  as 
well.     Jespersen's  Analphabetic  Notation  is  the  best  known 
and  most  fully  worked  out  of  these. 

306.  It  is  evident  that  the  notations  which  fall  under  (3) 
are  of  such  limited  application  that  they  may  be  ignored 
from  the  point  of  view  of  practical  phonetics,  useful  as  they 
undoubtedly  are  from  a  theoretical  point  of  view,  even  if 
we  regard  them  only  as  temporary  substitutes  for  an  ideal 
scientific  alphabetic  system. 

307.  When  we  say  '  alphabetic ',  we  mean  only  alphabetic 
basis.     The  maxim  'one  single  symbol  for  each  sound'  is 
all  very  well   in  theory,  but  impossible  to  carry  out   in 
practice.     The  number  of  possible  distinctions  is  so  great 
that  no  notation  can  do  more  than  provide  symbols  for 
groups  of  sounds,  each  of  which  sounds  must  be  further 
differentiated  when  necessary  by  modifiers  such  as  '  inner ' 
and  '  outer ',   and  marks  of  rounding,  &c.     No  system  of 
writing  can  dispense  with  digraphs  and  even  trigraphs ;  in 
fact,  the  more  scientifically  minute  a  notation  is.  the  more 
it  approximates  to  the  analphabetic  principle. 

308.  Whatever  alphabet  is  adopted — whether  an  arbitrary 
or  a  symbolic  one — it  must  be  capable  of  modification  so  as 
to  supply  the  want  of  (1)  an  international  scientific  'narrow' 
notation,   in   which   all   possible   shades   of  sound   can  be 


SWEET    SK 


114          STUDY   OF   GENERAL  PHONETICS 

expressed  with  minute  accuracy  by  symbols  of  fixed  values, 
and  (2)  an  indefinite  number  of  national  '  wide '  notations, 
each  of  which  selects  the  minimum  number  of  simplest 
letters  required  to  express  the  practically  necessary  sound- 
distinctions  of  the  language  in  question,  ignoring  those  that 
are  superfluous,  so  that  all  the  national  systems  appear  as 
modifications  of  a  common  basis,  each  diverging  from  it 
only  as  far  as  is  made  necessary  by  considerations  of  sim- 
plicity and  ease  of  printing  and  writing  both  in  long  and 
short  hand. 

309.  As  regards  the  distinction  between  the  last  three,  it 
is  to  be  observed  that  in  printing  the  complexity  of  the 
letters  does  not  necessarily  affect  speed  or  ease  ;  so  that 
the  number  of  possible  forms  is  infinitely  greater  than  in 
writing,  which  has  a  comparatively  very  limited  number  of 
simple,  joinable  forms  to  choose  from.     Hence  the  printed 
forms  are  generally  more  distinct  than  the  written  ones, 
as  we  see  by  comparing,  for  instance,  the  capital  and  lower- 
case Roman  A,  a  with  the  italic  a.     As  it  is  desirable  to 
have   as    few   types    as    possible,    most    phonetic   systems 
founded  on  the  Roman  alphabet  discard  altogether  the  use 
of  capitals  as  such,  using  small  capitals,  if  at  all,  only  to 
supplement  the  lower-case  alphabet,  the  capitals  acting  thus 
as    new  letters.      As    the  capitals    have    not   convenient 
script  forms,  this  use  of  them  is  confined  to  scientific  nota- 
tions. 

310.  Some  transcriptions  consist  entirely  of  italics,  the 
idea  being  to  make  the  printed  and  the  written  characters 
the  same  as  far  as  possible,  and  also  to  make  the  phonetic 
symbols   stand   out   distinctly  on   a  page  of  Roman  type. 
But  as  italics  are  required  for  a  variety  of  other  purposes  as 
well,  it  is  better  to  make  the  more  legible  lower-case  letters 
the  basis,  and  use  italics  for  supplementary  purposes— of 
course,  only  in  scientific  notations. 

311.  The  Roman  alphabet  is  in  itself  unscientific  and 


PHONETIC   NOTATION  115 

imperfect,  but  it  has  the  great  advantage  of  being  the  result 
of  a  long  series  of  experiments,  besides  being  in  universal 
use.  Its  foundation  ought  to  be  left  untouched,  for  any 
attempts  at  radical  reform  would  simply  result  in  the 
substitution  of  a  totally  different  alphabet — which  will  no 
doubt  come  to  pass  sooner  or  later. 

312.  In  adapting  the  Koman  alphabet  to  phonetic  pur- 
poses the  first  thing  is  to  utilize  all  the  available  existing 
symbols :  to  give  phonetic  values  to  c,  q,  x,  settle  what  is  to 
be  done  with  the  italic  and  capital  letters,  and  so  on.     The 
next  step  is  to  supplement  it.     There   are   many   supple- 
mentary devices — such  as  the  use  of  italics  and  capitals — 
which,  as  we  have  seen,  are  admissible  only  in  a  scientific 
notation  where  speed  and  ease  are  not  indispensable  quali- 
fications of  a  working  alphabet.    In  a  practical  broad  system, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  first  thing  to  be  considered  in  a  new 
letter  is  whether  it  can  be  written  and  joined  easily.     The 
best  new  letters  are  those  which  are  the  result  of  utilizing 
duplicate  script  forms,  as  in  the  use  of  the  otherwise  super- 
fluous long  forms  of  s  and  z — J,  5.     Such  new  letters  as 
a,  o,  rj  are  also  unexceptionable  in  every  way.    But  to  make 
italic  a,  g,  v  into  Roman  letters  distinct  from  a,  g,  v,  by 
printing  them  upright  instead  of  sloping,  as  is  done  in  the 
alphabet  of  the  Association  Phon6tique,  is  an  illegitimate 
extension  of  the  principle.     The  inevitable  result  is  that 
new  script  forms  have  to  be  invented  to  take  the  place  of 
the  old  a,  #,  v,  which  latter  are  perfect  for  the  purpose.    The 
natural  further  result  is  that  most  of  these  new  script  forms 
are  not  used  at  all,  their  place  being  taken  by  laborious 
detached  facsimiles  of  the  printed  forms. 

313.  The  most  objectionable  class  of  letters  in  a  broad 
alphabet  are  diacritical  ones.     In  their  printed  forms  they 
are  practically  new  letters  ;  and  in  writing  they  involve  not 
only  a  break,  but  a  further  waste  of  time  and  effort  in  the 
movements  of  the  pen   from   the   line   of  writing   to  the 

u  2 


116          STUDY  OF  GENERAL  PHONETICS 

diacritic  and  back  again,  as  we  see  in  the  letter  i  Of 
course,  when  diacritic  letters  already  exist,  they  may  be 
utilized,  especially  in  a  scientific  notation. 

314.  But   every   modification    of   such   a   basis    as   the 
Roman    alphabet   must   necessarily    be    an   unsatisfactory 
makeshift — repulsive  to  every  one  but  the  inventor,  who 
is  generally  not  an  inventor  at  all,  but  simply  a  reviver  of 
devices  which  have  been  tried  and  rejected  over  and  over 
again.     To  the  general  public  all  systems  of  writing  which 
clash  with  the  associations  of  the  traditional  printed  and 
written  nomic  orthography  are  ugly  and  ridiculous — what- 
ever their  intrinsic  merits  may  be. 

315.  But  in  spite  of  all  diversity  there   is  also   much 
agreement :  there  is  already  a  rudimentary  public  opinion, 
sometimes  in  the  principles,  but  oftener  in  the  details  of 
phonetic  notation.     It  is  therefore  better  to  leave  disputed 
and  doubtful  points  to  be  settled  by  experience,  to  trust  to 
the  survival  of  the  fittest,  rather  than  make  the  vain  attempt 
to  enforce  one  uniform  system  of  notation  while  the  very 
foundations  of  phonetics  are  still  under  discussion. 

316.  The  adoption  of  a  uniform  phonetic   notation  for 
exclusively  scientific  purposes  will,  of  course,  be  highly  desir- 
able when  our  knowledge  of  sounds  is  fairly  complete,  and 
there  is  agreement  among  experts  on  the  principles  of  pho- 
netics.   But  such  rigid  uniformity  is  not  desirable,  or  indeed 
possible  with  a  practical  alphabet,  which,  as  we  have  seen, 
must  necessarily  differ  in  its  details  with  each  language  to 
which  it  is  applied. 

317.  It  must  be  observed  that  the  distinction  between 
'  narrow '   and   '  broad '  is  not  an  absolutely  definite  one. 
There  are  degrees  of  broadness.     The  extreme  of  simplicity 
with  which  an  easily  accessible  modern  European  language 
can  and  should  be  written  would  be  out  of  place  in  the 
representation  of  the  necessarily  more  or  less  conjectural 
restoration  of  the  pronunciation  of  Chaucer  or  Shakespeare : 


PHONETIC  NOTATION  117 

here  we  naturally  expect  a  more  minute  notation — a  com- 
promise between  narrow  and  broad. 

318.  Such  a  compromise  must  not  be  confounded  with 
a    dilettante   notation.      The   former    adopts   the  minuter 
distinctions  of  the  scientific  alphabet  only  when  they  are 
practically  useful  from  its  special  point  of  view ;  the  latter 
is  a  compromise  in  a  more  literal  sense :  it  is  not  accurate 
enough  to  be  really  scientific,  and  yet  too  complicated  and 
cumbrous  for  ordinary  practical  use.     Not  that  it  is  to  be 
condemned  on  these  grounds  ;  on  the  contrary,  a  dilettante 
phonetic  notation  has  the  same  justification  as  the  dilettante 
conception  of  phonetics  of  which  it  is  the  expression.     It  is 
better  that  people  should  frankly  acknowledge  that  the  dis- 
tinction of  narrow  and  wide  vowels  or  the  discrimination  of 
five  degrees  of  stress  is  too  much  for  them  and  ignore  them 
accordingly  in   their  transcription   than  attempt  to  use  a 
notation   involving  distinctions  which  they  are  unable  to 
make. 

319.  The  great  disadvantage  of  the  use  of  the  Eoman 
alphabet  in  phonetic  notation  is  the  inevitable  confusion 
between  the   associations  of  phonetic  and  nomic  spelling, 
not  to  speak  of  the  endless  confusions  which  arise  in  passing 
from  one  phonetic  notation  to  another. 

For  this  reason  some  will  perhaps  find  it  desirable  to 
avoid  the  cross-associations  between  the  broad  and  narrow 
Eomic  notations  by  discarding  the  latter  in  favour  of  the 
Organic  alphabet — especially  in  dealing  with  the  vowels. 
The  confusion  is  much  less  with  the  consonants.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  narrow  Eomic  notation 
for  convenience  of  use  by  those  who  have  not  access  to  the 
Organic  symbols ;  and  also  because  to  many  a  totally  new 
notation  like  Visible  Speech  or  the  Organic  Alphabet  is — or 
seems  to  be — a  more  formidable  obstacle  than  the  cross- 
associations  of  a  Eomic  system. 


THE   TEACHING   OF  PHONETICS 

320.  The  general  principles  of  the  teaching  of  phonetics 
have  been  either  implicitly  stated  or  implied  in  the  earlier 
sections  of  this  book  ;   it  remains  now  to  discuss  details, 
and  consider  the  various  applications  of  general  principles 
to  special  needs  and  requirements. 

Phonetics  in  language-teaching. 

321.  The  teaching  of  phonetics  in  the  most  rudimentary 
form  of  that  teaching  implies  at  the  very  least  the  attempt 
to  impart  information  on  the   classification  of  sounds  in 
general,  together  with  an  explanation  of  the  requisite  ter- 
minology, and  of  the  sound-notation  of  at  least  one  language 
— in  most  cases  the  native  language  of  the  pupil  or  class. 

322.  But  the  pronunciation  of  a  given  language  can  be 
taught  fairly  well  without  even  this  minimum  of  phonetics 
— especially  if  the  pupils  have  not  been  already  spoilt  by 
bad  teaching.     Thus  with  a  class  of  young  children  begin- 
ning French  or  German,  good  results  may  be  obtained  by 
simply  letting  them  imitate  the  carefully  isolated  sounds  of 
the  teacher.     The  teacher  may  repeat  such  a  word  as  the 
French  ennui  a  hundred  times  without  eliciting  anything 
better  than  orjwij  ;  but  if  he  lets  the  pupils  hear  en,  nu, 
and  i  separately,  each  pronounced  many  times  in  succession, 
slowly  and  distinctly,  and  then  lets  them  imitate,  a  com- 
paratively satisfactory  result  will  be  obtained  without  much 
difficulty.     When  the  pronunciation  of  the  first  few  words 
in  the  text  has  been  mastered,  these  words  should  be  joined 
together  and  practised  till  the  whole  group  runs  smoothly 


PHONETICS   IN   LANGUAGE-TEACHING     119 

and  without  hesitation  ;  then  the  last  word  should  be  run 
on  to  a  succeeding  group,  and  the  last — or  last  but  two  or 
three — of  this  group  to  the  next,  and  so  on ;  this  over- 
lapping process  ensures  the  continuity  of  the  whole  sentence. 

323.  If  the  pupils  come  quite  fresh  to  the  language,  con- 
fusion with   the   nomic  spelling   may   be   avoided  by  not 
letting  them  see  the  printed  page  till  they  have  learnt  the 
pronunciation   by   ear.      Or    the    lesson   may  begin   with 
writing  the  numerals  1,  2,  3  ...   on  the  blackboard,  and 
associating  each  with  its  name  in  the  foreign  language.     Or 
pictures  may  be  used. 

324.  But  a  far  quicker  and  more  efficient  method  is  to 
begin  with  a  phonetic  transcription,  and  keep  to  it  for  at 
least  a  year,  the  nomic  spelling  being  kept  entirely  in  the 
background   till   the   pronunciation    has    been   thoroughly 
acquired.     However  often  the  learner  may  have  the  pho- 
netic elements  of  a  word  repeated  to  him,  it  is  always  a 
help  to  have  the  impressions  of  the  ear  confirmed  by  the 
written  symbol,  and  still  more  to  have  it  thereby  corrected 
or  supplemented. 

325.  Although  the  difficulty  of  passing  without  confusion 
from  the  phonetic  to  the  nomic  spelling  is  much  less  than 
is  generally  assumed,  its  existence  cannot  be  denied.    Hence 
it  is  perhaps  better  not  to  have  a  special  transcription  for 
such  a  language  as  German  :    all  that  is  wanted  here  is 
to  supplement  the   nomic  spelling  with  stress-marks   and 
diacritics  or  other  marks  to  show  vowel-length  before  conso- 
nant-groups, and  so  on. 

326.  The    difficulties   attending   phonetic   transcription 
would   be   much  lessened  if  there  were  a  uniform  inter- 
national   Broad    Romic    transcription   for    each    language 
instead  of  a  variety  of  special  ones  for  learners  of  different 
nationalities.     Modifying   the   transcription   of  a  language 
does  not  make  its  sounds  any  easier  to  pronounce.     And 
some  confusion  with   the   learner's  nomic  orthography  is 


120  THE   TEACHING   OF  PHONETICS 

inevitable  with  every  transcription  in  Roman  letters ;    but 
with  a  little  practice  they  soon  disappear. 

327.  Even  the  use  of  a  phonetic  transcription  does  not 
necessarily  imply  any  express  teaching  of  phonetics.     It 
merely   means   that  the   learner    substitutes   definite    and 
regular  associations   between    sound   and   symbol   for   the 
vague  and  conflicting  associations  involved  in  the  use  of 
the  nomic  spelling.     He  learns  the  values  of  the  phonetic 
symbols  empirically  and  by  imitation,  just  as  he  learnt  to 
read  the  nomic  spelling  of  his  own  language. 

328.  The  methods  hitherto  discussed  consist  in  utilizing 
phonetic   principles  without   introducing  phonetics    itself. 
A  further  development  consists  in  the  teacher  bringing  in 
phonetic  analysis  whenever  imitation  fails,  or  is  made  easier 
by  so  doing — or,   in   short,  whenever   it  is  worth  while. 
This  implies,  of  course,  that  the  teacher,  although  he  does 
not  teach  phonetics  systematically,  must  have  a  competent 
practical  knowledge  of  it. 

Phonetics  is  from  this  point  of  view  only  an  occasional 
commentary  on  the  learner's  simultaneous  acquisition  of 
a  foreign  language. 

329.  But  there  is   still   another  and  a  better   method  : 
begin,  not  with  a  foreign  language,  but  with  the  systematic 
teaching  of  elementary  phonetics  and  elocution  in  connexion 
with  the  study  of  the  native  language.     In  this  way  the 
learner  approaches  the  study  of  foreign  languages  with  a 
thorough    practical   linguistic  training  which  will   greatly 
facilitate  his  task. 

Qualifications  of  the  Teacher. 

330.  There  are  many  branches  of  linguistic  study  in  which 
a  general  theoretical  knowledge  of  phonetics  is  sufficient — 
or,  at  least,  in  which  good  work  may  be  done  without  much 
practical  command  of  sounds.     But  something  more  than 


QUALIFICATIONS  OF  THE   TEACHEE       121 

this  is  required  of  the  elementary  teacher  of  the  native  as 
well  as  a  foreign  language.  He  has  no  more  right  to  set  up 
as  a  language-teacher  without  having  a  certain  aptitude  for 
phonetics  than  he  would  have  to  undertake  to  teach  drawing 
without  having  an  eye  for  form.  Eational  elementary  lan- 
guage-teaching without  phonetics  is  impossible.  The  three 
main  qualifications  of  such  a  teacher  from  the  phonetic 
point  of  view  are  : — 

(1)  He  must  have  a  thorough  practical  knowledge  of  the 
language  which  he  teaches  as  well  as  of  his  own  language  ; 
he  must  be  bi-lingual,  one  of  the  two  languages  being  his 
own  ;    no  foreigner    should    be  allowed   to   teach   another 
foreign  language  in  England  any  more  than  in  any  other 
country. 

(2)  He  must  have  if  not  a  quick,  at  least  an  accurate  ear 
for  sounds. 

(3)  His  organs  of  speech  must  be  free  from  congenital 
defects,  and  he  must  have  them  under  such  control  as  will 
enable  him  to  reproduce  accurately  all  sounds  with  which 
he  has  to  deal. 

There  is  a  fourth  qualification  of  a  teacher  of  phonetics 
— a  qualification  of  a  phonetic  nature — which  he  must 
possess  in  common  with  all  teachers :  such  an  elocutionary 
training  as  will  enable  him  to  make  himself  heard  distinctly 
without  strain — without  having  to  '  shout  at  his  class '. 

331.  The  systematic  training  of  teachers  of  phonetics 
implies  the  establishment  of  professorships  and  lectureships 
of  phonetics  at  our  universities,  training-colleges,  and  similar 
institutions.  The  professorships  would,  of  course,  have 
attached  to  them  special  libraries  and  seminaries  for  prac- 
tical work  and  research.  Every  professor  must  be  first  and 
foremost  a  linguistic  phonetician  (§  291).  If  he  is  also  a 
good  elocutionist,  so  much  the  better.  Experience  alone 
will  show  whether  the  teaching  of  elocution  should  as  a 
rule  be  detached  from  that  of  phonetics  :  that  is,  detached 


122  THE   TEACHING   OF   PHONETICS 

as  far  as  it  is  possible ;  for  elocution  except  on  a  phonetic 
basis  is  mere  charlatanry. 

332.  As  regards  instrumental  phonetics,  we  can  have  no 
hesitation  in  saying  that  although  eveiy  higher  teacher  of 
phonetics  ought  not  to  ignore  its  results,  it  would  be  un- 
reasonable to  expect  him  to  handle  the  instruments  himself 
and  to  have  a  specialist's  knowledge  of  the  subject.     We 
should  all  welcome  the  phoenix  who  was  at  once  a  perfect 
linguistic  and  instrumental  phonetician  as  well  as  an  elocu- 
tionist, besides  being  an  authority  on  the  methods  of  lan- 
guage-teaching, but  to  exact  such  a  combination  would  only 
be  an  encouragement  to  superficiality  and  imposture. 

333.  Linguistic  phonetics  is,  indeed,  more  naturally  asso- 
ciated with  the  practical  study  of  languages— the  investiga- 
tion of  the  general  principles  on  which  languages  ought  to 
be  taught  and  learnt.     It  stands  to  this  study  much  in  the 
same  relation  as  it  does  to  elocution  :  both  are  based  on 
phonetics,  although  they  both  extend  considerably  beyond 
it  in  their  higher  developments. 

334.  When   it   is   found   desirable    to    establish   special 
teacherships  of  instrumental  phonetics,   they  would  natu- 
rally be  attached  to  the  physical  science  laboratories. 

It  is  further  evident  that  a  detailed  study  of  instrumental 
phonetics  would  be  a  speciality  of  advanced  students,  not  of 
elementary  teachers. 

335.  At  present  we  have  to  manage  as  best  we  can  with 
more  or  less  incompetent  teachers.     The  greatest  mistake 
that  can  be  made  with  these  is  to  try  to  force  them  to  use 
methods  which  are  beyond  their  capacity.     A  short  course 
of  dilettante  linguistic  or  instrumental    phonetics  abroad 
does  not  qualify  to  teach  the  English  vowel-system.     Under 
these  circumstances  it  is  better  for  such  teachers  to  leave  it 
alone. 


123 
Qualifications  of  the  Learner. 

336.  The  percentage  of  pupils  who  have  really  quick  ears — 
who  are  able  to  reproduce  sounds  accurately  after  hearing 
them  only  a  few  times — is  a  very  small  one.     Such  pupils 
are  often  conceited,  and  often  averse  to  methodical  study 
and  impatient  of  training. 

337.  Those,  on  the  other  hand,  who  have  exceptionally 
obtuse  ears,  so  that  they  cannot  even  hear  the  finer  shades 
of  difference  in  unfamiliar  sounds  even  after  repeated  hearing 
under  the  most  favourable  conditions,  ought  to  be  dissuaded 
from  the  study  of  phonetics  if  after  a  short  trial  they  show 
no  signs  of  improvement. 

338.  It  must,  however,  be  borne  in  mind  that  what  is 
popularly  called  '  a  bad  ear  for  sounds '  may  proceed  from 
a  variety  of  causes — not  necessarily  of  an  acoustic  nature — 
some  of  which  may  be  curable.     It  may  be  the  result  of 
temporary  deafness ;  and  this  may  be  cured  by  ceasing  to 
act  on  the  maxim  that  '  only  fools  fear  draughts '.     Or  the 
inability  to  reproduce  new  sounds  may  be  solely  the  result 
of  want  of  training  of  the  organs  of  speech. 

339.  Such  students,  if  they  persevere,  generally  drift  into 
instrumental  and  theoretical  phonetics,  in  which  they  may 
do  valuable  work  ;  although,  of  course,  they  are  unfit  to  act 
as  practical  teachers. 

One  of  the  drawbacks  of  a  bad  ear  is  that  it  leads  the  pupil  not 
only  to  mishear,  but  also  to  hear  differences  where  none  exist. 
Even  those  who  have  good  ears  often  fluctuate  in  their  apprecia- 
tion of  sounds  which  are  still  unfamiliar  and  difficult  to  them. 
They  hear  the  sound  vary  from  word  to  word,  and  pride  them- 
selves on  what  they  imagine  to  be  their  superior  powers  of  dis- 
crimination ;  but  when  the  sound  has  become  really  familiar,  this 
apparent  fluctuation  ceases. 

340.  On  the  whole,  those  who  have  a  moderately  good 
ear  are  the  best :  those  who  take  some  time  to  acquire  a 


124  THE   TEACHING   OF   PHONETICS 

thorough  and  easy  command  of  a  new  sound,  but  who 
always  get  it  in  the  end,  and  do  not  forget  it  again  in  a  few 
days,  which  is  often  the  weak  side  of  the  abnormally 
quick  ear. 

341.  The  question  is  often  debated,  whether  a  musical  ear 
is  a  help  in  phonetics,  apart  from  its  self-evident  use  in  the 
study   of  intonation   and   the   pitch  of  resonance-cavities. 
There   can   be   little   doubt   that   those  who  have  a  good 
musical  ear — especially,  perhaps,  those  rare  ones  who  have 
an  ear  for  absolute  pitch — are  generally  good  at  discrimi- 
nating  speech -sounds.     A  musical  training — especially  in 
singing — also   develops   the   appreciation   of  good  tone  in 
voice-production.     A  knowledge  of  music   is,  in  short,   a 
great  help  to  the  phonetician  as  well  as  the  elocutionist — 
and  in  many  ways  besides  those  already  indicated.     Those 
who  take  it  up  with  this  in  view  will  do  well  to  confine 
themselves  definitely  to  singing  and  the  piano,  which  sup- 
plement each  other  perfectly,  care  being  taken  always  to 
subordinate  the  latter  to  the  former. 

Ear-training :  Phonetic  Dictation. 

342.  The  best  training  in  the  recognition  of  sounds  by 
ear — apart  from  the  still  better  but  less  systematic  training 
afforded  by  language-study — is  phonetic  dictation.     Phonetic 
dictation  should,  of  course,  always  begin  with  the  sounds  of 
the  native  language,  first  in  series  of  isolated  strong-stressed 
words,  such  as  the  numerals  or  the  days  of  the  week,  and 
then  in  short  colloquial  sentences.     The  phonetic  symbols 
with  which  the  pupils  write  down  what  is  dictated  to  them 
must  at  first  be  the  simplest  possible  Broad  Romic  notation 
of  the  language  that  is  used. 

343.  The  normal  method  of  correcting  the  dictations  and 
returning  them  to  their  writers  at  the  beginning  of  the  next 
lesson  with  the  necessary  corrections  and  comments  should, 


EAR-TEAINING :    PHONETIC  DICTATION     125 

especially  in  dealing  with  slow  or  diffident  pupils,  be  pre- 
ceded by  a  course  of  what  may  be  called  '  unseen  dictation ' 
— that  is,  unseen  by  the  teacher.  He  dictates  a  word  or 
group  of  words,  slowly  and  distinctly  several  times  over, 
pauses  a  little,  and  then  himself  writes  the  correct  phonetic 
transcription  on  the  blackboard,  waits  till  the  pupils  have 
verified  or  corrected  what  they  have  written,  and  then 
dictates  a  further  instalment  of  his  text. 

344.  Phonetic  dictation  is  stimulating  to  the  pupils,  and 
affords  the  teacher  a  ready  and  sure  method  of  testing  not 
only  their  ear,  but  also  their  general  intelligence,  as  well  as 
their  knowledge  of  phonetics,  and  their  power  of  handling 
symbols  and  notation,  which  is  almost  as  important  for  the 
phonetician  as  for  the  mathematician. 

345.  The  hopeless  blundering  of  otherwise  intelligent  and 
educated  pupils  in  their  first  attempts  at  phonetic  dictation 
is  a  continual  source  of  unwelcome  surprise   not  only  to 
themselves  but  sometimes  even  to  their  teacher — accustomed 
as  he  is  to  the  total  want  of  the  power  of  observation  which 
is  the  result  of  the  current  method  of  learning  languages 
by  eye  instead  of  by  ear.     But  it  must,  in  justice  to  the 
pupils,  be  observed  that  many  of  their  earlier  mistakes  are 
the  result  of  the  inevitable  intruding  associations  of  the  nomic 
forms. 

346.  With  those  who  have  prepared  themselves  by  an 
extensive  reading  of  texts  in  Broad  Eomic,  phonetic  dictation 
becomes  mainly  a  matter  of  memory  and  visual  association, 
till  at  last  it  becomes  almost  as  mechanical  a   process  as 
writing  from  dictation  in  nomic  spelling — although  by  that 
time  the  pupil  will  certainly  have  acquired  a  very  respectable 
knowledge  of  the  phonetics  of  the  language. 

347.  A  more  advanced  stage  may  then  be  entered  on : 
that   of  adding  stress-  and  intonation-marks,    the   former 
being  most  conveniently  written  above  the  symbols  of  the 
sounds  on  which  the  stress  begins  instead  of  before  them, 


126  THE   TEACHING   OF  PHONETICS 

for  which  there  is  often  not  room.     The   point   may   be 
written  as  a  vertical  stroke. 

348.  The  most  effectual  check  on  the  mechanical  re- 
production of  visualized  phonetic  spellings  is  'nonsense 
dictation  '.  The  nonsense-words  required  are  easily  obtained 
by  writing  ordinary  words  backwards,  with  such  further 
alterations  as  may  be  required  to  smooth  over  impossible 
or  otherwise  objectionable  sound-combinations  and  sound- 
positions.  The  following  is  an  easy  nonsense  poem  made 
up  of  English  sounds,  together  with  x  :  — 

a  maas  va  fail. 

let  iim  tonni  luf  nom  zrabmen, 

failzi  tebna  itmi  mied  ; 
ofotS  lous  zided  teS  zubmals, 

daen  zrjij?  tonaa  tof  eiS  miis. 

fail  zilie,  failzi  tsina, 

daenetS  veiag  ziton  stiloug; 
tsudautS  taa  ot  tsrad  tsinaetie, 

zovton  nrakoups  uuteS  lous. 

telsa  neSib  p^ne  irjuud, 

tSiv  etaax  ref  ini  teif  ; 
lits  rjiviijta,  lits  qijuusep, 
rebeil  daanet  teiv. 


349.  When  the  phonetic  transcription  of  the  native 
language  has  been  thoroughly  mastered,  phonetic  dictation 
may  be  given  in  French  and  German,  beginning  with  the 
latter,  if  already  familiar  to  the  pupils,  as  being  much 
the  easier.  Here  the  patience  of  the  teacher  will  be  sorely 
tried  by  the  mechanical  way  in  which  many  of  them  will 
transfer  transcriptions  of  English  sounds  to  foreign  sounds 
which  they  do  not  fit.  Thus,  if  he  has  taught  them  to 


EAR-TRAINING:    PHONETIC    DICTATION     127 

reproduce  faithfully  his  own  diphthongic  pronunciation  of 
ii  and  uu,  he  must  be  prepared  to  find  them  transcrib- 
ing sie  sind  gut  with  zij  zint  guwt,  even  after  he  has 
indirectly  warned  them  against  it. 

350.  Phonetic  dictation  in  a  foreign  language  unknown 
to  the  pupils  is  risky,  even  if  the  teacher's  command  of  it 
is  as  perfect  as  he  assumes  it  to  be,  and  it  is  one  with  a 
comparatively   simple    sound-system,    such    as   Finnish   or 
one  of  the  Polynesian  languages. 

351.  The  difficulty  of  writing  phonetically  from  dictation 
in  a  language  whose  sound-system  is  not  already  familiar 
to  the  writer  depends,  however,  mainly  on  the  degree  of 
'  narrowness '   of   the    notation    employed.     The   difficulty 
may  be  reduced  to  a  minimum  by  allowing  the  pupils  to 
extemporize   a    compromise    between    Narrow  and   Broad 
Romic,  or  to  employ  such  a  transliteration  as  that  of  the 
Association    Phonetique.     To   write    from    such   dictation 
with   a    minutely    accurate    scientific    notation   would   be 
beyond   the  powers   of   any   but    an   exceptionally   gifted 
and  long-trained  student.     The  only  reasonable  ear-test  of 
advanced  pupils  is  the  recognition  and  correct  naming  of 
isolated  sounds  or  short  and  simple  combinations  of  sounds 
pronounced  to  them  several  times  over  by  the  teacher  or 
examiner. 

Helps. 

352.  Of  all  external  helps  in  teaching  phonetics,  diagrams 
of  the  organs  of  speech  and  their  positions  are  the  most 
important.     It  is  desirable  that  the  teacher  should  be  able 
to  supplement  the  ready-made  ones  with  those  which  he 
draws  himself  on  the  blackboard.     Some  learn  less  easily 
from  diagrams  than  others.     To  such  pupils  models  appeal 
more  than  diagrams  ;  but  they  are  of  little  use  in  teaching 
the  actual  positions. 

As  regards   apparatus,  the  phonograph   is   often  useful 


128  THE   TEACHING  OF  PHONETICS 

in  dealing  with  points  of  synthesis,  especially  intonation 
(§  283)  and  organic  basis. 

353.  When   instrumental   phonetics   is   introduced   into 
elementary  teaching  it  generally  degenerates  into  what  may 
be  called  '  toy  phonetics ',  which,  however,  has  its  uses  :  the 
bell  of  the  indicateur  often  serves  to  stimulate  the  flagging 
energies  of  a  dull  or  inattentive  class. 

But,  after  all,  the  use  of  such  external  stimuli  means 
only  so  much  time  and  energy  taken  from  the  real  business 
of  the  class ;  which  is,  to  learn  to  isolate,  analyse  organic- 
ally, and  distinguish  by  ear  as  many  sounds  as  possible.  In 
most  cases  the  gain  is  not  enough  to  compensate  the  loss. 

Necessity  of  individual  attention. 

354.  Practical  phonetics,  like  music,  cannot  be  taught 
successfully  without  special  attention  to  the  needs  of  each 
pupil.      Lectures  to  classes   of  a  hundred  or  more  serve, 
from  this  point  of  view,  mainly  to  stimulate  interest  and  to 
indicate  lines  of  study,  and,  to  some  extent,  lay  a  founda- 
tion   by   describing    sounds   with   which   the   hearers   are 
already  familiar.     Even  a  class  of  not  more  than  thirty  is 
too   large  for  thorough  practical  work,  unless  it  is   com- 
posed of  naturally  gifted  and  earnest  students  speaking  the 
same  language.     The  best  results  are  obtained  with  a  class 
of  not  more  than  twelve.     Some  learn  better  in  such  a  class 
than  by  private  tuition,  partly  because  it  is  more  stimu- 
lating, partly  because  hearing  the  sounds  uttered  by  a  variety 
of  voices  gives  a  wider  and  firmer  grasp  of  them,  and  makes 
them  more  easy  of  recognition.     From  this  point  of  view 
a  mixed-language  class — one   composed  partly  of  natives, 
partly  of  speakers  of  various  foreign  languages  or  dialects — 
is  preferable  to  a  one-language  (one-dialect)  class ;  although, 
on  the  other  hand,  more  rapid  progress  will  be  made  in  the 
latter. 


129 

Time. 

355.  The  time  required  for  a  complete  elementary  train- 
ing in  phonetics  suitable  for  language-teachers  and  elocu- 
tionists, and  others  to  whom  it  is  only  a  preparatory  subject, 
is  a  year  at  the  very  least. 

356.  The   first   term  would    be  devoted   mainly  to   the 
isolation,  analysis,  and  notation  first  of  the  native  sounds  of 
the  pupils,  and  then  of  those  unfamiliar  sounds  which  they 
would  be  able  easily  to  deduce  from  their  native  ones.     The 
explanation  of  general  principles  and  the  classification  of 
sounds  would  be  strictly  subordinated  to  this  preliminary 
training. 

In  the  second  term  the  whole  body  of  sounds  would  be 
studied  more  or  less  in  individual  detail  according  to  their 
relative  importance  from  the  pupils'  special  point  of  view. 

In  the  third  term  the  study  of  synthesis  would  be  com- 
pleted ;  much  of  it  would  necessarily  have  been  given  in 
the  two  preceding  terms.  Then  the  phonetic  structure  of 
different  languages  would  be  studied  in  detail.  Continual 
revision  of  the  sounds  would  go  on  during  the  whole  course, 
for  sounds  cannot  be  practically  acquired  without  incessant 
repetition. 

357.  A  three  years'  course  would  be  the  minimum  for 
those  who  take  phonetics  as  a  preparation  for  the  science  of 
language   generally,   or  its   applications  to  historical   and 
comparative  philology  and  other  special  branches   of  lin- 
guistic investigation,  practical  as  well  as  theoretical ;  as  also 
for  those  who  make  a  speciality  of  the  teaching  of  phonetics 
itself,  elementary  as  well  as  advanced. 

The  first  year  would  cover  the  same  ground  as  the  course 
already  described. 

In  the  second  year  everything  would  be  revised  more  in 
detail  wherever  necessary  or  advisable.  At  the  same  time 
the  history  and  literature  of  phonetics  would  be  critically 
studied,  together  with  the  principles  of  historical  and  com- 


130  THE  TEACHING  OF  PHONETICS 

parative  phonology  ;  and  the  phonetic  structure  of  a  variety 
of  languages  would  be  investigated  by  the  more  advanced 
students  in  the  seminary. 

In  the  third  year  the  students  would  begin  to  specialize, 
some  devoting  themselves  mainly  to  the  applications  of 
phonetics  to  dialectology,  language-teaching,  &c.,  others  to 
elocution  and  the  applications  of  phonetics  to  literature, 
others  again  to  instrumental  phonetics,  others  to  phonology 
and  the  other  applications  of  phonetics  to  the  historical 
study  of  language.  Others  again  would  concentrate  them- 
selves on  special  lines  of  research  dealing  with  the  pronun- 
ciation and  phonology  of  some  one  language  or  dialect  or 
group  of  languages  or  dialects. 

358.  It  must  always  be  borne  in  mind  that  phonetics  can 
only  be  acquired  gradually,  by  a  slow  process  of  graduated 
systematic  training.      Phonetics   cannot   be   crammed   up 
from  textbooks  :  learning  definitions  by  heart  is  not  learning 
phonetics. 

359.  In  fact,  when  we   consider   that   the    old   Italian 
singers  often  spent  six  or  more  years  in  qualifying  them- 
selves to  appear  in  public,  we  can  hardly — making  eveiy 
allowance  for  the  time  saved  by  improved  methods  and 
apparatus — assign  less  to  an  ideal  scheme  of  voice-training 
in  the  widest  sense  of  the  word  :  one  which  aims  at  giving 
the   student  a   complete  and   absolute   control  of  all   the 
resources   of  his  voice  not  only  phonetically,  but  also  as 
regards  voice -production  and  elocution. 

Examining  in  Phonetics. 

360.  Examinations  are  generally  admitted  to  be  evils — 
necessary,  perhaps,  but  still  evils.     And  all  the  objections 
to  them  apply  with  tenfold  force  in  the  case  of  a  subject  like 
phonetics,  in  which  written  examinations  can  never  take 
the  place  of  oral,  in  which  glib  theory  cannot  be  accepted 
as  an  equivalent  for  practical  thoroughness  and  viva  voce 


EXAMINING  IN  PHONETICS  131 

readiness.  The  general  unsettledness  of  phonetics,  the  wide 
divergencies  in  terminology  and  notation  as  well  as  in 
classification  and  theory  are  further  obstacles.  The  dearth 
of  competent  and  impartial  examiners  is  another.  The 
low  standard  of  efficiency  in  teachers  as  well  as  pupils 
brings  further  embarrassment  and  doubt  to  the  conscientious 
examiner. 

361.  This  raises  the  question  whether  in  the  face  of  all 
these  difficulties  the  best  advice  with  regard  to  examining 
in   phonetics   would   not  be — don't !     As   regards   modern 
languages  and  elocution  it  certainly  seems  safest — at  present, 
at  least — simply  to   go  by  results :   in  modern  languages, 
not   to   examine  in  phonetics,   even  if  it  is  made   an  in- 
tegral and  definite  part  of  the  teaching,  but  to  insist  all 
the  more  rigorously  on  a  certain  standard  of  correctness 
and  ease  in  the  colloquial  pronunciation  of  the  language. 
There  are   other  considerations  which  point  in   the   same 
direction.     It   cannot   be   denied    that    some    methods   of 
phonetic  instruction — especially  those  carried  on  by  means 
of    apparatus — so    far    from    improving    a    pronunciation 
acquired  by  imitation  and  direct  phonetic   methods,  often 
cause  positive  deterioration.     In  short,  the  best  teacher  is 
not  the  most  fanatical  adherent  of  this  or  that  method  or 
notation,  but  the  one  who  elicits  the  best  pronunciation  from 
his  pupils. 

362.  Although  viva  voce  must  always  predominate  in  all 
phonetic  examinations  that  lay  claim  to  any  thoroughness, 
this  does  not  mean  that  paper  work  is  to  be  entirely  excluded. 
It  is  evident,  for  one  thing,  that  phonetic  dictation  ought  to 
form  part  of  every  examination  in  phonetics — even  the  most 
elementary.     But  there  may  be  conditions  which  exclude 
the  living  voice.     Under  these  circumstances  the  place  of 
phonetic  dictation  must  be  taken  by  the  setting  of  a  passage 
to  be  transcribed  from  nomic  into  phonetic  spelling. 

363.  In  setting  papers — whether  oral  or  written — for  an 

i  2 


132  THE   TEACHING   OF   PHONETICS 

examination  in  phonetics,  the  first  thing  is  to  be  sure  that 
the  questions  are  intelligible :  especially  that  the  terminology 
and  notation  used  by  the  examiner  are  familiar  to  the 
candidates.  Examinations  in  phonetics  must  not  be  tyran- 
nically used  as  a  means  of  cramming  one  particular  school  of 
phonetics  or  one  special  notation  down  unwilling  throats. 
This  does  not  apply  to  a  teacher  examining  his  own  pupils, 
or  other  conditions  of  a  similar  kind.  But  even  in  these 
cases  it  is  better  to  leave  everything  open  as  far  as  possible  : 
'Transliterate  the  following  passage  into  any  consistent 
phonetic  notation,'  &c. 

364.  The  opposite  extreme  of  setting  leading  questions 
must   as  carefully  be  avoided.     The   self- interpreting  ter- 
minology of  the  English  school  lends  itself  to  this  with 
peculiar  and   dangerous    facility,   as   in    '  define   and   give 
examples    of    stopped    consonants — front   vowels'.     There 
would   be   no   objection  to  such  questions   if  the  answers 
always  embodied  a  complete  list  of  the  sounds  required. 
But  what  is  the  lenient,  soft-hearted  examiner  to  do  with 
such  evasions  as  these  :  '  A  stopped  consonant  is  a  consonant 
formed  with  stoppage — with  closure  of  the   mouth — with 
partial   stoppage — with   imperfect  closure   followed   by  an 
explosion — with  closure  of  the  glottis,'  the  only  examples 
given,  perhaps,  being  c  and  m,  without  any  hint  whether  the 
former  is   to  be  taken  phonetically  or  nomically?     Or  it 
may  happen  that  the  candidate  gives  a  certain  number  of 
approximately  correct  examples,  and  then  adds  one  more 
to  show  that  he  has  not  realized  the  meaning  of  his  definition, 
and  that  all  that  precedes  is  pure  mechanical  cram. 

365.  All  this  may  be  avoided  by  putting  the  questions  in 
an  indirect  form,  thus  : — 

(1)  How  many  consonants  are  there — are  pronounced — 
are  sounded  in  the  following  words :  sing,  quit,  wretch  .  .  .  ? 

(2)  Classify   the    above    consonants,    and    describe   their 
formation. 


EXAMINING   IN  PHONETICS  133 

Candidates  who  do  quite  respectably  in  a  paper  of  leading 
questions  and  vague  generalities  often  break  down  utterly 
with  questions  of  this  kind,  even  when  they  are  so  elemen- 
tary that  the  young  examiner  is  half  ashamed  to  set  them  ; 
it  may  perhaps  turn  out  that  while  the  majority  of  the 
class  are  familiar  with  the  distinction  of  narrow  and  wide 
vowels,  know  what  the  glottis  is,  and  can  define  organic 
basis,  they  are  still  so  completely  the  slaves  of  the  written 
symbol  that  they  regard  the  i  in  time  as  a  non-diphthongal 
long  vowel,  and  give  ae  in  Caesar  as  an  example  of  an 
English  diphthong  in  the  phonetic  sense. 


BIBLIOGKAPHY 

366.  The  following  bibliography  is  intended  as  a  guide 
to  further  study,  not  as  an  exhaustive  list  for  reference :  it 
aims  only  at  bringing  before  the  student  those  books  which 
will  be  directly  useful  to  him  at  the  outset.     Full  biblio- 
graphies will  be  found  in  many  of  the  works  mentioned 
below. 

367.  When  the  beginner  has  thoroughly  assimilated  the 
contents  of  this  little  book,  he  should  go  on  to  my  Primer 
of  Phonetics  (Oxford,  1906 3),  which  differs  from  the  present 
work  in  dealing  with  the  subject  from  a  more  general  point 
of  view  and  with  a  greater  range  of  sounds  and  also  more 
concisely  and  schematically,  the  phonetic  information  being 
given  mainly  in  the  form  of  an  explanation  of  the  classifica- 
tion and  notation  embodied  in  the  Organic  (Revised  Visible 
Speech)   alphabet,    which   is   employed    throughout,    with 
occasional  Narrow  Eomic  transcriptions,  the  Broad  Eomic 
notations  being  employed  only  in  the  texts  at  the  end  of 
the  book. 

368.  At  the  same  time — or  perhaps  before — he  should 
thoroughly  familiarize  himself  with  the  phonetic  structure 
and  phonetic  notation  of  English  by  reading  the  texts  in 
my  Primer  of  Spoken  English  (Oxford,  18952),  paying  special 
attention  to  the  laws  of  gradation  and  sentence-stress.     In 
my  Elementarbuch  des  gesprochenen  Englisch  (Oxford,  1891 3) 
he  will  find  the  same  grammatical  introduction,  but  different 
texts,  more  elementary  and  colloquial  on  the  whole  than 
those  in  the  other  book,  and  better  suited  for  foreigners ;  in 
the  Elementarbuch  division  into    'stress-groups'  takes  the 
place  of  the  traditional  word  -division,  which  is  retained  in 
the   Primer;    stress-division,    though   less   convenient   and 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  135 

practical  in  itself  than  word-division,  has  advantages  of  its 
own :  it  is  instructive,  and  often  useful  in  curing  foreigners 
and  illiterate  readers  of  the  habit  of  pausing  at  the  end  of 
words  or  in  the  middle  of  a  group  of  closely  connected 
words. 

369.  The  contrasting  phonetic  system  of  0.  Jespersen 
should  then  be  studied,  his  books  being  taken  in  the 
following  order :  Lelirbuch  der  Phonetik  (Leipzig,  1904) ; 
Plionetisclie  Grundfragen  (Leipzig,  1904) ;  Fonetik  (Copen- 
hagen, 1897).  The  second  deals  with  the  following 
subjects:  Laut  und  Schrift,  Lautschrift,  Die  beste  Aus- 
sprache,  Akustisch  oder  genetisch?,  Systematisierung  der 
Sprachlaute,  Untersuchungsinethoden,  Zur  Lautgesetzfrage. 
The  third  is  the  original  Danish  work,  of  which  the  two 
first  are  condensed  extracts,  in  which  much  is  omitted  that 
is  of  special  interest  only  to  Scandinavian  readers.  The 
most  characteristic  feature  of  Jespersen 's  books  is  their 
impartial  criticism  of  current  views  and  methods.  There 
is  a  certain  aloofness  in  his  attitude  towards  his  pre- 
decessors and  contemporaries,  the  weak  side  of  which 
appears  in  his  often  unnecessary  and  highly  confusing 
deviations  from  traditional  terminology  and  arrangement, 
as  if  he  were  determined  to  be  original  at  all  costs.  Thus 
he  reverses  the  English  arrangement 

throat — back — front — poi  n  t — lip 

in  which  the  stream  of  breath  with  which  sounds  are 
formed  is  assumed  to  move  in  the  same  direction  as  that 
in  which  we  write,  that  is,  from  left  to  right,  so  that  in  all 
diagrams  and  tables  the  back  of  the  mouth  is  put  on  the  left 
side,  it  being  further  assumed  that  this  arrangement  is 
only  to  be  reversed  when  there  is  special  reason  for  doing 
so — as  may  sometimes  be  the  case,  for  instance,  in  drawing 
a  section  of  the  mouth  on  the  blackboard.  It  is  highly 
desirable  to  adopt  one  uniform  standard  order,  for  experi- 
ence shows  that  those  who  have  accustomed  themselves 


136  BIBLIOGEAPHY 

to  the  one  find  it  difficult  to  think  in  the  other.  Jespersen 
carries  his  reversal  to  such  an  extent  that  he  does  not  get  to 
the  fundamental  distinction  of  breath  and  voice  till  long 
after  he  has  given  a  tediously  and  superfluously  minute 
analysis  and  an  elaborate  notation  of  the  positions  of  the 
lips.  There  are  other  innovations  in  his  books  which  are  of 
a  less  superficial  and  petty  character,  some  of  which  cannot 
fail  to  stimulate  thought  and  criticism  of  hitherto  accepted 
views  even  if  they  are  not  generally  accepted.  One  great 
drawback  to  the  use  of  his  works  is  the  analphabetic 
notation  (§  305)  employed  in  them :  it  is  ingenious,  but 
cumbrous  and  unpractical,  and  impossible  to  remember 
by  those  who  have  accustomed  themselves  to  a  different 
arrangement.  Jespersen's  works,  like  those  of  most  Conti- 
nental writers,  deal  more  fully  with  the  consonants  than 
the  vowels :  his  treatment  of  the  latter  is  the  least  satis- 
factory part  of  his  system. 

370.  E.  Sievers  in  his  Grundzuge  der  Lautphysiologie 
(Leipzig,  1901 5)  approaches  the  subject  from  the  special 
point  of  view  of  the  comparative  Aryan  philologist ;  and, 
accordingly,  devotes  a  special  section  to  a  discussion  of  the 
laws  of  sound-change.  The  treatment  of  phonetics  itself 
is  less  concrete  and  definite  than  in  the  works  already 
considered,  especially  as  regards  the  classification  of  sounds ; 
the  author  is  one  of  those  who  regard  with  distrust  any 
attempt  to  construct  a  general  scheme  for  all  languages. 
In  this  way  Sievers'  book  will  serve  as  a  corrective  to 
the  schematic  tendencies  of  the  English  school  and  of 
Jespersen.  The  abstract  point  of  view  from  which  Sievers 
regards  phonetics  often  makes  his  arguments  difficult  to 
follow.  A  characteristic  feature  of  this  book  is  the  fullness 
with  which  the  phenomena  of  synthesis  are  treated,  especially 
as  regards  force  and  stress,  intonation  being  less  adequately 
treated.  The  whole  book  is  full  of  acute  observations  of 
details  of  pronunciation  in  various  languages. 


BIBLIOGKAPHY  137 

371.  Sievers'  antagonism  to  general  systematization  natu- 
rally leads  him  to  eclecticism,  especially  when  he  comes  to 
discuss  the  classification  of  the  vowels.     This  tendency  is 
still  more  marked  in  the  works  of  W.  Vietor,  especially  in 
his   Elemente  der  PJwnetik  des  Deutschen,   Englischen  und 
Franzosisclien  (Leipzig,   19045).     Vietor's  point   of  view  is 
mainly  that  of  the  modern  language  teacher  of  the  extreme 
type.     He  is  an  uncompromising  antagonist  of  the  English 
vowel-system,  which  he  condemns  as  a  whole  without  having 
any  practical  knowledge  of  it  on  such  insufficient  grounds  as 
Bell's  carelessness  in  the  choice  of  key- words,  and  my  modi- 
fication of  my  earlier  views  through  wider  knowledge  and 
more  mature  thought ;  another  of  his  arguments  is  that  it 
is  impossible  to  unround  vowels.     A  peculiar  feature  of  his 
treatment  of  his  own  language  is  the  extreme  artificiality  of 
his  standard   of  pronunciation.     But   his   book   has   some 
practical  advantages  over  those  already  mentioned  :  it  gives 
good  diagrams  of  the  organs  of  speech,  a  comparative  table 
of  the  different  systems  of  phonetic  transcription,  and  full 
accounts  of  the  different  phonetic  systems.     One  result  of 
his  point  of  view  is  that  he  gives  long  lists  of  words  to  show 
the  correspondence  between  sound  and  nomic  symbol  in  the 
orthographies  of  English,  French,  and  German. 

372.  One  of  the  most  distinguished  of  the  older  generation 
of  practical  phoneticians  is  the  Norwegian,  J.  Storm,  whose 
knowledge  of  the  phonetic  structure  of  the  chief  European 
languages  is  probably  unrivalled.     Unfortunately  he  has  not 
published  any  complete  system  of  his  own  ;  but  the  advanced 
student  will  find  his  Englische  Philologie  (Leipzig,  1892-6 2) 
a  mine  of  wealth  in  the  sections  dealing  either  directly  or 
indirectly  with  phonetics.     Storm's  specialities  are  the  accu- 
rate comparison  of  sounds  in  different  languages,  and  the 
fineness  of  his  ear  for  distinctions  of  synthesis,  especially 
intonation. 

373.  The  most  convenient  introduction  to  the  phonetic 


138  BIBLIOGEAPHY 

system  and  alphabet  of  the  Association  Phoneiique  is 
P.  Passy's  Les  Sons  du  Franqais  (Paris,  1899s),  of  which 
an  English  translation  has  lately  been  published  by  the 
Clarendon  Press,  Oxford.  This  little  book  is  deservedly 
popular  on  account  of  the  clear  way  in  which  it  states  the 
general  principles  of  phonetics ;  the  author's  point  of  view 
borders,  indeed,  somewhat  on  that  of  the  dilettante.  Thus 
in  his  anxiety  to  make  his  vowel-system  as  easy  as  possible 
he  practically  ignores  the  distinction  of  narrow  and  wide, 
although  he  accepts  it  in  theory,  and  simplifies  his  scheme 
in  other  ways  as  well  so  much  that  at  last  it  becomes  almost 
a  reversion  to  that  of  the  sixteenth-century  Wallis.  For 
the  alphabet  of  the  Association  Phonetique  see  §§  10  a,  312. 

374.  For  phonetic  French  texts  the  learner  may  be  referred 
to  Beyer-Passy,  Elementarbuch  des  gesprochenen  Franzosisch 
(Cothen,  1905  2),  and  P.  Passy,  Le  Frangais  Parle  (Leipzig, 
1897).     Neither  of  these  books  gives  the  colloquial  language 
except  in  texts  dealing  exclusively  with  child  life  and  the 
school-room  ;  the  latter  book  is  composed  entirely  of  literary 
texts.     The  student  of  adult  conversational   French   must 
still  painfully  scrape  his  knowledge  together  from  unpho- 
netic  dialogue-books,  plays,  and  novels.     Another   serious 
obstacle  is  the  want  of  any  adequate  and  practically  useful 
statement  of  the  laws  of  French  intonation.     The  only  col- 
lection of  texts  in  which  the  intonation  is  marked  throughout 
is  the  one  last  mentioned. 

375.  The  student  of  German  is  not  nearly  so  well  off  for 
phonetic  texts.     Vietor's  Deutsches  Lcscbuch  in  Lautschrift 
(Leipzig,  1899)  gives  childish  and  often  extravagantly  short 
and  disconnected  texts  in  an  artificial  pronunciation. 

376.  The  learner  will  find  a  constant  supply  of  phonetic 
texts  in  the  chief  European  languages — and  others  besides — 
in  the  Mattre  Phonetique,  the  organ  of  the  Association  Pho- 
netique Internationale,   edited  by  Dr.   P.  Passy  (address  : 
Fonetik,  Bour-la-Reine,  France). 


BIBLIOGKAPHY  139 

377.  For  phonetic  shorthand  see  my  Manual  of  Current 
Shorthand  (Oxford,  1892).     This  system  can  be  applied  to  the 
writing  of  all  languages  both  phonetically,  with  any  degree 
of  accuracy,  and  in  an   exact   reproduction    of  its   nomic 
orthography. 

378.  For  the  principles  of  the  application  of  phonetics  to 
the  learning  and  teaching  of  languages  the  student  may  con- 
sult my  Practical  Study  of  Languages  (London,  1899),  and  for 
a  different  and  in  some  respects  less  conservative  point  of 
view,  0.  Jespersen,  Hoiv  to  learn  a  foreign  language  (London, 
1904). 

379.  For  phonology  and  the  laws  of  sound-change  the 
student  may  be  referred  to  the  already-mentioned  book  of 
Sievers,  to  my  History  of  English  Sounds  (Oxford,  1888 2), 
and  P.  Passy,  Les  Changements  Phone'tiques  (Paris,  1890). 

380.  For  the  history  of  English  sounds  and  pronuncia- 
tion the  student  may  use  sections  of  my  Primer  of  Historical 
English  Grammar  (Oxford,  1893)  as  an  introduction  to  the 
above-mentioned  History  of  English  Sounds. 

381.  For  the  pronunciation  of  Chaucer  and  phonetic  tran- 
scriptions of  Middle  English  texts  see  my  Second  Middle 
English  Primer  (Oxford,  1905  2).     The  same  for  Shakespeare 
will   be    found    in    W.    Vietor,    Shakespere    Pronunciation 
(London,  1906). 

382.  Phonetic  methods  are  also  applied  to  the  study  of 
Old  English  in  my  First  Steps  in  Anglo-Saxon  (Oxford,  1897) 
and  other  books. 

383.  A  convenient  summary  of  the  methods  and  litera- 
ture of  instrumental  phonetics  will  be  found  in  E.  W.  Scrip- 
ture, Elements  of  Experimental  Phonetics  (New  York,  1902), 
although  this  work  is  from  the  linguistic  phonetician's  point 
of  view  inadequate.     Scripture  reproduces  the  diagrams  of 
vowel-positions  given  by  Grandgent  and  Atkinson. 


NOTES   ON  THE   TEXTS 

255.  3.  sekand   or   sekijd.  9.  wenzdl   is  the   older 
pronunciation. 

256.  2.  intend = in  -tend.       3.  t$8et=-tfoet.        21.  put  of 
tuw  lorj  with  equal  strong  stress  on  all  four  words  in  slow 
speech  ;  in  quick  speech  more  stress  is  put  on  the  second 
word.     It  must,  of  course,  be  understood   that   there  are 
infinite  gradations  between  the  two  extremes  put  of  and 
:put   of,  depending  partly  on  speed,   partly  on  shades  of 
meaning  and  emphasis. 

257.  2.  mdust  might  also  be  written  -moust,  which  would 
imply  weak  stress — but  not  quite  so  weak  as  in  mdust— 
with  preservation  of  the  back  formation  of  the  o.     Here, 
again,  various  gradations  of  stress  and  tongue-shifting  are 
possible.  3.  indl;pendans  has  medium  stress  on  the 
first  syllable  ;   it  is  the  emphatic   form  of  indi'pendans. 
5.  spoukn  :    the  n  is  n  -f  rj,  with  simultaneous  back  and 
point  stoppage  ;  a  l  careful  speaker '  would,  of  course,  make 
it  into  spoukan,  with  pure  point  n.         8.  Im-self  with 
weak  stress  on  the  second  syllable  ;  compare  Imself  =  1m 'self 
1. 16.  below.        13.  anfdunetlk=*anf6u:netlk  :  the  medium 
stress  is  the  result  of  the  word  being  used  attributively  ; 
the  normal  form  is  "anfdu-netlk.          23.  strerjjm-lrj  is  the 
most  accurate  notation  if  the  a  is  omitted,  §  149. 

258.  9.  hij  wll :  the  colloquial  form  hij  1  would  sound  in- 
congruous here,  §  250.    This  applies  also  to  wil  for  1,  259. 1 1. 

259.  15.  todz  is  the  older  pronunciation. 


Oxford:  Printed  at  the  Clarendon  Press  by  HORACE  HART,  M.A. 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

(All  books  are  in  extra  fcap  8vo  unless  otherwise  described) 

ENGLISH 

School  Dictionaries 

Concise  Etymological  Dictionary,  by  w.  w.  SKEAT. 

A  new  edition  ^1901),  rewritten  throughout  and  arranged  alpha- 
betically. Crown  8vo.  676  pp.  5s.  6d. 

Saturday  Review : — '  Mr.  Skeat's  larger  dictionary  has  estab- 
lished his  title  to  the  gratitude  of  all  scholars ;  and  of  his  smaller 
dictionary  we  can  only  say  that  it  is  not  less  useful  and  valuable. ' 

Student's  Dictionary  of  Anglo-Saxon,  by  H.  SWEET. 

Small  4to.     233  pp.,  printed  in  3  columns.     8s.  6d.  net. 

Notes  and  Queries : — '  For  the  purpose  of  the  student,  no 
work  so  trustworthy,  so  convenient,  and  so  valuable  has  seen 
the  light.' 

Concise   Dictionary  of  Middle   English,  from 

A.D.  1150  to  A.D.  1580 ;  intended  to  be  used  as  a  glossary  to  the 
Clarendon  Press  Specimens  of  English  Literature,  etc.  ;  by 
A.  L.  MAYHEW  and  W.  W.  SKEAT.  Crown  8vo.  7s.  6d. 

Dr.  Sweet's  Grammars 

New  English  Grammar,  logical  and  historical,  in  two 
parts,  sold  separately :  Part  I,  Introduction,  Phonology  and 
Accidence,  crown  8vo,  second  edition,  523  pp.,  10s.  6d.  Part  II, 
Syntax,  crown  8vo,  second  edition,  146  pp.,  3s.  6d. 

School  World:— '  As  an  English  grammar  the  book  is  of  high 
value  ;  as  an  historical  study  it  is  of  the  deepest  interest,  while 
its  clearness  and  careful  style  make  it  as  readable  to  the  literary 
man  as  to  the  grammatical  student.' 

Short  Historical  English  Grammar.    272  pp.  4s.  6d. 

Guardian: — '  In  the  best  sense  of  the  word  a  scholarly  book 
— one  that,  we  hope,  will  for  a  long  time  exercise  its  influence 
on  the  teaching  of  English.' 

Educational  Times : — '  Excellent  in  every  way.' 

Primer  of  Historical  English  Grammar,  including 

History  of  English  Phonology,  Accidence,  Composition,  and 
Derivation,  with  Specimens  of  Old,  Middle,  and  Modern  English 
added.  120  pp.  2s. 

1 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

Dr.  Sweet's  Primers  and  Readers 

First  Steps  in  Anglo-Saxon,  containing  25  pages  of 
grammar,  43  of  text,  and  40  of  explanatory  notes.  2s.  6d. 

Anglo-Saxon  Primer.  With  grammar  and  glossary. 
Eighth  edition  revised.  126  pp.  2s.  6d. 

Anglo-Saxon  Reader,  in  prose  and  verse.  With  grammar, 
metre,  notes,  and  glossary.  Seventh  edition,  revised  and 
enlarged  (1898).  Crown  8vo.  414  pp.  9s.  6d. 

A  Second  Anglo-Saxon  Reader,  archaic  and  dialectal. 
220  pp.  4s.  6d. 

Old  English  Reading  Primers,  being  supplements  to 

the  Anglo-Saxon  Readers. 

I :    Selected  Homilies  of  ^Elfric.     Second  edition.    2s. 
II :    Extracts  from  Alfred's  Orosius.    Second  edition.    2s. 

First  Middle  English  Primer,  with  grammar  and 
glossary.  Second  edition.  2s.  6d. 

Second    Middle    English   Primer:   extracts  from 

Chaucer,  with  grammar  and  glossary.    Second  edition.    2s.  6d. 

Primer  Of  Phonetics.     Third  edition  (1906).  3s.  6d. 

Educational    Times: — 'A    concise,    definite    and    practical 
primer,  eminently  the  book  for  a  beginner.' 

Primer  Of  Spoken  English.     Second  ed.  revised.    3s.  6d. 


A  Book   for  the  Beginner  in  Anglo-Saxon. 

By  J.  EARLE.     Fourth  edition  (1903).    2s.  6d. 

A  Primer  of  English  Etymology.  By  w.  w.  SKEAT. 

Fourth  and  revised  edition  (1904).    Stiff  covers.  120  pp.    Is.  6d. 

A  Primer  of  Classical  and  English  Philology 

(1905).     By  W.  W.  SKEAT.     Cloth,  2s. 
2 


ENGLISH 

Annotated  Texts 
Old  and  Middle  English 

Laurence  Minot's  Poems,  edited  by  J.  HALL.  Second 
edition.  4s.  6d. 

Gospel  of  St.  Luke  in  Anglo-Saxon,  edited  by 

J.  W.  BRIGHT.     5s. 

Selections  from  Gower's  Confessio  Amantis, 

edited  by  G.  C.  MACAULAY  (1903).     302  pp.     4s.  6d. 

Miracle  Plays,  Moralities  and  Interludes,  being 

specimens  of  the  pre-Elizabethan  drama,  edited,  with  intro- 
duction, notes,  and  glossary,  by  A.  W.  POLLARD.  Fourth 
edition  (1903),  with  ten  illustrations.  Crown  8vo.  7s.  6d. 

Specimens  of  Early  English :  with  introductions,  notes, 

and  glossarial  index. 
Part  I :   From  Old  English  Homilies  to  King  Horn  (A.D.  1150  to 

A.  D.  1300):  by  R.  MORRIS.     Second  edition.     572pp.     9s. 
Part  II :  From  Robert  of  Gloucesterio  Qower(A.v.  1298  to  A.D.  1393): 

by  R.  MORRIS  and  W .  W.  SKEAT.  Fourth  edition  revised.  530  pp. 

7s.  6d. 
Part  III :  From  the  Ploughman's  Crede  to  the  Shepheards  Calendar 

(A.D.  1394  to  A.D.  1579):   by  W.  W.  SKEAT.     Sixth  edition. 

582  pp.     7s.  6d. 

Prof.  Skeat's  editions 

The  Oxford  Chaucer,  containing  in  one  volume  the  com- 
plete text  of  Chaucer's  works ;  with  introduction  and  glossarial 
index.  Crown  8vo.  906pp.  3s.  6d.  On  India -paper,  from  5s. 

The  Minor  Poems  of  Chaucer.    With  notes,  etc. 

Crown  8vo.     Second  edition.     586  pp.     10s.  6d. 

The  Hous  of  Fame.    Crown  8vo.    ise  pp.   2s. 

The  Legend  of  Good  Women.  Crown  svo.  286  PP.  es. 

The  Prologue,  the  Knightes  Tale,  the  Nonne 

Prestes  Tale,  from  the  Canterbury  Tales.     R.  MORRIS'S  edition, 
re-edited.    324  pp.     2s.  6d. 
The  Prologue.     School  edition.     96  pp.     Is. 

The  Prioresses  Tale,  Sir  Thopas,  the  Monkes 

Tale,  Clerkes  Tale,  Squieres  Tale,  etc.  Seventh  ed.  412  pp. 
4s.  6d. 

3 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 
The  Tale  of  the  Man  of  Lawe,  the  Pardoneres 

Tale,  the  Second  Nonnes  Tale,  the  Chanouns  Yemannes  Tale, 
from  the  Canterbury  Tales.    New  edition  revised  (1904).    4s.  6d. 

Langland's   Piers   the   Plowman.     Sixth  edition. 

264  pp.     4s.  6d. 

The  Tale  of  Gamelyn.   Second  edition.   104  pp.   is.  ed. 

Wycliffe's  Bible  :  Job,  Psalms,  Proverbs,  Ecclesiastes,  and 
the  Song  of  Solomon.  3s.  6d.  The  New  Testament.  6s. 

The  Lay  of  Havelok  the  Dane  (1903).   4s.  ed. 
Pierce  the  Ploughman's  Crede  (IQOG).   105  pp.   2s. 
The  Proverbs  of  Alfred,     in  the  Press. 

The  Dream  of  the  Rood,  an  Old  English  poem  attri- 
buted to  Cynewulf.  Edited  by  ALBERT  S.  COOK.  3s.  6d. 

Elizabethan 

North's  Translation  of  Plutarch's  Coriolanus, 

Caesar,  Brutus,  and  Antonius,  edited, with  introduction  and  notes, 
by  R.  H.  CARR.     Crown  8vo.     3s.  6d.     Coriolanus  only,  Is.  6d. 

M  Ore's  Utopia,  edited,  with  introduction,  notes,  and  full 
glossary  (by  Miss  MURRAY),  by  J.  CHURTON  COLLINS  (1904). 
Crown  8vo.  3s.  6d. 

Elizabethan  Critical  Essays,  selected  and  edited  by 
GREGORY  SMITH  :  with  introduction  on  the  value  of  Elizabethan 
criticism  and  notes.  Crown  8vo,  2  vols.  12s.  net. 

Specimens  of  the  Elizabethan  Drama.  From  Lyiy 

to  Shirley,  A.D.  1580  to  A.D.  1642.     Edited,  with  introductions 
and  notes,  by  W.  H.  WILLIAMS.     Crown  8vo.     7s.  6d. 

The  Oxford  Shakespeare,  containing  the  complete  text 
of  Shakespeare's  works,  edited,  with  glossary,  by  W.  J.  CRAIG. 
3s.  6d.  1264  pp.  Crown  8vo.  On  India  paper,  from  5s. 

Select  Plays  of  Shakespeare,    stiff  covers. 

Edited  by  W.  G.  CLARK  and  W.  ALDIS  WRIGHT. 
Hamlet.     2s.  Merchant  of  Venice.     Is. 

Macbeth.     Is.  6d.  Richard  the  Second.     Is.  6d. 

Edited  by  W.  ALOIS  WRIGHT. 

As  You  Like  It.     Is.  6d.  King  John.     Is.  6d. 

Coriolanus.     2s.  6d.  King  Lear.     Is.  6d. 

Henry  the  Eighth.     2s.  Midsummer  Night's  Dream.    Is.  6d. 

Henry  the  Fifth.     2s.  Much  Ado  about  Nothing.     Is.  6d. 

Henry  the  Fourth,  Part  I.  2s.    Richard  the  Third.     2s.  6d. 
Julius  Caesar.     2s.  Tempest.     1  s.  6d. 

Twelfth  Night.     Is.  6d. 
4 


ENGLISH 

Scenes  from  Old  Play  Books,  arranged  as  an  Intro- 
duction to  Shakespeare,  by  P.  SIMPSON.  With  reproduction 
of  the  Swan  Theatre.  Crown  8vo.  3s.  6d. 

Marlowe's  Edward  1 1 ,  edited,  with  introduction  and  notes, 
by  O.  W.  TANCOCK.  Third  edition.  2s.  and  3s. 

Marlowe's  Dr.  Faustus  and  Greene's  Friar  Bacon 

and  Friar  Bimgay,  edited  by  A.  W.  WARD.  Fourth 
edition  (1901).  Crown  8vo.  448  pp.  6s.  6d. 

Spenser's  Faery  Queene,  Books  I  and  n,  with  intro- 
duction and  notes  by  G.  W.  KITCHIN,  and  glossary  by  A.  L. 
MAYHEW.  2s.  6d.  each. 

Hakluyt's  Principal  Navigations  :  being  narratives 

of  the  Voyages  of  the  Elizabethan  Seamen  to  America.  Selection 
edited  by  E.  J.  PAYNE,  containing  the  voyages  of  Gilbert, 
Hawkins,  Drake,  Frobisher,  Raleigh  and  others.  Crown  8vo, 
with  portraits.  First  and  second  series.  Second  edition.  324 
and  350  pp.  5s.  each. 

Bacon's   Advancement  of  Learning,  edited  by 

W.  Ai.nis  WRIGHT.    Crown  8vo,  with  woodcuts.    424pp.    3s.  6d. 

Shakespeare   as   a  Dramatic  Artist.    By  R.  G. 

MOULTON.    Third  edition,  enlarged.    Crown  8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Seventeenth  Century 

The  Oxford  Milton,  edited  by  H.  C.  BEECHING.  Demy 
8vo,  with  facsimiles,  7s.  6d. ;  crown  8vo,  3s.  6d. ;  on  India  paper, 
from  5s. ;  miniature  edition,  on  India  paper,  2s.  6d.  net. 

Milton's  Poems,  edited  by  R.  C.  BROWNE.     422  and  344  pp. 
Two  volumes,  6s.  6d. ;  or  separately,  vol.  I,  4s.,  vol.  II,  3s. 
Paradise  Lost  :    Book  I,  edited  by  H.  C.  BEECHING. 
Is.  6d.     Book  II,   edited  by  E.  K.  CHAMBERS.    Is.  6d. 
Together,  2s.  6d. 

SamSOn  AgOnistCS,  edited  by  J.  CHURTON  COLLINS. 
Stiff  covers.     Is. 

In  paper  covers 

Lycidas,  3d. ;  Comus,  6d. :  edited  Lycidas,  6d. ;  L" Allegro,  4d. ;  II 
by  R.  C.  BROWNE.  Penseroso,  4d. ;  Comus,  Is. ; 

edited  by  O.  ELTON. 

Areopagitica,  edited  by  J.  W.  HALES.    3s. 
5 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 


Pilgrim's  Progress,  and  Grace  Abounding, 
edited,  with  biographical  introduction  and  notes,  by  E.VENABLES. 
Second  ed.  ,  revised  by  M.  PEACOCK.  Cr.  8vo,  with  portrait.  3s.  6d. 

Holy  AVar  and  the  Heavenly  Footman,  by  M.  PEACOCK. 
3s.  6d. 

Clarendon's  Histoiy  of  the  Rebellion,  Book  vi, 

edited  by  T.  ARNOLD.   Second  edition.    Crown  8vo.    5s. 

Selections  from  Dry  den,  including  Astraea  Redux,  Annus 
Mirabilis,  Absalom  and  Achitophel,  Religio  Laici,  and  The  Hind 
and  the  Panther  :  edited  by  W.  D.  CHRISTIE.  Fifth  edition, 
revised  by  C.  H.  FIRTH.  372  pp.  3s.  6d. 

Dryden's  Essays,  selected  and  edited  by  W.  P.  KER  (1900). 
Two  volumes  crown  8vo.  404  and  324  pp.  10s.  6d. 

Dramatic  Poesy,  edited  by  T.  ARNOLD.    Third  edition 
(1904)  revised  by  W.  T.  ARNOLD.    3s.  6d. 


Milton's  Prosody,  by  R.  BRIDGES.    Crown  8vo.    5s.  net 

Eighteenth  Century 

Locke's  Conduct  of  the  Understanding,  edited  by 

T.  FOWLER.     Third  edition.     2s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Addison's  papers  in  the  Spec- 
tator. By  T.  ARNOLD.  560  pp.  4s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Steele,  being  papers  from  the  Tatler, 
Spectator,  and  Guardian,  edited,  with  introduction,  by  AUSTIN 
DOBSON.  Second  ed.  Cr.  8vo,  with  portrait.  556  pp.  7s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Swift,  edited,  with  biographical  intro- 
duction and  notes,  by  Sir  HENRY  CRAIK,  containing  the  greater 
part  of  Tale  of  a  Tub,  Gulliver's  Travels,  Battle  of  the  Books,  etc. 
Two  volumes  crown  8vo,  484  and  488  pp.  7s.  6d.  each. 

Selections   from    Pope,  with  introductions  and  notes  by 
MARK   PATTISON.      (1)   Essay  on  Man,  sixth   edition,    Is.  6d. 
(2)  Satires  and  Epistles,  fourth  edition,  9s. 
6 


ENGLISH 


's  Hermit.     Paper  covers.    2d. 

Thomson's  Seasons  and  the  Castle  of  Indolence, 

edited  by  J.  LOGIE  ROBERTSON.   4s.  6d.   Also  Castle  of  Indolence 
separately.     Is.  6d. 

Selections  from  Gray,  edited  by  EDMUND  GOSSE.     3s. 
With  additional  notes  for  schools  by  F.  WATSON.     Is.  6d. 

Gray's  Elegy  and  Ode  on  Eton  College.    2d. 

Selections  from   Goldsmith,  edited,  with  introduction 
and  notes,  by  AUSTIN  DOBSON.    3s.  6d. 

Goldsmith's    Traveller,    edited  by  G.  BIRKBECK   HILL. 
Stiff  covers.      Is.      The  Deserted  Village.   Paper  covers.  2d. 

Johnson's  RaSSelaS,   edited,  with  introduction  and  notes, 
by  G.  BIRKBECK  HILL.     Cloth  flush,  2s. ;  also  4s.  6d. 

Rasselas,  and  Lives  of  Dryden  and  Pope, 

edited  by  A.  MILNES.   4s.  6d.       Lives  separately.   2s.  6d. 

Life  Of  Milton,  edited  by  C.  H.  FIRTH.  Cloth,  2s.  6d. ; 
stiff  covers,  Is.  6d. 

Vanity  of  Human  Wishes,  ed.  by  E.J.PAYNE.  4d. 

Selections  from  Cowper,  edited,  with  a  life,  introduction, 
and  notes,  by  H.  T.  GRIFFITH.     314  and  332  pp. 

Vol.  I :  Didactic  Poems  of  1782,  with  some  minor  pieces  1779- 

1783.     3s. 

Vol.  II :  The  Task,  with  Tirocinium  and  some  minor  poems 
1784-1799.     Third  edition.     3s. 

Selections  from  Burke,  edited  by  E.  J.  PAYNE. 

I :  Thoughts  on  the  Present  Discontents :  the  two  Speeches 

on  America.     Second  edition.     4s.  6d. 

II:  Reflections  on  the  French  Revolution.  Second  edition.  5s. 
Ill :  Letters  on  the  proposed  Regicide  peace.   Second  ed.   5s. 

Selections  from    Burns,  edited,  with  introduction,  notes, 
and  glossary,  by  J.  LOGIE  ROBERTSON.    Second  edition,    3s.  6d. 
7 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

Nineteenth  Century 

Boon's  Chllde  Harold,  ed.  by  H.F.TozER.  Srded.  3s.  6d. 
Keats'  Odes,  edited  by  A.  C.  DOWNER.     3s.  6d.  net. 

Hyperion,  Book  I,  with  notes  by  W.  T.  ARNOLD.    4d. 
Scott's  Lady  of  the  Lake,  edited  by  W.  MINTO.   3s.  6d. 

Lay  of  the  Last  Minstrel,  by  the  same  editor. 
Second  edition.     Is.  6d.     Canto  I.     6d. 

Lord  of  the  Isles,  edited  by  T.  BAYNE.   2s.  and  2s.  6d. 

Mamiion,  by  the  same  editor.    3s.  6d. 

OldMortality,  edited  by  H.B.GEORGE.  Crown  8vo.  2s. 

Quentin  Durward,  edited  by  P.  F.  WILLERT.    Crown 
8vo.     2s. 

Ivanhoe,  edited  by  C.  E.  THEODOSITIS.    Crown  8vo.    2s. 

Talisman,  edited  by  H.  B.  GEORGE.     Crown  8vo.     2s. 
Shelley's  Adonais,  edited  by  W.  M.  ROSSETTI  and  A.  O. 
PRICKARD.     Second  edition  (1904).     Crown  8vo.     3s.  6d. 

Campbell's  Gertrude  of  Wyoming,  edited  by  H.  M. 

FrrzGiBHON.     Second  edition.     Is. 

Wordsworth's  White  Doe  of  Rylstone,  etc.,  edited 

by  WILLIAM  KNIGHT.     2s.  6d. 

Matthew  Arnold's   Merope',  with   Th«  Elect™  of 

Sophocles,  translated  by  R.  WHITELAW  :  edited  by  J.  CHURTON 
COLLINS.     Crown  8vo.     3s.  6d. 

Kingsley's  Water-Babies,  slightly  abridged,  with  illustra- 
tions, introduction  and  notes.    Crown  8vo.    3s.  6d. 

The  Oxford  Book  of  English  Verse  A.D.  1250-]  900. 

By  A.  T.  QuiLLER-CoucH.   1096  pp.   Crown  8vo,  gilt  top.  7s.  6d. 
Fcap  8vo,  Oxford  India  paper,  cloth  extra,  gilt  top.     10s.  6d. 

The  Oxford  Treasury  of  English  Literature. 

By  G.  E.  HADOW  and  W.  H.  HADOW.    Crown  8vo.    3s.  6d.  each. 
Vol.  I.  Old  English  to  Jacobean.  Vol.  II.  Growth  of  the  Drama. 

Typical  Selections  from  the  best  English  writers  with  intro- 
ductory notices.     Second  edition.     3s.  6d.  each. 
Vol.  I  :  Latimer  to  Berkeley.        Vol.  II :  Pope  to  Macaulay. 

Sentence  Analysis.      For  Lower  Forms  of  Public  Schools. 
Byone  oftheAuthors  of  'The  King's  English.'  Cr.Svo.  ls.6d.net. 
Poems  of  English  Country  Life,  selected  and  edited 
by  H.  B.  GEORGE  and  W.  H.  HADOW.    Crown  8vo.    2s. 


FRENCH 

Dictionaries  and  Grammars 

Brachet's  Etymological  Dictionary  of  the  French 

language,  translated  by  G.  W.  KITCHIN.    Third  edition.    Crown 
8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Brachet's  Historical  Grammar  of  the  French  language, 

translated  by  G.  W.  KITCHIN.     Seventh  edition.     3s.  6d. 
The  Same,  rewritten  and  enlarged  by  PAGET  TOYNBEE.    Crown 
8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Educational  Review : — '  Mr.  Toynbee's  work  is  beyond  praise. 
The  book  as  it  now  stands  is  by  far  the  best  existing  historical 
grammar  of  the  French  language.' 

Historical  Primer  of  French    Phonetics   and 

Inflection.      By  MARGARET  S.  BHITTAIN,  with  introduction  by 
PAGET  TOYNBEE.     2s.  6d. 

Concise  French  Grammar,  including  phonology,  acci- 
dence and  syntax,  for  use  in  upper  and  middle  forms.  By 
A.  H.  WALL.  Crown  8vo.  260  pp.  4s.  6d. 

French  Primer,  for  use  in  middle  and  lower  forms.  By  the 
same.  140  pp.  2s. 

Premieres  Notions  de  Vocabulaire  et  de  Lec- 
ture, par  J.  E.  PICHOV.  Crown  8vo,  with  many  illustrations, 
pp.  120.  Is.  6d. 

Ma  Premiere  visite  a  Paris.      By  A.  E.  c.     An 

illustrated  reading  book  for  children.     Crown  8vo.     Is.  fid. 

John  Bllll  in  France  :   or,  French  as  it  is  spoken,  for  use 

of  English  and  American  travellers  in  France.   By  LEON  DELBOS. 

Second  impression.   Fcap  8vo,  cloth,  2s. ;  on  India  paper,  2s.  6d. 

Queen : — '  M.  Delbos's  original  and  interesting  little  book  is 

the  best  I  have  seen  in  English  for  some  time  for  a  knowledge 

of  idiomatic  French.     It  is  written  with  considerable  humour, 

and  would  be  an  excellent  class-book.' 

Oxford   Higher    French  Series.     Edited  by  LEON- 

DELUOS. 


OXFORD  MODERN  FRENCH  SERIES 

EDITED  BY  LEON  DELBOS 

THIS  series  consists  of  romances,  short  stories,  narratives  of  travel, 
biographies  and  essays.  It  is  intended  primarily  for  students  who  have 
advanced  some  little  way  in  their  knowledge  of  the  French  language,  and 
do  not  need  an  explanation  of  every  idiom  or  phrase  somewhat  out  of 
the  common ;  the  notes  therefore  deal  mainly  with  points  of  literary  or 
historical  interest.  They  have  been  supplied  for  each  volume  by  teachers 
and  persons  of  wide  experience  in  education. 

The  texts  have  all  been  very  carefully  selected  with  the  hope  that  this 
series  may  commend  itself  to  schoolmasters,  and  to  parents  and  others  who 
wish  those  under  their  charge  to  read  good  modern  French  books,  and  have 
hitherto  not  known  what  books  could  be  chosen  with  absolute  safety. 

Applications  for  specimen  copies  should  be  made  to  Mr.  HENRY  FROWDE, 
Amen  Corner,  London. 

Crown  8vo,  stout  cloth 

1 .  Deux  Heroines  de  la  Revolution  Frangaise,  by  Lamartine.  Edited 

by  MARY  BENTINCK-SMITH.    pp.  192.     as,  6d. 

2.  La   Vandetta   and  Pierre  Grassou,  by  Balzac.    Edited  by  MAEIE 

PECHIXET.       pp.    140.       28. 

5.    Bllg-Jargal,  by  Victor  Hugo.     Edited  by  Louis  SERB.    pp.  152.     28. 

4.  Mademoiselle  de  la  Seigliere,  by  Sandeau.    Edited  by  A.  L.  DUPUIS, 

pp.  214.     2S.  6d. 

5.  Memoires  d'Outre-Tombe,  by  Chateaubriand.    Edited  by  Louis  SKRS, 

pp.  164.     2S.  6d. 

6.  Voyage  autour  de  mon  Jardin,  by  Karr.     Edited  by  STUART  G. 

HALL  AM.     pp.  148.     28. 

7.  Le  Chateau  de  Vaux,  by  Gozlan.  Edited  by  A.  H.  SMITH,  pp.  92.   is.  6d. 

8.  Extraits  des  Voyages  d' Alexis  de  Tocqueville.    Edited  by  J.  E. 

MANSION,     pp.  122.     28. 
9-    Le  Serment,  by  Jules  David.     Edited  by  CECILS  HUGON.    pp.  96.    is.  6d. 

10.  Voyage  en  Espagne,  by  Gautier.     Edited  by  G.  GOODRIDGE.     pp.  200. 

2S.  6d. 

1 1 .  Les  Normands  en  Angleterre  et  en  Gaule,  by  Thierry.    Edited 

by  A.  H.  SMITH,     pp.  160.     23.  6d. 

12.  Une   Haine  a  bord,  by  de  la  Landelle,  edited  by  K.  E.  A.  CHESSES. 

pp.  256.     38. 

13.  Extracts  from  La  Revolution  Fran9aise,  by  Mignet.    Edited  by 

A.  L.  D  CPU  is.     pp.  240.     33. 

14.  Une  Tenebreuse   Affaire,  by  Balzac.     Edited  by  MARIE  PECHINET. 

pp.  244.     2S.  6d. 

15.  Memoires    d'un   touriste,  by  Stendhal.      Edited  by  H.  J.  CHAYTOR. 

pp.  1 1 6.    2S. 

16.  Voyage  aux  Pyrenees,  by  Taine.     Edited  by  W.  EOBERTSON.    pp.226. 

2S.  6d. 

1 7.  Jean  Sbogar,  by  Nodier.     Edited  by  D.  LI.  SAVORY,     pp.  160.     23. 

1  8.    Les  ChouanSj  by  Balzac.    Edited  by  C.  L.  FREEMAN,    pp.  256.     33. 
It).    Histoire   d'un  homme  du  peuple,  by  Erckmann  Chatrian.    Edited 

by  E.  E.  A.  CHESSES,     pp.  160.     33. 

20.    Ftllilletons  Choisis.      Edited  by  C.  BBERETON.     pp.  130.     23. 

10 


FRENCH 

Other  annotated  editions 

Beaumarchais'  Le  Barbier  de  Seville,  by  AUSTIN 

DOBSON.     Second  edition.    2s.  6d. 

Comeille's    Cinna.     With  Moliere's  Les  Femmes  Savantes, 
and  Fontenelle's  Life  of  Corneille.     By  G.  MASSON.     2s.  6d. 
Horace,  by  GEORGE  SAINTSBURY.     2s.  6d. 

Gau tier's    Scenes    Of   Travel,   selected  and  edited  by 
G.  SAINTSBURY.     Second  edition.     2s. 

Voyage   autour  de  ma  Chambre,  by  XAVIER  DE 

MAISTRE  ;  Ourika,  by  MADAME  DE  DURAS  ;  Le  Vieux  Tailleur, 
by  ERCKMANN-CHATRIAN  ;  La  Veillee  de  Vincennes,  by 
A.  DE  VIGNY  ;  Les  Jumeaux  de  1'Hotel  Corneille,  by  EDMOND 
ABOUT  ;  Mesaventures  d'un  Ecolier,  by  R.  TOPFFER,  edited 
by  G.  MASSON.  Third  edition.  2s.  6d.  Voyages  -separately, 
Is.  6d. 

Moliere's  Plays. 

Le  Misanthrope,  by  H.  \V.  G.  Les  Fourberies  de  Scapin,  with 

MARKHEIM.  3s.  6d.  Voltaire's  Life  of  Moliere,  by 

Les  Fdcheux,  by  E.  J.  TRECH-  G.  MASSOX.  Stiffcovers,  Is.  6d. 

MANN.  2s.  Les  Pr6cieuses  Ridicules,  by 

Les  Femmes  Savantes,  by  G.  ANDREW  LANG.  Second  edi- 

MASSON.      Cloth,  2s. ;    stiff  tion.    Is.  6d. 

covers,  Is.  6d. 

Musset's  On  ne  badine  pas  avec  1'Amour,  and 

Fantasio,  by  W.  H.  POLLOCK.     2s. 

Quinet's    LettrCS    a   Sa    Mere,  selected  and  edited  by 
G.  SAINTSBURY. 

Racine's  Esther,  by  G.  SAINTSBURY.     2s. 

Sainte-Beuve :   Selections  from  the  Causeries 

du  Lundi,  by  G.  SAINTSBURY.     2s. 
Voltaire's  Merope,  by  G.  SAINTSBURY.     2s. 

Louis  XIV  and  his  Contemporaries  ;  as  described 

in  extracts  from  the  best  Memoirs  of  the  Seventeenth  Century, 
edited  by  G.  MASSON.  2s.  6d. 

Selections   from   Madame   de    Sevigne"s  Corre- 
spondence, by  the  same  editor.    3s. 

Oxford  Moliere.     Crown  8vo.     656  pp.     5s. 

11 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

French  History,  etc. 

A  History  Of  France,  with  numerous  maps,  plans,  and 
tables,  by  G.  W.  KITCHIN.  In  three  volumes,  crown  8vo, 
10s.  6d.  each ;  Vol.  I  (to  1453),  revised  by  F.  F.  URQUHART  ; 
Vols.  II  (1453-1624),  III  (1624-1793),  revised  by  A.  HASSALL. 

Professor  SAINTSBURY'S  Books 
Short  History  of  French  Literature :    with  the 

XlXth  century  section  much  enlarged.    5th  ed.    Cr.  8vo,  10s.  6d. 

A  Primer  of  French  Literature.   Fourth  ed.   2s. 
Specimens  of  French  Literature,  from  vuion  to  Hugo. 

Second  edition.    Crown  8vo.     9s. 

De   Tocqueville's  L'Ancien  Regime,  edited  by 

G.  W.  HEADLAM.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 

Thiers'  MOSCOW  Expedition,  edited,  with  introduction 
and  notes,  by  H.  B.  GEORGE.  Crown  8vo,  with  six  maps.  5s. 

History   of  French  Versification,  with  numerous 

examples  from  the  poets,  by  L.  E.  KASTNER.   Cr.  8vo.   5s.  6d.  net. 

Documents  relating  to  the  French  Revolution 

(May  1789  to  September  1791),  edited  by  L.  G.  WICKHAM  LEGG. 
Twovols.,  crown  8vo.     12s.  net. 

La  Ligne'e  des  Poetes  Francais  au  XIXe  Siecle : 

an  anthology  of  modern  French  Poetry,  by  C.  BONNIER.    Demy 
12mo,  on  hand-made  paper,  in  various  cloth  bindings.   3s.  net. 

ITALIAN  AND  SPANISH 

Oxford  Dante.   Crown  8vo.  Third  ed.  (1904).  500pp.  6s.net. 

On  India  paper,  8s.  net. 
Dante's    Divina    Commedia.     Translated  into  English 

Prose.     By  H.  F.  TOZER.     3s.  6d.  net. 

A  Primer  of  Italian  Literature,  by  F.  J.  SNELL.  ss.  ed. 

Maclliavelli's  Prince.  Transl.  by  N.H.THOMSON.  3s.6d.net. 

Annotated  editions 
Selections  from  the  Inferno.     By  H.  B.  COTTERILL. 

4s.  6d. 

Tasso's  La  Gerusalemme  Liberata,  Cantos  i,  H.   By 

the  same.    2s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Don  Quixote  :  the  Wooden  Horse, 

and  Panza's  Governorship.     By  C.  BEVENOT.     2s.  6d. 
U 


GERMAN 

Dr.  BUCHHEIM'S  German  Classics 

Edited,  with  biographical,  historical,  and  critical  intro- 
ductions, arguments  (to  the  Dramas),  and  complete 
commentaries,  by  the  late  C.  A.  BUCHHEIM. 

Becker's  Friedrich  der  Grosse.   With  a  map.   Third 

edition.     3s.  6d. 

Goethe's  Dichtung  und  Wahrheit.    Books  i-iv. 

4s.  6d. 

Egmont.     Fourth  edition.    3s. 

Hermann  und  Dorothea.   With  an  introduction 

by  EDWARD  DOWDEN.     3s. 
Iphigenie  auf  TauriS.     Fourth  edition  revised.    3s 

Halm's  Griseldis.   3s. 

H  eine's  Harzreise.     With  a  map.    Third  edition.     2s.  6d. 


being  selections  from  Heine's  Prose  writings. 
Second  edition.    4s.  6d. 

Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm.     Eighth  edition, 

revised  and  enlarged.     3s.  6d. 

Nathan  der  Weise.     Second  edition.     4s.  6d. 

Schiller's  Historische  Skizzen.    With  a  map.  Seventh 

edition,  revised.     2s.  6d. 

JimgfraU  VOn  Orleans.     Second  edition.    4s.  Gd. 

Maria  Stuart.   3s.  ed. 

\Vilhelm  Tell.     Large  edition  ;  with  a  map.     Seventh 
edition.   3s.  6d.  School  edition  ;  with  a  map.   Fourth 

edition.   2s. 

13 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

Other  annotated  editions 
Hoffmann's    Heute    mir  Morgen    dir,  by  j.  H. 

MAUDE.    2s. 

Lessing's    Laokoon,    by  A.   HAMANN.      Second    edition, 
revised,  with  an  introduction,  by  L.  E.  UPCOTT.     4s.  6d. 

Kiehl's    Seines   Araters    Sohn  and  Gespenster 

kampf,  by  H.  T.  GERRAXS.     2s. 

Miss  BUCHHEIM'S  Elementary  Reading  and 
Exercise  Books,  with  English  notes, 

vocabularies,  etc. 
German  Poetry  for  Beginners,  a  graduated  collection 

of  easy  poems  for  repetition  from  modern  poets.     2s. 
Short  German  Plays,  for  Reading  and  Acting.    3s. 

Short  German  Plays :   second  series.    Der  unge- 

betene  Gast,  and  other  Plays.     With  Notes  tmd  Vocabulary. 
2s.  6d. 

Chamisso's  Schlemihl's  wundersame  Geschichte. 

2s. 

Niebuhr's     Griechische    Heroen-Geschichten. 

Second  edition.     Cloth,  2s. ;  stiff  covers,  Is.  6d.    Edition  A,  text 
in  German  type.     Edition  B,  text  in  Roman  type. 

Elementary  German  Prose  Composition.    Third 

edition.     Cloth,  2s. ;  stiff  covers,  Is.  6d. 

Dr.  HERMANN  LANGE'S  German  Course.     8vo 

Germans  at  Home  :  a  practical  introduction  to  German  con- 
versation, with  an  appendix  containing  the  essentials  of  German 
grammar.  Third  edition.  2s.  6d. 

Grammar  of  the  German  Language.    3s.  6d. 

German  Manual :  a  German  grammar,  reading-book,  and 
a  handbook  of  German  conversation.  Second  edition.  7s.  6d. 

German  Composition:  a  theoretical  and  practical  guide  to  the 
translation  of  English  prose  into  German.  Third  edition.  4s.  6d. 

German  Spelling:   a  record  of  the  changes  made  by  the  Govern- 
ment Regulations  of  1880.     Gd. 
14 


GERMAN 


Kinderfreuden,  an    illustrated   reading-book    for  children. 
Crown  8vo.    80  pp.     Is.  6d. 

Preparatory  Schools  Review: — 'This  capital  little  reading- 
book  will  be  found  most  useful  for  children  who  have  some 
conversational  knowledge  of  German.' 

Modern  German  Reader :   a  graduated  collection  of 

extracts    from    modern    German    authors,    edited  by  C.   A. 
BUCHHEIM. 

Part  I :  Prose  Extracts.     Seventh  edition.     2s.  6d. 

Part  II :  Extracts  in  Prose  and  Poetry.     Second  ed.     2s.  6d. 

Combined  German  Reader,  Writer,  and  Gram- 
mar.    By  H.  G.  SPEAKING.    8vo.    3s. 

A  Memory  Test-book  of  the  Words  occurring 
in  the  above.      Crown  8vo,  paper  covers.     Gd.  net. 

For  Army  and  Civil  Service  Examinations 
Guide  to  advanced  German  Prose  Composition, 

containing  selections  from  modern  English  authors,  notes,  and 
a  grammatical  introduction,  by  EDUARD  EHRKE.     3s. 

Passages  for  unprepared  translation,  selected  by 

EDUARD  EHRKE.     Stiff  covers.    234  pp.   3s. 


A  History  of  German  Literature,  from  the  accession 

of  Frederick  the  Great  to  the  death  of  Goethe.  By  Mrs.  F.  C. 
CONYBEARE,  Crown  8vo.  5s. 

Old  High  German  and  Gothic 

An  Old  High  German  Primer,  with  grammar,  notes 

and  glossary.     By  JOSEPH  WRIGHT.     3s.  6d. 

A  Middle  High  German  Primer,  with  grammar,  notes 

and  glossary.     By  the  same  author.     Second  edition.     3s.  6d. 

A  Primer  of  the  Gothic  Language,  containing  the 

Gospel  of  St.  Mark,  selections  from  the  other  Gospels,  and  the 
Second  Epistle  to  Timothy,  with  grammar,  notes  and  glossary. 
By  the  same  author.  Second  edition.  4s.  6d. 

13 


MISCELLANEOUS 

The  Educational  Systems  of  Great  Britain  and 

Ireland.    By  GRAHAM  BALFOUR.   Second  edition  (1903).   8vo. 

7s.  6d.  net. 

School  Government  Chronicle : — '  It  states  the  facts  of  the 
administrative  situation  with  a  precision,  a  comprehensiveness, 
and  an  intelligent  order  of  presentation  which  are  not  to  be 
found  in  anything  like  so  convenient  a  space  in  any  other  pub- 
lished  work.' 

Physical  Education,  a  theoretical  and  practical  system. 
By  A.  MACLAREN.  New  edition,  enlarged  by  W.  MACLAREN. 
Crown  8vo.  8s.  fid.  net. 

Lectures  on  the  Logic  of  Arithmetic.    By  M.  E. 

BOOLE.     Crown  8vo,  2s.,  or  interleaved  with  writing-paper,  3s. 

Educational  Times: — 'Good  teachers  will  find  in  the  new 
volume  interesting  confirmation  of  many  of  their  own  inde- 
pendent ideas,  while  the  less  gifted  will  learn  from  the  authoress 
now  they  may  make  their  own  class-lessons  more  instructive, 
more  intelligible,  and  more  adapted  to  awaken  the  interest  and 
the  inventive  faculty  of  the  scholar.' 

Preparation  of  the  Child  for  Science.  ByM.E.  BOOLE. 

Crown  8vo.     2s. 

Educational  Times : — '  Mrs.  Boole's  small  volume  lies  within 
easy  reach  of  the  mothers  and  teachers  of  the  rising  generation, 
and  will  probably  be  an  inspiration  and  a  guide  to  many  who 
are  striving  to  leam  how  best  to  train  the  little  ones.  It  may 
well  be  that  some  of  the  great  scientists  of  the  future  will  owe 
their  power,  in  part  at  least,  to  these  pages.' 

Elementary  Political   Economy.    By  E.  CANNAN. 

Third  edition  (1903).     Is. 

Elementary  Politics.  By  T.  RALEIGH.  Sixth  edition  re- 
vised (1905).  Is. 

A   Geometrical   Political   Economy.     Being  an 

Elementary  Treatise  on  the  Method  of  Explaining  some  of  the 
Theories  of  Pure  Economic  Science  by  means  of  Diagrams.  By 
H.  CUNVNGHAME,  C.B.  Crown  8vo.  2s.  6d.  net. 

Elements  of  Railway  Economics.  ByW.M.AcwoR™. 

Crown  8vo.     Second  edition  (1905).     2s.  net. 

Economic  Review : — '  The  study  of  Mr.  Acworth's  concise  and 
suggestive  introduction  to  Railway  Economics  may  be  recom- 
mended as  an  indispensable  preliminary  to  reforming  activity.' 

16 


HISTORY  AND  GEOGRAPHY 

Companion  to  English  History  (Middle  Ages).    By 

C.  OMAN,  A.  JESSOPP  and  others;  edited  by  F.  P.  BARNARD. 

With  97  illustrations.     Crown  8vo.     388  pp.     8s.  6d.  net. 

Nation  (New  York) : — '  A  book  to  be  most  heartily  com- 
mended both  for  its  main  idea  and  for  its  execution.  .  .  .  What 
a  help  this  book  will  be  to  teachers  in  the  higher  schools  and 
in  colleges  of  almost  every  degree  will  be  apprehended  at 
a  glance  by  every  one  who  has  the  least  experience  in  such 
matters.  .  .  .  Apart  from  the  fact  that  the  contributors  are 
experts,  a  large  amount  of  rich  material  is  turned  into  appro- 
priate form,  and  placed  within  easy  reach  of  those  who  can 
make  use  of  it  in  the  daily  instruction  of  their  classes.  And  it 
supplements  the  text-book  at  a  point  where  the  best  of  text- 
books can  hardly  fail  to  be  weak.' 

The  Constitutional  History  of  England,  in  its 

Origin   and  Development.      By   W.   STUBBS.     Three   volumes 
crown  8vo,  price  12s.  each. 

School  History  of  England  to  the  death  of  Victoria. 
With  maps,  plans,  and  select  bibliographies.  By  O.  M.  EDWARDS, 
R.  S.  RAIT  and  others.  Crown  8vo.  388  pp.  3s.  6d. 

Guardian:— 'For  boys  of  fourteen  and  upwards,  who  may 
be  supposed  to  have  some  idea  of  what  history  really  means, 
the  book  will  be  invaluable.  The  matter  is  well  arranged  and 
presented  in  crisp,  vigorous,  scholarly  English.' 

Genealogical  Tables  illustrative  of  Modern  History.  By 
H.B.GEORGE.  Fourth  edition  (1904).  Oblong  4to,  boards.  7s.  6d. 

A  Short  History  of  the  Norman  Conquest  of 

England.     Third  edition.     By  E.  A.  FREEMAN.     2s.  6d. 

History  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada.    With  eleven 

maps.     1890.     By  W.  P.  GRESWELL.     Crown  8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Geography  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada  and  New- 
foundland. By  the  same  author.  With  ten  maps.  Crown  8vo.  6s. 

Geography  of  Africa  South  of  the  Zambesi. 

With  maps.     By  the  same  author.    Crown  8vo.     7s.  6d. 
17 


HISTORY  AND  GEOGRAPHY 


Historical  Geography  of  the  British  Colonies. 

By  C.  P.  LUCAS,  C.B.     Crown  8vo. 

Introduction :    Origin  and  Growth   of  British  Colonies,   by 

H.  E.    EGERTON.     1903.     With  eight  maps.     3s.  6d.     In 

cheaper  binding,  2s.  6d. 
Vol.  I.     The  Mediterranean  and  Eastern  Colonies  (exclusive 

of  India).     With  eleven  maps.     Second  edition  (1906)  by 

R.  E.  STUBBS.     5s. 
Vol.  II.    The  West  Indian  Colonies.     With  twelve  maps. 

Second  edition  (1905)  by  C.  ATCHLEY.     7s.  6d. 
Vol.  III.    West  Africa.     Revised  to  the  end  of  1899  by 

H.  E.  EGERTON.     With  five  maps.     7s.  6d. 
Vol.  IV.      South   and   East  Africa.      Historical  and   Geo- 
graphical.    With  eleven  maps.     9s.  6d. 
Also  Part  I.    Historical.     1898.     6s.  6d. 

Part  II.  Geographical.    New  edition  (1904).    3s.  6d. 
Vol.  V.    Canada,  Part  I.     1901.     6s. 

The  Oxford  Geographies.    Crown  8vo.    By  A.  J. 

HERBERTSON.    Vol.  I.  The  Preliminary  Geography.     Is.  6d. 

Vol.  II.  The  Junior  Geography.  With  166  maps  and  diagrams. 
Second  edition.     2s. 

Vol.  III.  The  Senior  Geography.  [In  the  Press. 

Relations  of  Geography  and  History.    By  H.  B. 

GEORGE.    With  two  maps.    Crown  8vo.     Second  edition  (1904). 

4s.  6d. 

Educational  Review : — 'The  volume  is  one  of  absorbing  in- 
terest; to  the  schoolmaster  who  teaches  "English  subjects" 
it  will  prove  a  very  mine  of  suggestions  ;  to  the  student  of 
history  it  will  be  indispensable,  and  the  general  reader  who  is 
fortunate  enough  to  commence  it  will  be  very  unlikely  to  leave 
it  unfinished.' 

A  Brief  History  of  the  Indian  Peoples.    By  Sir 

W.  W.  HUNTER.      Revised   up  to   1903  by  W.  H.  HUTTON. 
Eighty-ninth  thousand.     260  pp.    3s.  6d. 

Rulers  of  India  :  The  History  of  the  Indian  Empire  in 
a  carefully  planned  succession  of  Political  Biographies,  edited 
by  Sir  W.  W.  HUNTER.  Crown  8vo.  2s.  6d.  each.  Separate 
prospectus,  on  application. 

A  History  Of  France.     By  G.  W.  KITCHIN.     See  p.  12. 

18 


DIVINITY 

Dr.  Stokoe's  Manuals.     Crown  8vo 

Guardian : — '  We  do  not  know  what  better  advice  could  be 
given  to  a  young  student  than  to  urge  him  to  begin  to  study 
the  Gospels  and  Epistles  in  the  company  of  Dr.  Stokoe.' 

Expository  Times : — '  For  the  class-room  they  are  unsur- 
passed.' 

Old   Testament  History   for   Schools.     Part  I.     (Third 
edition.)     276  pp.      From  the  Creation  to  the  Settlement  in 
Palestine.     Part  II.     336   pp.     From  the   Settlement  to   the 
Disruption.    Part  III.     280  pp.     From  the  Disruption  to  the 
Return  from  Captivity.     2s.  6d.  each,  with  maps. 
Manual  of  the  Four  Gospels.     396  pp.    With  Maps,  3s.  6d. 
Or,  separately,  Part  I,  The  Gospel  Narrative,  2s.;    Part  II, 
The  Gospel  Teaching^  2s. 
Manual  of  the  Acts.'  120pp.    3s. 

The   Life   and   Letters   of  St.   Paul.     320  pp.     3s.  6d. 
Or,  separately,  Part  I,  The  Life,  2s.     Part  II,  The  Letters,  2s. 
First  Days  and  Early  Letters  of  the  Church.    220  pp.    3s. 
Or,  Part  I,  First  Days,  Is.  6d.     Part  II,  Early  Letters,  2s. 

Graduated  Lessons  on  the  Old  Testament.    By 

U.  Z.  RULE,  edited  by  LL.  J.  M.  BEBB.  Selected  readings 
from  the  O.T.  (R.V.)  with  paraphrases  and  connecting  para- 
graphs ;  with  notes  for  teachers  and  pupils.  In  3  vols.  Is.  6d. 
each  paper,  Is.  9d.  each  cloth.  I.  Creation  to  Death  of  Moses. 
204  pp.  II.  Conquest  of  Canaan,  Psalms,  etc.  228  pp.  III. 
Israel  and  Judah,  Captivity,  Prophets.  242  pp. 

Notes  On  St.  Luke.     By  E.  J.  MOORE  SMITH.     Is.  6d. 

Helps  to  the  Study  of  the  Book  of  Common 

Prayer.     By  W.  R.  W.  STEPHENS.    Cr.  8vo.     2s.  6d.  net. 

ART  AND  MUSIC 

Introduction  to  Greek  Sculpture.    By  L.  E.  UPCOTT. 

Second  edition.     Crown  8vo.     4s.  6d. 

A  Handbook  of  Anatomy  for  Art  Students, 

fully  illustrated.     By  ARTHUR  THOMSON.    3rded.    8vo,  16s.  net. 

Classical  Archaeology  in  Schools.    By  P.  GARDNER 

and  J.  L.  MYRES.    8vo.    Second  edition.     Is.  net. 

A  Chart  of  the  Rules  of  Harmony  and  Chart  of 

the  Rules  Of  Counterpoint,    printed  on  cards:    by 
A.  SOMERVELL.     Is.  net  each. 

Musical  Standard: — '  Very  clever  and  most  successful.' 

Music  Primer.      By  J.  TROUTBECK  and  R.  F.  DALE.     Third 
edition.     Crown  8vo.     Is.  6d. 

Cultivation   of  the    Speaking  Voice.     By  JOHN 

HULLAH.     Second  edition.    2s.  6d. 
19 


Book-keeping.     New  and  enlarged  edition.     By  Sir  R.  G.  C. 
HAMILTON  and  J.  BALL.     2s. 
Ruled  exercise  book,  Is.  6d. ;  to  preliminary  course  only,  4d. 

Arithmetic.     With  or  without  Answers.     By  R.  HARGREAVES. 
Crown  8vo.     424  pp.    4s.  6d. 

A  Text-book  of  Algebra  :   with  Answers.     By  W.  S. 
ALDIS.     Crown  8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Acoustics.     By  W.  F.  DONKIN.    2nd  ed.    Crown  8vo.    7s.  6d. 

Hydrostatics  and  Elementary  Hydrokinetics. 

By  G.  M.  MINCHIN.    Crown  8vo.     10s.  6d. 

Elementary  Mechanics  of  Solids  and  Fluids. 

By  A.  L.  SELBY.     Crown  8vo.     3s.  6d. 

Elementary  Plane  Trigonometry.  By  R.  c.  J. 

Crown  8vo.     7s.  fid. 


Maxwell's  Elementary  Treatise  on  Electricity. 

Edited  by  W.  GARNETT.     8vo.     7s.  6d. 

Elementary  Treatise  on  Heat,  with  numerous  Wood- 
cuts and  Diagrams.  By  BALFOUR  STEWART.  Sixth  edition, 
revised  with  additions,  by  R.  E.  BAYNES.  Crown  8vo.  8s.  6d. 


Chemistry 


Elementary  Chemistry.  Progressive  Lessons  in  Experi- 
ment and  Theory.  Part  I  (1905).  By  F.  R.  L.  WILSON  and  G.  W. 
HEDLEY.  8vo.  With  many  diagrams.  3s.  Part  II.  5s. 

ClaSS  Book  of  Chemistry.  By  W.  W.  FISHER.  Fifth 
edition  (1905).  Crown  8vo.  4s.  6d. 


Exercises  in  Practical  Chemistry.   By  A.  G. 

HARCouRTandH.  G.  MADAN.   Fifth  edition.  Crown  8vo.  10s.  6d. 

Chemistry  for   Students,  with  Solutions.    By  A.  w. 

WILUAMSON.    8s.  6d. 

20 


CLAREN7DON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 


Geometry 

Pure  Geometry,  an  elementary  treatise,  with  numerous 
examples.  By  J.  W.  RUSSELL.  New  and  revised  edition  (1905). 
Crown  8vo.  9s.  net. 

Euclid   Revised,  containing  the  essentials  of  the  Elements 
of  Plane  Geometry  as  given  by  Euclid  in  his  first  six  books, 
edited  by  R.  C.  J.  NIXON.     Third  edition.     Crown  8vo.     6s. 
Sold  separately  as  follows  : — Book  I,  Is. ;  Books  I  and  II,  Is.  6d. ; 
Books  I-IV,  3s. ;  Books  V  and  VI,  3s.  6d. 

Geometry  in  Space,  containing  parts  of  Euclid's  Eleventh 
and  Twelfth  Books.  By  R.  C.  J.  NIXON.  8vo.  3s.  6d. 

Geometrical  Exercises   from   Nixon's  Euclid 

Revised.  With  Solutions.  ByA.LARMOR.  Crown  8vo.  3s.  6d. 
Educational  Review : — *  It  is  fitted  to  become  an  indispensable 
aid  to  the  mathematical  teacher  and  student.' 

The  'Junior'  Euclid.  By  S.  W.  FINN.  Crown  8vo. 
Books  I  and  II,  Is.  6d.  Books  III  and  IV,  2s. 

Analytical  Geometry,  an  elementary  treatise  by  W.  J. 
JOHNSTON.  Crown  8vo.  6s. 

Notes  on  Analytical  Geometry.    By  A.  CLEMENT 

JONES  (1903).     Crown  8vo.     6s.net. 

Elementary  Geometry,  on  the  plan  recommended  by 
the  Mathematical  Association 

Elementary  Modern  Geometry.  Part i(i 905).  Experi- 
mental and  Theoretical  (Chs.  I-IV).  Triangles  and  Parallels. 
By  H.  G.  WILLIS.  Crown  8vo.  2s. 

Experimental  and  Theoretical  Course  of  Geo- 
metry. By  A.  T.  WARREN.  With  Examination  Papers  set 
on  the  new  lines.  Crown  8vo.  With  or  without  Answers. 
Third  edition  (1905).  2s. 

Geometry   for   Beginners :    an  easy  introduction  to 

Geometry  for  young  learners.     By  G.  M.  MINCHIN.     Is.  6d. 
21 


LATIN  AND  GREEK 

School  Dictionaries 

An  Elementary  Latin  Dictionary.   By  c.  T.  LEWIS. 

Square  8vo.     964  pp.     7s.  6d. 

A  School  Latin  Dictionary.   By  c.  T.  LEWIS.  Small 

4to.    1204  pp.    12s.  6d. 

An  Abridged  Greek  Lexicon  for  Schools,    By 

H.  G.  LIDDEIX  and  R.  SCOTT.    Square  12mo.    808  pp.     7s.  6d. 

An  Intermediate  Greek  Lexicon.  By  H.  G. 

and  R.  SCOTT.    Small  4to.     12s.  6d. 

Elementary  Grammars,  etc. 

Mr.  J.  B.  ALLEN'S  Elementary  Series 


Latina.     Comprising  accidence  and  exercises 
of  a  very  elementary  character  for  the  use  of  beginners.     2s. 

An  Elementary  Latin  Grammar.   New  and  enlarged 

edition.     208th  thousand.     2s.  6d. 

A  First  Latin  Exercise  Book.  Eighth  edition.  2s.  t>d. 
A  Second  Latin  Exercise  Book.    Second  edition. 

3s.  6d. 

An  Elementary  Greek  Grammar,  containing  acci- 

dence and  elejpaentary  syntax.    2s.  6d. 

Classical  Review  :—  '  An  excellent  little  book.' 
Schoolmaster  :  —  '  It  deserves  as  wide  a  use  and  recognition 
as  the  author's  Elementary  Latin  Grammar.' 

22 


LATIN  AND  GREEK 


Mr.  J.  B.  ALLEN'S  Latin  Readers 

With  notes,  maps,  vocabularies  and  English  exercises  ;  stiff  covers, 
Is.  6d.  each.  These  books  are  of  the  same  and  not  of  graduated 
difficulty. 

Lives  from  Cornelius  Nepos. 

Tales  of  Early  Rome.    Adapted  from  the  Text  of  Livy. 

Educational  Times: — 'The  book  is  designed  with  consider- 
able ingenuity,  and  exhibits  the  practical  good  sense  of  a  dis- 
cerning teacher.  The  exercises  illustrate  some  definite  rule  of 
syntax,  and  this  is  a  plan  too  seldom  followed  by  editors.' 

Tales  of  the  Roman  Republic,  Part  I.    )  Adapted  from  the 
Tales  of  the  Roman  Republic,  Part  II.  j     Text  of  Livy. 

Other  Latin  Readers,  etc. 

Tales  of  the  Civil  War.  From  the  third  book  of  Caesar's 
Civil  War.  Edited  with  Historical  Introduction,  notes,  maps, 
vocabularies  and  English  exercises,  by  W.  D.  LOWE.  Is.  6d. 

Extracts    from    Cicero,   with  notes,  by  HENRY  WALFORD. 
In  three  Parts.     Third  edition.     Each  Part  separately,  Is.  6d. 
Part  I.      Anecdotes  from  Grecian  and  Roman  History. 
Part  II.    Omens  and  Dreams  :  Beauties  of  Nature. 
Part  III.  Rome's  Rule  of  her  Provinces. 

Extracts   from    Livy,    with  notes  and  maps,  by  H.  LEE- 
WARNER.     Each  Part  separately,  Is.  6d. 
Part  I.      The  Caudine  Disaster. 
Part  II.    Hannibal's  Campaign  in  Italy. 
Part  III.  The  Macedonian  War. 

A  First  Latin  Reader,  byT.  J.  NUNNS.   Third  edition.    2s. 

Introduction  to  Latin  Syntax,  by  w.  s.  GIBSON.   2s. 
Mr.  C.  S.  JERRAM'S  Series 

Reddenda  Minora  ;  easy  passages,  Latin  and  Greek,  for 
unseen  translation.  For  the  use  of  lower  forms.  Sixth  edition, 
revised  and  enlarged.  Is.  Cd. 

Anglice   Reddenda  ;    or  extracts,  Latin  and  Greek,  for 
unseen  translation.     Fourth  edition.     2s.  6d. 
Second  Series.     New  edition.     3s.        Third  Series.     3s. 
Schoolmaster  : — '  A  better  book  of  its  kind  could  not  be  found.' 
23 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 
Greek  Readers  and  Primers 

Greek  Reader.  Selected  and  adapted  with  English  Notes 
from  Professor  von  Wilamowitz-Moellendorff's  Griechisches 
Lesebuch,  by  E.  C.  MABCHAXT.  Crown  8vo.  Vol.  I.  2s. 
Vol.  II.  2s. 

First  Greek  Reader,  by  W.  G.  RUSHBROOKE.  Third  edition. 
2s.  6d. 

Second  Greek  Reader,  by  A.M.  BELL.  Second  edition.  3s. 

Specimens  of  Greek  Dialects,  with  introductions,  etc., 

by  W.  W.  MERRY.    4s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Homer  and  the  Greek  Dramatists  ;  with 
explanatory  notes  and  introductions  to  the  study  of  Greek  Epic 
and  Dramatic  Poetry,  by  EVELYN  ABBOTT.  4s.  6d. 

Easy  Selections  from  Xenophon,  with  a  vocabulary, 

notes,  illustrations  carefully  chosen  from  coins,  casts  and  ancient 
statues,  and  map,  by  J.  S.  PHILLPOTTS  and  C.  S.  JERRAM.  Third 
edition.  3s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Xenophon,  with  notes,  illustrations 
chosen  as  above,  and  maps,  by  J.  S.  PHILLPOTTS.  Fifth  edition. 
3s.  6d. 

An  Introduction  to  the  Comparative  Grammar 

of  Greek  and  Latin.     By  J.  E.  KING  and  C.  COOKSON.    5s.  6d. 

Latin  Classics  for  Schools 

Caesar,  De  Bello  Gallico,  i-vn.   in  two  crown  8\-o 

volumes.  By  ST.  GEORGE  STOCK.  Vol.  I,  Introduction,  5s. 
Vol.  II,  Text  and  Notes,  6s. 

The  Gallic  War.  Second  edition.  With  maps. 
Books  I  and  II,  2s. ;  III-V,  2s.  6il. ;  VI-VIII,  3s.  6d. 
Books  I-III,  stiff  covers,  2s.  By  C.  E.  MOBERLY. 

The  Civil  AVar.  New  edition.  Bj  the  same  editor. 
3s.  6d. 

Catulli  Carmina  Selecta.   (Text  only.)  3s.  ed. 

•24, 


ANNOTATED  LATIN  CLASSICS 

Cicero,  de  Amicitia.     By  ST.  GEORGE  STOCK.    3s. 
de  Senectute.     By  L.  HUXLEY.    2s. 
in  Catilinam.    ByE.A.Upcoir.  Second  edition.  2s.  fid. 

in  Q.  Caecilium  Divinatio  and  in  C.  Verrem 

Actio  Prima.     By  J.  R.  KING.     Limp,  Is.  6d. 

pro  CluentlO.    By  W.  RAMSAY,  edited  by  G.  G.  RAMSAY. 

Second  edition.     3s.  6d. 
pro    Marcello,  pro  Ligario,  pro  Rege  Deiotaro.      By 

W.  Y.  FAUSSETT.     Second  Edition.     2s.  6d. 
pro    Mllone.      By  A.  B.  POYNTON.     Second  edition, 

Crown  8vo.    2s.  6d. 

Philippic  Orations,  I,  n,  in,  v,  vn.    By  j.  R. 

KING.     3s.  6d. 
pro  Roscio.     By  ST.  GEORGE  STOCK.    3s.  6d. 

Select  Orations,  viz.  in  Verrem  Actio  Prima,  de 
Imperio  Gn.  Pompeii,  pro  Archia,  Philippica  IX.  By 
J.  R.  KING.  Second  edition.  2s.  6d. 

Selected   Letters.      By  C.  E.  PRICHARD  and  E.  R. 

BERNARD.    Second  edition.    3s. 
Select    Letters    (text  only).      By  ALBERT  WATSON. 

Second  edition.    4s. 

Horace,  Odes,  Carmen  Seculare,  and  Epodes. 

By  E.  C.  WICKHAM.    Second  edition.    6s.          Ode*,  Book  I,  2s. 

Satires,  Epistles,  and  De  Arte  Poetica. 

Crown  8vo.     6s. 

Selected  Odes,  with  Notes  for  the  use  of  a  Fifth 
Form.  Second  edition.  2s. 

For  English  Readers.     3s.  6d.  net. 

Juvenal  (Thirteen  Satires).     By  C.  H.  PEARSON  and  HERBERT 
A.  STRONG.     Second  edition.     Crown  8vo.     9s. 

,    Books  V-VII.      By  A.  R.  CLUER.      Second  edition 
revised  by  P.  E.  MATHESON.     5s. 

Separately  :  Book  V,  2s.  6d. ;  Book  VI,  2s. ;  Book  VII,  2s. 
Books  XXI-XXIII.     By  M.  T.  TATHAM.    Second  edition, 
enlarged.    5s. 

Separately  :  Book  XXI,  2s.  6d. ;  Book  XXII,  2s.  6d. 


Lucretius.      Book  V   (783-1457).      Edited,   with   Notes   for 
a  Fifth  Form,  by  W.  D.  LOWE.     Crown  8vo.     2s. 

Martialis  Epigrammata  Selecta  (text  and  critical 

notes).     3s.  6d.     On  India  paper,  5s. 

Martial,  Select  Epigrams,   Books  vii-Xii.    By  R.  T. 

BRIDGE  and  E.  D.  C.  LAKE.  Crown  8vo,  3s.  6d.  Notes  only,  2s. 
Cornelius    NepOS.      By  OSCAR  BROWNING.    Third  edition, 

revised  by  W.  R.  INGE.     3s. 
Ovid,  Selections,  with  an  Appendix  on  the  Roman  Calendar 

by  W.  RAMSAY.     By  G.  G.  RAMSAY.     Third  edition.     5s.  6d. 
Tristia,  Bookl.    ByS.  G.OWEN.    Second  edition.  3s.  6d. 

Book  III.    By  S.  G.  OWEN.    Third  edition,  re- 
vised.   2s. 

PlautuS,  Captivi.    By  W.M.LINDSAY.  Fourth  edition.  2s.  6d. 

Mostellaiia.      By  E.  A.  SONNENSCHEIN.   Second  Edition, 

Text  interleaved.     4s.  6d. 
RudenS.     ByE.A.  SONNENSCHEIN.    Text  and  Appendix 

on  Metre  interleaved.     4s.  6d. 
TrinummUS.  By  C.E.  FREEMAN  and  A.  SLOMAN.  Fourth 

edition.    3s. 

Pliny,  Selected  Letters.     By  C.  E.  PRICHARD  and  E.  R. 
BERNARD.     Third  edition.    3s. 

Quintilian,  Institutionis  Liber  x.    By  w.  PETERSON. 

Second  edition.    3s.  6d. 

Sallust.     By  W.  W.  CAPES.     Second  edition.    4s.  6d. 
Tacitus,  Annals  (text  only).     Crown  8vo.     6s. 

Annals,  Books  I-IV.     By  H.  FURNEAUX.    5s. 

Book  I.     By  the  same  editor.    Limp,  2s. 

Books  XIII-XVI.    By  H.  PITMAN.  Crown  8vo 
with  map.    4s.  6d. 

Terence,  Adelphi.     By  A.  SLOMAN.    Second  edition.    3s. 
Andria.     By  C.  E.  FREEMAN  and  A.  SLOMAN.     Second 

edition.    3s. 
Phormio.     By  A.  SLOMAN.    Third  edition.    3s. 

Tibullus  and  Propertius,  Selections.     By  G.  G. 

-  RASJSAY.    Second  edition.    6s. 
26 


ANNOTATED  GREEK  CLASSICS 

Virgil.     By  T.  L.  PAPILLON  and  A.  E.  HAIGH.    Two  volumes. 
Crown  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  each  ;  or  stiff  covers,  3s.  6d.  each. 

Aeneid,  Books  I-III,  IV-VI,  VII-IX,  X-XII.    By  the 

same  editors.    2s.  each  part.    Book  IX  by  A.  E.  HAIGH, 
Is.  6d.  ;  in  two  parts,  2s. 

BuCollCS  and  GeorgicS.   By  the  same  editors.  2s.  6d. 
Bucolics.      2s.  6d.      GeorgicS,  Books  I,  II,  2s.  6d. 

Georgics,  Books  in,  iv,  2s.  ed.   Aeneid,  Book  i. 

Limp  cloth,  Is.  6d.     All  by  C.  S.  JERRAM. 

Greek  Classics  for  Schools 

Aeschylus.     By  ARTHUR  SIDGWICK,  with  the  text  of  the  Oxford 
Classical  Texts. 

Agamemnon.     Fifth  edition  revised.    3s. 
Choephoroi.     New  edition  revised.    3s. 
EumenideS.    Third  edition.    3s. 

Persae.   3s. 

Septem  contra  Thebas.    3s. 

Prometheus  Bound.  By  A.  O.  PRICKARD.  Third 
edition.  2s. 

Athenaeum:—  'These  school  books  will  be  welcomed  by  all 
who  know  Mr.  Sidgwick's  editions  of  Greek  or  Latin  authors, 
which  are  as  near  model  performances  as  we  are  likely  to  get.' 

Pilot:  —  'Model  editions.  .  .  .  Mr.  Sidgwick  has  proved  that 
he  is  a  scholar  of  the  first  rank  ;  but  here  he  has  shown  that 
he  thoroughly  understands  the  needs  of  learners  as  well  as 
teachers.' 


,  Book  I,  edited  with  map  and  appendix  on  Pompey's  pas- 
sage of  the  Alps,  by  J.  L.  STRACH  AN-DAVIDSON.    Cr.  8vo.    3s.  6d. 
Aristophanes.     By  W.  W.  MERRY. 

AchamianS.     Fourth  edition.     3s. 
Birds.     Third  edition.    3s.  6d. 
Clouds.     Third  edition.    3s. 
FrogS.     Third  edition.     3s. 

ar 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 

Aristophanes  (continued) — • 

Knights.     Second  edition.    3s. 

Peace.   3s.  ed. 

Wasps.     Second  edition.    3s.  6d. 

Guardian:—1  Dr.  Merry  continues  his  series  of  Aristophanes, 
...  in  editing  which  he  shows  his  accustomed  felicity  of 
exposition  and  translation,  and  his  usual  judgement  in  selecting 
information.' 

CebeS,    Tabula.      By  C.  S.  JERRAM.     Stiff  covers,  Is.  6d. ; 
cloth,  2s.  6d. 

Demosthenes.     By  EVELYN  ABBOTT  and  P.  E.  MATHESON. 

Orations  against  Philip. 

Vol.   I:  Philippic  I,  Olynthiacs  I-III.  Fourth  edition.  3s. 
Vol.  II:  DePace,PhilippicII,deChersoneso,PhilippicIII. 
4s.  6d. 

Philippics  I-III  (reprinted  from  above).    2s.  6d. 

On  the  Crown.   3s.  6d. 

Against  Meidias.  Byj.R.KiNG.  QownSvo.  ss.ea. 

Euripides.    AlcCStis.  By  C.S.  JERRAM.  Fifth  edition.  2s.  6d. 
Bacchae.     By  A.  H.  CRUICKSHANK.    3s.  6d. 
Cyclops.     By  W.  E.  LONG.    2s.  6d. 
Hecuba.     Second  edition,  by  C.  B.  HEBERDEN.     2s.  6d. 
Helena.     By  C.  S.  JERRAM.    3s. 
Heracleidae.     By  C.  S.  JERRAM.    3s. 
Ion.     By  C.  S.  JERRAM.    3s. 

Iphigenia  in  Tauris.    By  C.S.  JERRAM.    Newed.   3s. 
Medea.     By  C.  B.  HEBERDEN.    Second  edition.    2s. 

AlcCStis.     Translated  by  H.  KYNASTON  ;  with  introduc- 
tion and  notes  by  J.  C.  COLLINS.     Is.  net. 

Herodotus,  Book  IX.     By  EVELYN  ABBOTT.     3s. 

Selections.     With  a  map.     By  W.  W.  MERRY.    2s.  6d. 
38 


ANNOTATED  GREEK  CLASSICS 
Homer,  Iliad.    By  D.  B.  MONRO. 

Books  I-XII.  With  a  brief  Homeric  Grammar.  Fourth 
edition.  6s.  Book  I,  with  the  Homeric  Grammar, 
separately.  Third  edition.  Is.  6d. 

Books  XIII-XXIV.     Fourth  edition.     6s. 

Book  III  (for  beginners),  by  M.  T.  TATHAM.     Is.  6d. 
Book  XXI.    By  HERBERT  HAILSTONE.     Is.  6d. 

Homer,  Odyssey.    By  w.  w.  MERRY. 

Books  I-XII.    Sixtieth  thousand.     5s. 

Books  I  and  II,  separately,  each  Is.  6d.        Books  VI  and 

VII.     Is.  6d.         Books  VII-XII.    3s. 
Books  XIII-XXIV.    Sixteenth  thousand.    5s. 

Books  XIII-XVIII.    3s.        Books  XIX-XXIV.    3s. 
Lllcian,VeraHistorla.   By  C.  S.  JEHRAM.  2nded.   Is.  6d. 
LysiaS,  EpitaphioS.     By  F.  J.  SNELL.    2s. 
PlatO.     By  ST.  GEORGE  STOCK. 

The  Apology.    Third  edition.    2s.  6d. 

Crito.   2s. 

MenO.    Third  edition.    2s.  6d. 

PlatO,  EuthydemUS.  ByE.H.  GIFFORD.  Crown  8vo.  3s.  6d. 
MenexenUS.     By  J.  A.  SHAWYEU.     Crown  8vo.    2s. 

Plutarch,  Lives  Of  the  Gracchi.     By  G.  E.  UNDERBILL. 
Crown  8vo.     4s.  6d. 

Selections  from  Caesar.  ByR.L.A.DuPoNTET.  2s. 
Coriolanus  for  Junior  Students.  Crown  8vo.  2s. 

Sophocles.     By  LEWIS  CAMPBELL  and  EVELYN  ABBOTT.     Two 
volumes  :  Vol.  I,  text,  4s.  6d. ;  Vol.  II,  notes,  6s. 

Or  singly,  2s.  each  (text  and  notes),  Aiax,  Antigone,  Electra, 
Oedipus  Coloneus,  Oedipus  Tyrannus,  Philoctetes,  Trachiniae. 

Sophocles,  Antigone.     Translated  by  R.  WHITELAW,  with 

Introduction  and  Notes  by  J.  C.  COLLINS.     Is.  net. 
Scenes  from  Sophocles,  edited  by  C.  E.  LAURENCE.    With 

illustrations.     Is.  6d.  each.        (1)  Ajax.        (2)  Antigone. 
TheOCritUS.     By  H.  KYNASTON.     Fifth  edition.     4s.  6d. 

ThucydideS,  Book  III.     By  H.  F.  Fox.    Crown  8vo.    3s.  Gd. 

29 


CLARENDON  PRESS  SCHOOL  BOOKS 


Each  volume  of  the  Anabasis  has  the  full  vocabu- 
lary bound  up  with  it  ;  the  vocabulary  can  also  be  had  separately 
for  Is.  • 

Anabasis,  Book  I.  By  J.  MARSHALL.  Is.  6d.  Book  II. 
By  C.  S.  JERRAM.  Is.  6d.  Book  III.  Is.  6d.  Book  IV. 
Is.  6d.  Books  III  and  IV,  together.  3s. 

Cyropaedia,  Book  I.  2s.  Books  I  V  and  V.  2s.  6d. 
By  C.  BIGG. 

Hellenica,  Books  I,  II.     By  G.  E.  UNDERBILL.    3s. 
Memorabilia.     By  J.  MARSHALL.     4s.  6d. 

Latin  and  Greek  History 

A  Manual  of  Greek  Historical  Inscriptions.    By 

E.  L.  HICKS.    New  edition,  revised  by  G.  F.  HILL.    8vo.    12s.  6d. 

Latin  Historical  Inscriptions,  illustrating  the  history 
of  the  Early  Empire.  By  G.  MCN.  RUSHFORTH.  8vo.  10s.  net. 

Sources  for  Greek  History  between  the  Persian  and 
Peloponnesian  Wars,  collected  and  arranged  by  G.  F.  HILL. 
8vo.  10s.  6d. 

Sources  for  Roman  History,  B.C.  133-70.   By  A.  H.  J. 

GREENIDGE  and  A.  M.  CLAY.    Crown  8vo.    5s.  6d.  net. 

Latin  and  Greek  Prose 
Mr.  J.  Y.  SARGENT'S  Course 

Primer  of  Latin  Prose  Composition.   2s.  6d. 

Passages  for  Translation  into  Latin  Prose.  Eighth 

edition.     2s.  6d. 

Primer  of  Greek  Prose  Composition.   3s.  6d. 

Journal  of  Education  :  —  '  An  admirable  little  book,  and  one 
that  ought  to  revolutionize  the  study  of  Greek  prose  com- 
position.' 

Passages  for  Translation  into  Greek  Prose.    3s. 

:  select  Greek  versions  of  the  above.  3s. 
30 


LATIN  AND  GREEK. 


Other  Prose  Composition  Books 

Latin  Prose  Composition.  By  G.G.RAMSAY.   Fourth  ed. 
Vol.  I :  Syntax  and  Exercises.    4s.  6d. 

Or  Part  I,  First  Year's  Course,  Is.  6d. ;  Part  II,  Second  Year's 
Course,  Is.  6d.  ;    Part  III,  Syntax  and  Appendix,  2s.  6d. 

Vol.  II :  Passages  for  Translation.    4s.  6d. 

GraeCC  Reddenda :  being  miscellaneous  exercises  for  practice 
in  Greek  Prose  Composition.     By  C.  S.  JERRAM.     2s.  6d. 


Latin  and  Greek  Verse 

Helps  and  Exercises  for  Latin  Elegiacs.    By 

H.  LEE- WARNER.    3s.  6d. 

Demonstrations   in  Latin  Elegiac  Verse.     By 

W.  H.  D.  ROUSE.    Crown  8vo.    4s.  6d.   (Exercises  and  versions.) 

Helps  and  Exercises  for  Greek  Iambic  Verse. 

By  C.  E.  LAURENCE.    3s.  6d. 

Models  and  Materials  for  Greek  Iambic  Verse. 

By  J.  Y.  SARGENT.     4s.  6d. 

Keys  to 

Allen's  First  and  Second  Latin  Exercise  Books ;  Sargent's 
Easy  Latin  Passages ;  Ramsay's  Latin  Prose  Composition, 
Vol.  I ;  Sargent's  Greek  Prose  Primer ;  Sargent's  Greek 
Iambic  Verse  ;  Laurence's  Greek  Iambic  Verse ;  Lange's 
German  Prose  Composition ;  Ehrke's  Guide,  price  5s.  net ; 

Lee-Warner's  Helps  and  Exercises,  price  4s.  6d.  net ; 
Phillpott's  Xenophon  (Sections  1-3),  price  2s.  6d.  net ; 
Fox  and  Bromley's  Models  and  Exercises,  price  6d.  net ; 

are  supplied  to  teachers  and  private  students  only,  on  application 
to  the  Secretary,  Clarendon  Press. 

31 


OXFORD  CLASSICAL  TEXTS 


LATIN 

Asconii  Commentarii.  CLARK. 
3s.  6d. 

Caesaris  Commentarii.     2  vols. 

Du  PONTET.     2s.  6d.  and  3s. 
Complete  on  India  Paper,  7s. 

Catulli  Carmina.    ELLIS.    2s.  6d. 

Catullus  Tibullus  and  Proper- 
tius.  On  India  Paper,  8s.  Gd. 

Ciceronis    Epistulae.        4  vols. 

PURSER.  6s.,  4s.  6d.,  4s.  6d.,  3s. 

Complete  on  India  Paper,  21s. 

Ciceronis  Orationes.  CLARK. 
Pro  Milone,  Caesarianae,  Phil- 
ippicae.  3s.  Pro  Roscio, 
De  Imperio  Cn.  Pompei,  Pro 
Cluentio,  In  Catilinam,  Pro 
Murena,  Pro  Caelio.  3s. 

Ciceronis    Rhetorica.      2    vols. 

WILKINS.     3s.  and  3s.  6d. 
Complete  on  India  Paper,  7s.  6d. 

Cornell  Nepotis  Vitae.  WIN- 
STEDT.  2s. 

Horati  Opera.  WICKHAM.  3s. 
On  India  Paper,  4s.  6d. 

Lucreti  de  Rerum  Natura. 
BAILEY.  3s.  On  India  Paper,  4s. 

Martialis  Epigrammata.  LIND- 
SAY. 6s.  On  India  Paper,  7s.  6d. 

PersietluvenalisSaturae.  OWEN. 
3s.  On  India  Paper,  4s. 

Plauti  Comoediae.  LINDSAY. 
Vol.1.  6s.  Vol.  II.  6s.  Com- 
plete on  India  Paper,  16s. 

Properti  Carmina.  PHILLIMORE. 
3s. 

Statius ;  Silvae.  PHILLIMORE. 
3s.  6d. 

Thebais      and      Achilleis. 
GARROD.  6s.  Complete  on 
India  Paper,  10s.  6d. 

•Taciti  Op.  Min.  FURNEAUX.   2s. 

Taciti  Annalium.  FISHER.  6s. 
On  India  Paper,  7s. 

Terenti  Comoediae.  TYRRELL. 
3s.  6d.  On  India  Paper,  5s. 

Tibulli  Carmina.    POSTGATE.  2s. 

Vergili  Opera.  HIRTZEL.  3s.  6d. 
On  India  Paper,  4s.  6d. 


GREEK 

Aeschyli  Tragoediae.  SIDO- 
WICK.  3s.  6d.  On  India 
Paper,  4s.  6d. 

Apollonii  Rhodii  Argonautica. 
SEATON.  3s. 

Aristophanis  Comoediae.  2  vols. 
HALL  and  GELDAHT.     3s.  6d. 
each. 
Complete  on  India  Paper,  8s.  6d. 

Bucolici  Graeci.     U.  VON  WILA- 

MOWTTZ-MOELLENDORFF.       3s.  ; 

on  India  Paper,  4s. 

Demosthenis  Orationes.  Vol.  I. 
BUTCHER.  4s.  6d. 

Euripidis  Tragoediae.  Vol.  I. 
MURRAY.  3s.  6d.  Vol.  II. 
3s.  6d.  Vols.  I  &  II  together, 
on  India  Paper,  9s. 

Homeri  Ilias.     2  vols.     MONRO 

and  ALLEN.     3s.  each. 
Complete  on  India  Paper,  7s. 

Hyperides.      KENYON.     3s.  6d. 
Longinus.      PHICKARD.     2s.  6d. 

Platonis  Opera.  BURNET.  Vols. 
I-III.  6s.  each.  On  India 
Paper,  7s.  each.  Vol.  IV.  7s. 
On  India  Paper,  8s.  6d. 
Vol.  V.  8s.  On  India  Paper, 
10s.  6d. 

Republic,    6s.;     on    India 

Paper,  7s. ;  on  4to  writing 

paper,  10s.  6d. 
First  and  fifth  tetralogies, 

separately,  paper  covers, 

2s.  each. 

Thucydidis  Historiae.      2  vols. 

STUART  JONES.     3s.  6d.  each. 

Complete  on  India  Paper,  8s .  6d. 

Xenophontis    Opera.       3    vols. 

MARCHANT.      3s.,  3s.  6d.,  3s. 

Hist.   Graec.,    Libr.   Socr: 


Anab. 

All  volumes  are  in  Crown  8vo ;  the  prices  given  above  of  copies 
on  ordinary  paper  are  for  copies  bound  in  limp  cloth  ;  uncut  copies 
may  be  had  in  paper  covers  at  6d.  less  per  volume  (Is.  less  for  those 
that  are  priced  at  6s.  or  more  in  cloth). 

Copies  of  all  the  volumes  may  be  ordered  interleaved  with 
wri ting-paper ,  bound  in  stiff  cloth  ;  prices  on  application, 

32 


/O  - 


PE 
1135 


Sweet,  Henry 

The  sounds  of  English 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY